JAYPEE

Printable Copy to DrEzaby
MCQsfor PGs

In
PROSTHODONllCS
Vinaya 5 B h ~ t
BSc BOS MDS (Prostho) ONB
Assistant Professor
Department of Prosthodontics
Saveetru Denl31 CoI l"S" and Hoopibls
Chennai
JAYPEE BROTHERS
MEDICAL PUBLISHERS (P) LTD
New DII.hl
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
p"u_Oy
Ji ......... P Vii
Joypee B,oth ... M"'k:ol Publloh ... IP) Ltd
Er.IC.o, HouH, 23J2JB ....... .; flood,
N . .. Dolhl •• 0 002, l<><Ii.
P_ •• - '9' ·' '·232121'3, '9'·' '·23212703, '91·' '·23.28202'. '·23.2<5672
F.>, '9H' ·2321""'110, '9'· ' ' ·2320_3 .... :.>m,",pubClideI2."onl.fIe1,;"
V;oil "'" W<l1>Sil0 ..... o.com

....
. •
rM F ... _:
Z$2 nk'd FlIxw. __ e_ Foo.oI .... ?Ioza
P .. _ -. C .... "" eoo 008, """"-' .g'-OO-232e:16M . • g'.o4--2e_r
Fa.. .g, .... _2e2fI2:I.:I, ......,.,.- ..... , ... , ..
8Nji
C.".. _. _ +0'-<00-201580911
Fo:<: _ : __ 1lOfI\
,.0, ....,." t.OO>O< s_, w"""""",, s.,u....
KoIkoto 700 0'3. I'h>no, +9'-33--2<'4S'92e F .. ,
_ : iI>Ix:aIOCOO ...... , .......
'0& """'......- e._, e' 0, SS R-., _ . N .... MGM ...........
PoroI. lh"","I O<lOO' 2. _ .... -n-2",04Sl2.
F ... +9'-22-2 • • $O$2e .,.......;
AlrignIo_. No""rt"" .... ... _..,.....,.
Of_In ..
",_ ... ____ 01"' __ 1no_
T ... _ .... .. IJO""_an<I __ ... .. _
10 <><VnoI. e.., eII<>1lo'- '" -... """"""'" 01 ma_. l>u11no _. primo<....,
_ "'''''''' ___ for''y __
man.. "' .. _.-Doit"j oN'y
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
51',tioll Ont:
M clion Twg:
Sect jon Thrt't'
Sterian four;
Contents
Fixed Partial Denture
Proslhodonlics ........................................... 1
Removable partial 0 .. 0111.,.
Prosthodontics
•.••••••••••••• 1O:Z
Complete Denture Prosthodontics ... 213
Gentral Topi cs ...................................... 317
(Full Mouth Rfhabililation. Prtciskm
AIII/ehmen/s, Imp/antology, Maxillofacial
Prosthodontics, Mi sce/lllnt'Ous)
Bibliognlphy •............•••.•............... .•••..............•••••••....... ....•.......... 35J
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
Section One
Fixed Partial Denture
Prosthodontics
1. An ,lCcural e medical his tory helps:
A. In deciding the treatment methodology
B. In identifying the possible risk factors to denia l
facul ty
C. In assessing the oral manifestations
D. In all of the abQve
2. Following are systemic conditions that affect the
pfriodontium exupt:
A. Diabetes
C. MP!JS
B. Epi lepsy
D. Pregnancy
3. Eroded teeth are ~ common si gn of followin g
conditions except:
A. AIDS
B. Hiiltal hernia
C. Bulimia
D. Anorexia nervosa
4. Temporomandibulu joint can be located by paipatins :
A. Just posterior to the auricular tragi
B. Just antl'rior to the a uricular tragi
C. Anterior to the auricular tragi, while patient opens
and doses the mand ible
D. Posterior to the auricular tragi while patient opens
and doses the mandible
, "
"
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
m MeQs for PGs In Prosthodontics
S. Auri cular palpation with light anterior pressures helps
determine potential disorder in the:
A. Anterior attachment of the disk
B. Middle attachment of the disk
C. Capsular ligament
D. Posterior attachment of the disk
6. Maximum lateral movement of mandible is:
A. 10 mm
B. 15 mm
C. 12 mm
D. 20 mm
7. Solberg-Krogh-Poulsen and Olssen described:
A. Smile analySiS
B. Comprehensive muscle palpation
C. 1MJ examination
D. li p examination
8. Smile anillysis help5 in:
A. Treatment planning
B. Margin placement of crowns
C. Both ' A' and 'B'
D. Periodontal considerations
9. lateral utent of smile depends on following except:
A. Width of the alveolar proct"Ss
B. Length of the alveolar process
C. Length of the upper lip
D. Mobility of the upper li p
10. The dark s p ~ c e visible between m.u:illary and
mandibular teeth when patient laughs, is called as:
A. Corridor space
B. li ngual space
C. Negative space
D. Donders space
"
9 A 10 C
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
Fixed Partial Denture Prosthodontics m
11. " Walking" ci rcumferenli ally through gingi val sulcus
determines:
A. Depth of the periodontal pocket
B. Depth of the gingival sulcus
C. Sudden change in attachment level
D. All of the above
12. For a good .butment selection, the gingiva should be:
A. Sharply pointed at the interdental area
8. Keratinized
C. Tightly bound
D. AI! of the above
13. Mylu strip un be used to detect:
A. Occlusal conl3cts in eccentric movement
B. Fremitus
C. Crepitus
D. Clicking
14. Intucuspal position h a ~ been earlier referred 10 as:
A. Centric relation
8. Eccentric relation
C. Centric occlusion
D . Slide in centric
15. Slide i n cenlric is:
A. Present in most of the natural dentition
B. Abnormal in natural dentition
C. Has a vertical and a horizontal component
D. Both 'A' and 'C' are correct
16. freml lus indicales:
A. Periodontal mobility
B. Overcrowding
C. Migration
D. Tooth contact during lateral excursions
11 D 12 D 13 A I ' C 15 D " D
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
m MeQs lor PGs In Prosthodontics
17. In the presence of protective refiens:
A. Patient moves the jaw with ease
B. Jaw can be guided through hinge closure easily
C. Masticatory func tion can be easily assessed
D . Jaw maneuverabili ty is di fficult
18. films are n()t sati sfactory f()r:
A. Assessing bone support
B. Root morphology
C. Caries
D . All of the above
19. films are espu ially useful in assessing:
A. Buried root tips
B. Impacted third molOlcs
C. Bone prior to implant placement
D. All of the above
20. Vila lily testing can be done us ing one of the
foll owing exce,,' :
A. Electrical stimulation B. Stethoscope
C. Th(>rmal stimulation D. Percussion
21 . Vi t.alit y tests determine only:
A. Efferent nerve supply B. Blood supply
C. Afferent nerve suppl y D . CNS
22. Mounted casts:
A. Determine the static relationship of the teeth
B. Determine the dynamic relationship of teeth
C. Reveal occlusion not detectable in the mouth
D. Do all of the above
23. Articulator selection depends on the following except:
A. Type and complexi ty of treatment needs
B. Operator's skill s
C. Demands for procedural accuracy
D. General expediency
170 liD 190 20 B 2tC 220 23 B
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
FIx-eel Partial Denture Prosthodontics IT]
24. In hinge articulators, premature contacts in occlusion
(l(cur due 10:
A. less dist,mce betwccn hinge of thc articulator and
the tooth being restored
B. Morc distance between hinge and the tooth being
restored .
C. Discrepancy in the path of closures of the articulator
and mouth
D. Both ' A' and 'C'
25. Arcon is:
A. Mechanical fossa is related to the maxilla
B. ARticulator and CONdyle
C. Condylar path is fixed rel ative to the occlusal plane
D. True for all of the above statem('nts
26. A Fae .. bow r .. c o r d ~ :
A. Centric jaw relation
B. Orientation relation
C. Hinge axis
D. Both 'B' and 'C'
27. Vilu .. of error for an arbitrary filce bow in recording
the axis is:
A. 10 mm
B. 2 mrn
C. 5 mm
D. 3 mrn
28. Only cusp tips an rn orded in the recordi ng m .. dium
(or fae .. bo w trans f ... ,
A. To facilitate easy pla(ement of the (ash
B. Because lips are more accurate than fossa
C. Both' A' and '8'
D. To prevent damage to the natural teeth
240 250 250 21C HC
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
m MeOslor PGsin Prosthodontics
29. Denar articulator usn following anterior reference
point:
A. Ala of the nose
B. Orbitale
C. Mark 43 mm superior to incisal edge of maxillary
central incisor
D. Mark 43 mm superior to incisal edge of mandibular
central incisor
30. Denar face now is caUed as:
A. Quick mount face bow
B. Spring face bow
C. Slidematic face bow
D. Twirl bow
31. Following are methods
except:
A. Colton rolls
C. CR record
to deprogramme mandiblt'
B. Plastic leaf gauge
D. Lucia Jig
32. Anterior programming device must be in plact' for at
least:
A. 10 minutes
C. 30 minutes
B. 60 minutes
D.05 minutes
33. Following are materials used for inlero<;dusal records
except:
A. Polyvinyl siIoxane
B. Aluwax
C. Baseplate wax
D . Irreversible hydrocolloid
34. Following methods are used to check corred mounting
except one:
A. Using thin articulatin g film
B. By means of split cast mounting
C. With Denar veriche<:k
D. Verticulator
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
Fixed Partial Denture Prosthodontics m
35. Protrusive records ue used to adjust:
A. Each side shift
B. Condylar inclination on one side
C. C(' nt ric rdation
o. Condylar inclination on both sides
36. Average value for immediate side shift is:
A. 7mm B. 1 mm
C. 10 rum 0. 0.1 mm
37. Custom acrylic anterior guidance table can be used to
determine:
A. Accurate contact of anterior teeth
B. Lingual contour of the ant(' rior teet h
C. Influence of anterior tccth on border movement of
mandible
D. All of the above
38. Anterior guidance diffel1'l from anterior referrnce point
in that it;
A. Helps in orienting th(' maxilla
B. border movements of the mandible
C. Determines arc of opening of mandible
D. Determines the refer('nce plane
39. Panadent quick analysrr detrrminn:
A. Condylar path inclination
B. Side shift of the mandible
C. Occlusal plane of the dentition
O. Both' A' and ' 8'
40. Treatmrnt objectives ue following except:
A. Identification of patient's nccds
B. Corre<:t existing
C. Prevent future disease
D. Restore function and esthetics
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
m Measlor POsln Prosthodontics
41 . Following ue extracoronal restorations except one:
A. Partial veneer crown B. Full veneer c!Own
C. RJdiculJr ret ainer
D. L,minates
42. Inlay is con lra indiute d in highly weakened tooth
brcausr:
A. Not {'nough tooth s t ructur{'
B. R{'maining tooth dot's not resist wedgi ng effect
C. Support and r{'tention is not obtained for the
restoration
D. All of the above
43. ue not s uitable for retainers for fixed putlal
denturu because they:
A. Do not have sufficient r{' lenlion
B. 00 not have sufficient resistance
C. Both 'A' and 'B' are correct
O. Require minimal tOQth reduction
44. To gain more res is tan ce retention, following
modifications can be in for full
veneer crown except:
A. Box
C. Grooves
B. Pinholes
O. Offset
45. Esthetic5 nn be enhanced by followi ng met hods
ewept:
A. Sufficient tooth reduction
B. IncreaSing the taper of the preparation
C. Subgingival finish margins
O. Making labial margins in porcelain
46. Problems with resi n -veneered restorations are
followi ng ucept:
A. AbraSion and wear
B. Discoloration
C. Clicking noise
O. Weak physical properties
41 C 420 43C 44D 4S8 48C
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
Fixed Partial Denlure Prosthodontics m
41. Problems with all-ceramic restoration ue following
except:
A. Lack. of strength
B. Difficulty in marginal fit
C. Hi ghly complicated procedure
D . Good esthetics
48. Following substances ca n be used to , Irenglhen
ceramic except:
A. Zirconia
B. Alumina
C. Lcuci te crystals
D. Feldspar
49. When a weaker abutment is not s plinted to the
adj acent stronger toot h in a fi xed parti al denture, the
Fi xed partial denture will:
A. Supraerupt
B. Laterally drift
C. Become mobile
D. Get d islodged
50. CantilevH fixed partial denture is not indicated as:
A. It cannot tolerate forces acting on it
B. Prognosis is poor on long-term
C. It will induce lateral forces on periodontal ligament
D. All above arc true
51. Leas l preferred mode of management of tilted
abutment is:
A. Orthodontic uprighting
B. Mesial half crown
C. Non- rigid connector
D. Extraction
52. Width of the normal gingiva varies from:
A. 2-3 mm B. \-9 mm
C. 10-12 mm 0. 15-20 mm
41 D 48 D 49 B 50 D 51 0 S2 B
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
R Meas for PGs In Prosthodontics
53. Mucogingival junction st!'paratt!'s:
A. Gi ngiva and al veolar mucosa
B. Junctional epithelium and sulcular epi thelium
C. Marginal gingiva and allached gingiva
D. Periosteum and alveolar mucosa
54. Transition from kt!' ratinized to smooth non-keratinized
mucosa occurs at:
A. The junction of free marginal gi ngiva and attached
gingiva
B. Mucogingival junction
C. The junction of marginal gingiva and free marginal
groove
D. The biological width
55. Col is the area of ging iva:
A. Between free marginal gingiva and free gingival
groove
B. Consisting of a buccal and lingual component .
C. That occupies area b<! tween adjacent teeth
D. Both 'B' and 'C' ace true
56. Attacht!'d gingiva is thl!' t!'Xtt!'nsion bt!'twt!'t!'n:
A. Epithelial allachment and mucogingival junction
B. Alveolar mucosa and mucogingival junction
C. Free marginal gingiva and free gi ngival groove
D. Periosteum and muoogingival junction
57. Gingi vodental li gamt!'nt consists of:
A. Alveologingival fibers
B. Dentogingival fibers
C. Denloperiosteal fibers
D. All of the ab-ove
58. Following are functions of peri odont ium:
A. Attachment and support for the tooth
B. Nutr ition and mechanoreception
C. Synthesis and resorption
D. All of the above
53A 548 550 56A 510 580
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
FiltH Partial DanttJre Prostnodonti« m
59. Following structures are part of the periodontium
exupt:
A. Sharpey's fibers
8. Cementum
C. Periosteum
D. Nerves and blood vesscls supplying the tooth
60. Following is part of thl'" periodontal ligament uupt
one:
A. Trans-scptal fibers
B. Alveolar crest fibers
C. Coronal fibers
D. Apical fibers
61. Alveolar crest fibers lie:
A. Apical to epi thelial attachment
B. Coronal to epithelial attachment
C. Between cementum and alveolar crest
D. ' A' and '8' are true
62. Most numerous fibers in periodontal ligament are:
A. Horizontal fibers
B. Apical fibers
C. Oblique fibers
D. Trans-septal fibers
63. Synthetic cell in produces
collagen is:
A. Cementoblast B. Fibroblast
C. Megaloblast D. Epithelial rest
64. The junctI on between bast of the gingiu and the
tooth is called:
A. Mucogi ngival Junelion (MGn
B. Cementogingival Junction (CGJ)
C. DcntogingivalJunction (OGH
D. AlveologingivalJunction (AGJ)
500 SOC 610 aze 638 64C
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
M Meas forPG.ln Prosthodontlc.
65. Dentogingival Junction
A. Hemidesmosomes
C. Basal Lamina
is mide up of:
B. Chromosomes
D. 'A' and 'C'
66. Avuage depth of gingiva l sulcus in hulthy
individUil I is:
A. 3mm
B. 5 mm
C. 1.8 mm
D. 1.3 mm
67. Mituia ilbi consi sts Clf:
A. Microorganisms
B. Dead epithelial cells
C. Leucocytes
D. All of the above
68. matrix in plaque is made up of following
I'XUpt:
A. Carbohydrates
B. Protein
C. Calcium and phosphate ions
D. Macrophages
69. AnnTobic of plaque consists mostly of
following except:
A. Cram-positive microbes
B. Cram-negative mic.robes
C. Spirochetes
D. Filamentous organisms
70. Gingiviti s gets transformed into pHiodontitis when:
A. Aerobic plaque gets transformed to anaerobic
B. Loss of conne<:tive tissue occurs
C. Attumulation of inflammatory cells occurs
O. Basa l cells of junctional epi thelium begin to
proliferate
&5D Me 67D "A 708
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
Fixed Partial Denture prO'thodontiC'@
71. floss is floss
A. It is smaller in diameter
8. The squeaking noiSe it makes can be used as guide
C. As it flattens, all the fibers are utilized for flossing
D. All of thE' above
72. Disclosing for
A. Alizarin-S
B. Erythrosin dye
C. Cobal t dye
D. Ferrous sulfate
73. Following nn gingiul irritation except:
A. Overhanging restoration
8. Open proximal cont.:"t
C. Heavy occlus"l force on restoration
D. FQOd impaction
74. 'Sounding' periodontium
A. If the periodontium is sound
B. If the tooth is hopeless and e>;traction
C. If the tooth can serv(' as abutm('nt
D. All of th(' above
75. Some periodontally involved require:
A. Splinting with provisionals
B. Splinting with etched cast r('storation
C. E>;traction
D. All of the abov('
76. Soft to therapy are:
A. Minimum probing depth of sulcus
B. Absence of inflammation
C. Accurate loca tion of mucogingival junction in
relation 10 tooth
D . AU of th(' above
110 n8 13C 740 150 TtO
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
m Meas f or PGs In Prosthodontics
77. PrOCfdurf of gingivfctomy was introducfd by:
A. Dr ev Black B. l.oe and Silne5s
C. Ramfjord and Ash D. Carranza
78. Gingivectomy can be done fo r foll owing except:
A. Keratinized gingiva
B. Suprabony pockets
C. Fibrous gingiva
D. Infrabony poeket
79. Mucosal reparative t herapy:
A. Is done to increaSl' width of thE' keratinized gingiva
B. Is a surgical grafting procedure
C. Indudes free autogenous gingival g r ~ f t
D. Includes all of thE' above
80. Foit owing are types of mucosal reparative therapy
e."""pt :
8>.
A. Free autogenous graft
B. L.1terall ), positioned pedicle graft
C. Coronally positioned pedide graft
D. Gingivectomy
An abutmen t mus t
attached gingiva:
A. 5mm
C. 1 mm
have at teas t
B. 3 mm
D. 2 mm
___ of
82. Amount of keratinized
approximatel y:
mu cou present shoul d be
83.
n
A. 5mm
C. I mm
B. 3 mm
0 .2 mm
Root furcation therilpy includes foll owing except;
A.
Ele<:trosurgery
B. Induction of bone form3tion
C. Removal of bone by surgery
D. Tooth modification by root resection
,
'"
'"
.. ,
"
,
."
"
,

Printable Copy to DrEzaby
84.
Fixed Partial Denture Prosthodontles m
Materials used
A. Cartilage
C. Ceramic
to fill osseous defects include:
B. Sclera
D. All of the above
85. Osseous recontouring CiUl be accomplished by:
A. Leveling interproximal lesions
B. Thinning bony ledges
C. Ramping criller defects
D. All of the above
86. Osseous recontouring is aimed at :
A. Sound osseous base for gingiva
B. Elimination of pocket
C. Elimination of excessive sukular depth
D. All of the above
87. Prior to surgery, 'Sounding' of bone helps In:
A. Determining depth of lesion
B. Determining width of lesion
C. [)(os.igning the incision
O. All of the above
88. Final tissue maturation and sulcus reformation dter
surgery, takn about:
A. 4--6 weeks
B. 4--6 months
C. 6-- 12 months
D. 2·3 months
89. Normal position of oss eous crest is apical to
cementoenamel junctioll by:
A. 3mm H.I .5mm
C. 4mm 0. 5mm
90. in class 1 fUr(alion, vertical loss of pC'riodontal support
apical to cementOf!namel junction is:
A. :> 3 mm B. :> 1.3 mm
C. <3mm O. <lmm
84D ~ o 860 8TO ue 8iB ~ e
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
m Mea, lor PG,ln PrO$lhodonlic,
91 . In class II furcalion involvement:
A. Osseous loss is evident on radiograph
B. Furca is > 1 mm horizontally
C. Furca docs not e><lend through and through
D. All of the above are true
92. In maxillary molar, the following {un:ation is more
apical the other:
A. Mesial furca tion B. Distal furcation
C. Lingual (urcation
D. Buccal furca tion
93. Following roots li e in the same plane, in a maxillary
molar:
A. Distobuccal and palatal
B. Mesiobuccal and pal atal
C. Mesiobuccal and distobuccal
D. Distobuccal and the ext ra root when present
94. Tunneling is:
A. Done on tooth with long divergent roots
B. Creating a through and through defe<:t
C. Done in class II and class UI furcation involvements
D. All of the above
95. Ind ications for root ampublion include followi ng
except one:
A. Closely approximated or fused roots
B. Internal resorption
C. Severe caries
D. Furcation involvement not treatable
96. Following cond i ti ons are contraindicated for root
amputation except:
A. Increased crown / root ratio
B. Inability to treat endodontically
C. External resorption
D. Decreased general loss of osseous support
9t D 92B 93 A MD 9S A M e
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
Fixed Partial Denture Prolt.hodontici [17']
97. Bicuspidiution reff'fS to:
A. Restoration of thc premolar
B. Restoration of each half of molar after hemisection
C. Cutting and removal of onc root from molar
D. Separation of roots orthodonticall y
98. Common typf'S of 'rutmf'nt for toolh with rf'Sf'ctf'd
rools ;Hf' following napt:
A. Restoring roolS as ind ividual tooth
B. Tooth usetl for abutment
C. Amalgam placed in roots and occlusion adjusted
D. Eltt raction
99. Guided Ti ssue Regeneration ~ i m s at following except:
A. Selective repopulation
B. Regaining lost at tach.ment
C. Allows cells from gingival connective tissue to
contact root surface
D. Creating space over root surface
100. Prognosis in Fi lted Partial Dentures depends on:
A. Residual alveolar bone
B. Tooth mobility
C. Occlusion .
D. All of the above
101. The Guided Tissue Regeneralion membrane is usually
placed:
A. At cementoenamel junction
B. Below cementoenamel junction
C. Covering the enti re rool surface
D. 'A' and 'C' are correct
102. Electi ve solt ti ssue surge ry includes following:
A. Alteration of muscle at tachment
B. Increase of vestibular depth
C. RemOvi ng soft tissue distal to molars
D. Any or all of the above
17 B M 0 "C 100 0 101 A 102 D
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
m Meas for PGsin Prosthodontics
103. Rt!.'I toration used to bui ld up a damagt!d tooth to idul
anatomi c fonn prior to p uparing for crown is known
u:
A. Core
B. Parti al veneer
C. Foundation restoration D. 'A' and 'C' are correct
104. Selecti on of core material depends on following except:
A. Extent of tooth destruction
B. Availability
C. Overall treatment plan
O. Operator preference
105. Material of choice for cort! when crown prt!parati on
will not ntend more thin 1 mm bt!yond core-tooth
junction is:
A. Glass ionomer B. Composite
C. Amalgam D. Zinc polycarboxyIate
106. An extensively damaged tooth should b e rutored
with:
A. Amalgam core
B. Composite core
C. Pin retained cast metal core
D. Glass ionomer core
107. Following art! trut! for cort! rt!storations exupt:
A. Unsupported enamel has to be eliminated
B. Acute cavosurface margins are acceptable
C. Series of steps perpend icular to occlusal forces
increase resistance form
D. Limit the extent of outline form
108. Preserving unsupported t!namel for cort! rt!.'Itorati on:
A. Helps resisting condensation for<:es of amalgam
B. Hetps placement of matrix
C. Facili tates amalgam condensation
D. All of the above
103 D 1 ~ B 105 C 106 C 107 '" loa 0
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
Fixed Partial Denture DO
109. Cavosurface margin for core restoralion (an be:
A. 45-135
0
B. 90°
C. 9Q.1OO"
D. 180-190"
110. Acut e cavosurface margin for (ore rnloution is
acceptable because:
A. It will conserve the toot h structure
B. It will help in condensation of amalgam
C. It is not to high stress
D. All of the above
111. Placement of pins for core restoration is different from
conventional amalgam restoration, in thai:
A. They should be placed more superficially
B. They should be placed further pulpally
C. They should be posi tioned at a slight angle to the
long Jxis of tooth
D. 'S' and 'C' are correct
112. Preferred matrix retainer for core build up is followillg
except:
A. Copper bands
B. Orthodontic bands
C. Tofflemire
D. Automatrix
113. In pin-retained-cast- core, a countersink is created al
the gingival floor nea r the pinhole to:
A. Fadlitate d efed-free die
B. Prevent pin fracture
C. Aid both 'A' and '6'
D. For bet ter finish margin
114. Pilot holes for pin restorations are:
A. 1 nun B. 0.1 mm
C. 2mm D.5mm
109 ... 11 0 0 111 0 112 C tt3 C tt4 C
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
G MCQs for PGs In Prosthodontics
115. Tapered pins are beller for:
A. Obtaini ng some leeway in paralleling the holes
B. Strength
C. Retention
D. 'A' and 'B'
116. Following tests be used to uamine vitality of a
tooth except:
A. Ice pencil
B, Gutta-percha
C. Heated needle
D , Pulp tester
117, To remove the broken post, following kit can be used:
A. Automatrix B. Masserann ki t
C. Tunnelling kit D . kit
118. Api cal that must be for post and core
restoration must be at leut:
A. 3 mm
C. 7 mm
B. 5 mm
D. 1 nun
119. Following are indications for elective endodontics
except:
A. In difficulty obtaining same path of insertion in
multiple abutments
B. Badl y tooth
C. When the buccal cusps arc fractured
D. When additional preparation is likely to jeopardize
longevi ty of tooth
120. Us ually maximum th i ckness of free autogenous
gingival grdt used for increasi ng width of attached
gingiva is:
A. 2 nun
C. <1 mm
B. 1 mm
D. 3 mm
115 0 116 C 117 8 118 A'" C 120 e
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
Fixed Partial Denture Prosthodontics rn--]
121. of laterally pos it ioned pedicle grafts are
following uupt:
A. Retains its vas.cularity
B. Recession at donor site
C. Attachment of graft with root is usually epithelial
D. Som('limes donor sit(' uncovers bony fenestrations
122. Usual donor situ
following except:
for free autogenous gnft are
A. Hard palat('
C. Iktromolar pad
B. Edentulous ridg('
D. Vestibular depth
123. Crown lengthening procedure is indicated in
following sit uations
A. Clinical crown too short
B. To improve appearance in anterior tooth
C. In limited osseous support
D. When restoration may impinge on biologic width
124. Crown ll.'ngthl.'ning can bl.' donI.' us ing following
procl.'d ufl.'s except:
A. P('riodonlics
B. Surgical
C. Orthodontic'p('riodontics
D. Endodontics
125. Minor orthodont ic movement has following adun-
t.ges except:
A. Restores biologic wid th
B. Directs occl usal forces along long axis
C. Favorable pontic spaces
D. Improves axial alignment
126. Following are usual cons idl.'fations to bl.' taken prior
10 extruding anterior tooth except:
A. Amount of labial bone
B. Occlusion
C. E5thetics
D. A diagnostic waxing procedure
t2t A 122 0 123 C t24 D t25 A 126 B
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
m Meal lor PGs In Prosthodontics
127. Reorganizing occlus ion prior 10 proslhodont ic
management relales to:
A. Removal of e<:centric interferences
B. Making iCP = CR
C. Elimination of occlusal dysfunction
D. All of the above
128. Following are contraindications to oc:clusal adjustment
txupt:
A. Tooth malalignment B. Chronic bruxer
C. Anterior open bi te D. Angles class III
129. Occl usal adjuslm .. nt is done in following sl .. ps except:
A. Elimination of protrusive interference
B. Elimination of lateral interference
C. Elimination of centric relalion interference
D. Elimination of group function interference
130. During a s lide in centri c, protrusive interference is
seen on:
A. Mesial inclines of m a ~ i l l a r y teeth
B. Distal inclines of mandibular teeth
C. Mesial inclines of mandibular teeth
D. Both 'A' and 'B'
131. Duri ng a protrusive interference at the teeth, condyle
gets d isplaced:
A. Posteriorly
B. Laterally to the right
C. Anteri orly
D. Laterally to the left
132. In a laterall y displacing prematurit y, following
inclines are adjusted:
A. Lingual facing incl ines of mandibular teeth
B. Palatal facing inclines of maxillary teeth
C. Buccal facing incl ines of maXillary teeth
D. 'A' and 'C' aTe adj usted
127 D 128 A 129 D 130 D 131 C 132 D
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
Fixed Partial Denture Prosthodontics [2i]
133. If the lalerally di s placing prematuril y occurs on
iaterotrusi ve side (lilteral slide), adjus t:
A. Bucral inclines of maxillary lingual cusp
B. Lingual indi nes of mandibular bucral cusp
C. Both ' A' and 'B'
D. Lingual inclines of maxillary lingual cusps
134. If laterally di s placing prematurity occurs on
mediotrusive s id e of mandibl e, do the followi ng
adjustment:
A. Bucral indine of maxillary buccal cusps
B. Buccal incline of mandibular buccal cusps
C. Lingual incline of maxillary lingual cusps
D. Lingual indine of mandibular lingual cusps
135. Second phase of occl usal adjustment concentrates on
following except:
A. Laterotrusion B. Mediotrusion
C. Centric relation
D. Protrusion
136. Goals of second phase occlusal adjustment are:
A. Eliminate protrusive contacts on posterior teeth
B. Eli minate interference on working side
C. Eli minate interference on non-working side
D. All of the above
137. Group Function occlus ion is consid ered when:
A. Mobili ty of canine is present
B. Poor bone support for canine
C. Wear of the canine
D. All of the above
138. Second phase occlusal "djus-Imenl consists of:
A. Creating a groove for centrk (USp
B. Eliminating centric contacts
C. Eliminating la\{'ral an d protrusive interference
D. Both 'A' and 'C'
133 C 134 8 135 C 138 0 131 D 138 0
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
M Meas lor PGs in Prosthodontics
139. Following are true for used for
occlusal rehabilitation, except:
A. Is used for developing molar di sdusion
B. Has two incisal tables
C. Has two condylar tables
D. Del(>rmines Ihecuspshapc and angle of hinge rotation
140. Whilf a tooth is being reduced to receive a full veneer
crown, the adja cent tooth can be preserved in the
following methods:
A. uave a slight fin of enamel on proximal
B. Use of metal matrix band
C. Using a thin tapered diamond
D. AI! of the above
141. While prepari ng the tooth, the soft ti ss ues can be
protected by us ing:
A. Mouth mirror
B. Flanged saliva ejector
C. Aspi rator lip
D. AI! of the above
142. Irrfversible pulpiti s occur due to:
A. Extreme temperature
B. Chemical irritation
C. Microorganisms
D. One or all of Ihe above
143. AVfrage di stallce of pulp horns in a maxillary central
incisor of a 50-60 yurs old patient is in the range of:
A. 4-5 nun B. 6-6.5 mm
C. 3-4 mm 0 .2-3 mm
144. Average distance of pulp horns in a maxillary central
incisor of a 10-20 rurs old patient is in the range of:
A. 4-5 nun B. 6-7 mm
C. 3-4 mm D. 2-3 mm
13g C 140 D 141 D 142 D 143 B 144 A
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
Fixed Partial Denture Pr015thodontlcs ~
145. During tooth preparation, temperature may rise due
to following ruson:
A. Excessive pressure
B. Higher rotJlional speeds
C. Condition of cutting instrument
D. One of the above or all
146. During tooth prepuation, water spr .. y is useful for:
A. Reducing temperature
B. Removing debris
C. Preventing desic.::ation of dentin
D. One or all of the above
147. Long axis of the mandibular premolu is indined
lingu .. lly by:
A. IS" B. 25"
C. 9" D.3"
148. Advantage of supragingival finish margin is:
A. Easy to prepare and easy to finish
B. Can be kept clean and maintenance is easy
C. Impressions are easy
D. All of the above
149. Following .. re reuons for subgingiul preparation
rxc:ept:
A. Cervical caries
B. Esthetics
C. When sufficient retention is available
D. In the presence of root sensitivity
ISO. A skilled technician can make a c.sting fit to within:
A. 20 microns
B. 10 microns
C. 50 microns
D. 25-40 microns
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
m Mea. lor PG.ln Prosthodontics
1S1. A skilled te, hnidan ,iln milke a por,elilin fused metal
mugins fit to within:
A. 20 microns
B. 10 microns
C. SO microns
D. 30 microns
152. A well designed finish mugin s hou ld have
c - ~ - - c c - - configuration:
A. Smooth
B. Stepped
c. Even
D. Smooth and even
153. Fnther-edge mugin is otherwise cilled as:
A. Chisel edge
B. Shoulder edge
C. Shoulder less
D. Shoulder with bevel
154. Disadvantilge of feather edge finish margin includes:
A. No bulk at margin
B. Lead 10 over contour in restoration
C. Less conservative tooth structure
D. Both 'A' and 'B'
155. Long Chamhr finish margin is usuall y given for.
A. Partial veneer crowns B. Full veneer crowns
C. Laminates D. Maryland bridges
156. Chamfer finish margin is indicated in:
A. All-metal crowns
B. Lingual margin of all-<:eramic restorations
C. Lingual margin of porcelain-fused -to-metal
restoration
D. All-metal crowns ,!rid lingual m.1rgin of porcelain-
fused-la-metal crowns
151 C 1 5 ~ 0 153 C 15. 0 1 ~ 5 C 158 D
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
Fixed Partial Denture Prosthodontles tv']
157. A bevel margin is indicated when:
A. Caries occurring on margin
B. Cervical eroSion at margin
C. Previous restoration leading to a ledge at margin
D. One or all of the above may be p rescnt
ISS. Beveling:
A. Gives beller metal finish
B. Minimizes marginal discrepancy
C. Removes unsupported enamel
D. Does all of the above
159. During porcelain firing, nown with shoulder
di storts Ius compared to a nown with
chamfer margins
A. Of rounded nature of the finish line
B. Of additional bul k at the shoulder
C. Of butt joint at the cervical margin
D. Of sharp corner at the cervical margin
160. Amount o f unsupported at mugins "In be
reduced by:
A. A shoulder finish margin
B. A chamfer margin
C. A sloped shoulder margin
D. A heavy chamfer
161. Sloped shouldu is:
A. 110 degrees
C. 180 degrees
B. 150 degrees
0 .120 degrees
162. Among the cast restorations, the following hn greatH
to cause tooth fraclure:
A. Onlay
B. Inlay
C. Partial veneer crown
D. Full veneer crown
151 0 158 0 1St B no c 181 D 182 B
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
m Mea. for PG. in Prosthodontics
163. Following a r ~ faclors that aid in direct retention of a
complete ciI$t crown I'xc«pt:
A. Taper of thc prcpara tion
B. Mesial and distal grooves
C. Luting cement
D. Near parallel preparation
164. Zinc phosphale cements act by:
A. Adhesion
B. Increasing frictional resistance
C. Contacting the tooth
D. Increasing the fi lm thickness
165. In analytical mechanics, closed lower pair of kinematic
elements refe rs to:
A. Lever of III order
B. Retention by an und(>rcut
C. Ferrule effecl offered by the tooth
D . Relation betwcen t wo cylindrical sur faces with
single path of movement between them
166. The cements used for cementation of crowns should
be under stress to offer retention:
A. Compressive
B. Tensile
C. Shear
D . Flexural
167. For incrusing roughness of fitting surface of casting.
the putide size of alumina used is:
A. 2SO microns
B. 50 microns
C. 100 microns
D. ISO microns
163 8 164 8 165 0 1&6 C 167 B
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
Fixed Par1lal Denture Prosthodontics Ci9""]
168. Whtn ctmtntation failurt occurs, it is usually st tn:
A. Between cement and tooth surface
B. Within cement itsdf
C. Between cemtnt and casting
D. Within metal casting
169. Following ( ement hu the mal(imum adhu ion to tht
tooth:
A. Glass ionamer
B. Zinc phosphate
C. Resin cements
D . Zinc polycarbOl(ylate
170. lateral forcts on il ( rown havt displacing tfftct with
a fulcrum of rotation on:
A. Occlusal third
B. Cusp tip
C. Gingival margin
D. Proxima! half
171. Areas on tooth resi sting lat e ral forces ut us ually
under:
A. Tension
C. Shear stress
B. Compression
D. Ductile st ress
In. R e s i s t ~ n e e depends on following:
A. Magnitudt of forces
B. Din'dion of fo'rees
C. Ptoperties of luting agent
D. All of the above
173. Rtsisting area in .. full veneer crown tooth preparation
is:
A. Lingual axial wall
B. Mesial axial wall
C. Buccal axial wall
D. Distal axial wall
In C In C 110 C 111 II 17t 0 173 C
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
M Meal for PGlln Proithodontlci
174. Following is type of tooth prepH<1tion which .. fteds
resistance form in full veneer crowns:
A. Taper
B. Rounding of axial angles
C. Short tooth preparat ion
D . All of the above
175. In a pHtl .. I coverage res to ration, resistance is increased
by givi ng:
A. Boxes or grooves
B. U-shap<'<i grooves
C. Flared bOlles
D. One or all of the above
176. To resis t defo rmation, line phosphate must have
compressi ve strength mOR than:
A. 35 MPa at 24 hours
B. 10 MPa at 24 hours
C. 90 MPa at 24 hours
D. 75 MPa at 24 hours
177. Axis of rotation in a part ial veneer crown is located
at :
A. Bucrogingival margin
B. Bucca-occlusal margin
C. Linguogingival margin
D. Ungua-occlusal margin
178. An incruse in tempt:rature from room tempt:ratuR to
50·Ce lsius afhcts the compressive s trength in the
foll owing way:
A. St rength increases by 50%
B. Strength d«:reases by 500/.
C. Strength decreases by 8O'YG
D. Strength increases by 80%
174 0 175 0 178 0 177 C 178 C
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
Fixed Partial Denture Prosthodontics [it'"]
179. Retentive ability of zinc po l yurboxylate cement
depends more on taper of preparation as compared to
Zinc Phos phate beca use i t has:
A. Lo ..... fatigue strength
B. Low modulus of elasticity
C. High modulus of elastici ty
D. Lo ..... impact strength
180. Rigidity for a crown can be obtained by:
A. 1.5 mm alloy thickness
B. Corrugated effed of all planes
C. Uniform occlusal reduction
D . All of the above
181. Type I or Type II gold .. lIoys COl n be used !Hltisfactorily
for:
A. Crowns
B. Bridges
C. Intra coronal restorations
D. Intraradicular r(>storations
182. Fad .. l margi n of a maxillal)' partial crown should end:
A. At ocdusafacial line angle
B. Within ocdusafacial line angle
C. Beyond the ocdusofacial line angle
D . At the occlusal surface itself
183. A Collarless design is indicat ed when:
A. Root surface is not discolored
B. Patients have high lip line
C. ' A' and '8' are true
D. Root surface is discolored
184. After periodontal surgeI)', gingiva usually takes ilbout
: - " " " ' - , : : ~ . to stabilize:
A. 3 weeks
C. 20 weeks
B. 1 week
D.12 weeks
179 II 110 Dill C 11.2 C 113 C 114 C
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
M Meas lor PGs In Prosthodontics
185. In a molar, for brlter to following
i s o u t during o f

A. Skyfurcation
B. Bicuspidization
C. Fluting
D . Tunneli ng
186. Following for cast crown
except:
A. Gross decay
B. Short crown
C. Intact buccal or lingual wall
D. Endodontically treated tooth
187. Idul for crown tooth
surfaces is:
A. 3 degrees
B. 6 degrees
C. 1.6 degrees
D. 60 degrees
188. the margin for i complete cut crown
should be i t
A. I mm B. 0.8 mm
C. 0.5 mm D. 1.5 mm
189. ocduu l reduction for non-centric cusps
for .. complete cast crown is I ..... st:
A. mm B. 2 mm
C. 1mm D.0.5mm
190. Functional cusp bevel is placed at about ____ _
to the long u is:
A. 60 degrees
B. 90 degrees
C. 45 degrees
D. 30 degrees
115 C 186 C 187 a 1" C 189 C 180 C
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
Filed Par11a1 Denture Prosthodontics [ii]
191. Non-centric cusp bevel refers to:
A. Slight additional redllCtion in palatal CUlipS
8. Slight additional reduction in mandibular buccal
""P'
C. Slight additional reduction on IT\4\xiilary buccal cusps
D. More reduction on the distal cusp of mandibular
molar
192. Amounl of non-functional cusp reduction is:
A.6mm B. O.6mm
C. 1.6mm D.2.6mm
193. Advantagu of non-centric bevel i ncl udes:
A. It prevents over-conloured crown
8. II p rovides more strength
C. Bolh ' A' and ' 8'
D. High esthetics
194. In a porcelain fused to metal ru toralion, the l"bi,,1
shoulder s hould utend alleasl lingual to
proximal contact:
A. 0.3 mm
8. 1 mm
C. 0.8 mm
D. 0.5 mm
195. 8ucco-occiusai conlrabevel i n putial venter crown is
helpful in:
A. Protecting buccal cusp tip
B. RemOVing unsupported enamel
C. Connecting mesial and distal nares
D. All or the above
196. Occluul offset:
A. Is a V-shaped groove
8. Connects the proximal grooves
C. Offers bulk and rigidity to restoration
D. Ail of the above are true
III C 112 II It) C 1114 8 illS 0 1M D
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
M Meas lor PGs in Prosthodonllcs
197. Indications for pin ut following

A. Highly carious tooth
B. Low caries index
C. Bulbous teeth
D. Intact tl'l!th undamaged
198. Indsalltdgt for a pin Itdgt prtp.aration is dont about
-'--070 ct rviul to incisal
A. 5-5.5 mm B. 2-2.5 mm
C. 1-1.5 mm 0 .0.5 - I mm
199. Mini mum width
A. 0.3 mm
rtcommudt d for It dgt is:
C. 0.7 mm
B. 0.2 mm
0 .1 mm
200. Ltdgu shou ld madt parall tl to:
A. InC"isal two-thlrds of lingual surface of teeth
B. Incisa l two- thirds of labial surface of teeth
C. Cervical two- thirds of lingual surface of teeth
D. Cervical two-thirds of labial surface of tt'l!th
201 . Ind tn tations for pinholn gtnually within thl!
n.ugin,,1 ridgts about lnsidt tht utunal
tooth contour:
A.3mm B. I. 5mm
C. 4 mm D.0.5mm
202. Dtpt h of tht pinholu un bt:
A. 4-5 mm B. 2-3 mm
C. 0. 1-0.2 mm 0 .0.5-1 mm
203. Advantagn of a ll -ct ramic ru torat iOM indudt
following tXCtpt:
A. Translucency
B. Esthetics
C. Tissue response
D. Strength
1'7,.. , ,. e ,",.. 200 e 20, e 202 e 203 D
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
Filed Partial Denture Prosthodontics liD
204. In all ceramic anterior ru tor.dions, it is beller to pl ace
centric contacts i t:
A. Incisal third
B. Middle third
C. Cervical third
D. Proximal half
205. Following are the fini sh mngins recommended for all
ceramic restorations:
A. Shoulder or chamfer
B. Shoulder or chisel edge
C. Shoulder or heavy cha mfer
D. Chamfer or heavy chamfer
206. Bonding btlween tooth and ceramic is achieved by:
A. Etching wi th hydrofluoric acid
B. Usage of silane couplin g agents
C. Etching with hydrochloric acid
D. Combined usage of 'A' and '6'
207. Mugin design for ceramic inlay is:
A. > 90 degrees
B. < 90 degrees
C. 90 degrees
D. > 110 degrees
208. Recommended margin design for cerami c onlay is:
A. Shoulder
B. Chamfer
C. Knife edge
D . Heavy chamfer
209. Amount of reduction need ed for laminates is usuall y:
A.lmm
B. 0.7 mm
C. 0.9 mm
0 .0.5 mm
21M B 205 C 206 D 207 C 201 D 20t D
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
M MCQslor pas In Prosthodontics
210. Advantage of lami nates is:
A. Minimally invasive
B. No local anesthesia required
C. Highly esthetic
D. All of the above
211 . Finish margin recommended for laminates is:
A. Deep chamfer
B. Heavy chamfer
C. Long chamfer
O. Chamfer
212. Normall y, proximally laminates at :
A. Ungual to contact area
B. At contact area
C. L,bial to contact area
O. Middle third
213. Long chamfer for lamina tes:
A. Exposes ends of the enamel p risms
B. Gives obtuse cavosurface angle
C. Helps in differential etching
O. Helps achieve all of the above mentioned
214. During res toring endodontically trrated tooth,
is by following:
A. Preparati on geometry
B. Post length and diameter
C. Luting agent
O. By all above factors
215. Among various pos ts, order of
amount of is:
A. Threaded post, parallel post, tapered post
B. Parallel post, tapered post, threaded post
C. Threaded post, tapered post, parallel post
D. Parallel post, threaded post, tapered post
21D 0 211 C 212 C 213 D 214 0 215 A
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
Fixed Partial Denture Prosthodontics m
216. The cri tical amount of toolh structure that remains to
decide ~ b o u t usage of retention from canals is:
A.2mm B.3mm
C.lmm D. > 4mm
217. Widest canal in maxilla ry molar is:
A. Distoou(cal
B. Mesiobuccal
C. Mesioli ngual
D . Palatal
218. In a post and carr restoration, grutest stress
concentntion occurs at:
A. Shoulder
B. Mesi al of root canal
C. Lingual wall
D . On t he distal side of root canal
219. Rolation of the post nn be prevented by following:
A. An\irotaUon groove in the canol!
B. Auxiliary pin on the root
C. A small cavity and with amalgam condensed· half in
post, half in root
D. Any or all of the ab()\'c
220. Gutta-percha can be removed using:
A. Gates-Glidden drill
B. Warm endo-plugg<'r
C. Warm broach
D. Either ' A' or ' B'
221. Amount of apical gulla-pereha to be retained for post
is:
A. 4-5 mm
B. 1·2 mm
C. 3 nun
D. 0.5·) mm
215 0 217 1;1 ~ 1 ' ' ' ' ~ 1 ' 0 :l2O 1;1 221 ,.,
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
m Meas for PGs in Prosthodontics
222. Avuage mniodistal diamet er of root for maxill ary
central inci sor at the CEJ is:
A. 7.3 ± 0.5 mm
B. 6.3 ± 0.5 mm
C. 5.3 ± 05 mm
D. 8.3 ± 0.5 mm
223. Recommended diamet er of the post is:
A. Half the diameter of the (oot
B. One-fourth the diameter of the root
C. One· third t he diameter of the root
O. Same as diameter o f the root
224. In mandi bu lar molars, the most susceptible uea (or
perforation i n t he root is:
A. Distal wali of mesial root
B. lvlesial wall of mesial root
C. Distal wall of dist a l root
O. Mesial wall of dist ,,1 root
225. In the maxilla ry molars, the most susceptible area for
perforation i n the root is:
A. Mesial or distal of distohuccal root
B. Mesial or distal of palatal rool
C. Mesial or distal of mesiobuccal root
O. Apex of the palatal root
226. Undersized (asting fo r a post can be achieved by:
A. Restricting expansion of investment
B. Omitting ring liner
C. Casting at a lower mold temperat ure
O. Utilizing any or all of the above mentioned
227. Material suita ble fo r post is:
A. Type II gold
B. Type IV gold
C. Nickel-Chromium .111oy
D. Can be both ' A . or 'C'
222 B 223 C 224 A 225 C 2211 0 :t27 D
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
Fixed Partial Denture Prosthodontics M
228. A gtoov., pla,ed alongside of the post:
A. Allows excess ,ement to
B. Usually used in the post
C. Reduces hydrostatic pressure
D. Fundions as all of the above
229. To fill th., , anal with cement, following instrument
is un d ideally:
A. Gates Glidden B. Peeso reamer
C. Lentulo spiral D. Endo plugger
230. Embedded fractured
A. Kurer kit
C. TMS pin
post can be retrieved by
B. Masscrann kit
D. Endopost kit
using:
231. Following are true for Debasing Ag.,nt in c.,ramics
except:
A. They are fluxing agents
B. u>wer sintering temperature
C. They are antifluxing agents
D. They either form li quid phase or go into solid
solution
232. Tenn " Vitreous
W
muns:
A. Development of cloudiness in ceramics
B. Development of liquid phase turni ng into glassy
phase on cooling
C. Process of blending, melting and quenching glass
component
D. Development of crystalline phase
233. Gap-grading system reft'fS 10:
A. Three different particle sizes of ceramics are used
to obtain high densi t y
B. Closing the gap during post-soldering system
C. ClOSing the gap between two fragments of metal
units during soldering
D. All of the above
22ID nee 230B 231C 2328 233 A
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
M Meas lor PGs In Prosthodontics
2301. One of the following i, not .. mdhod of condens .. tion
of cer .. mics:
A. Whipping 8 . Vibration
C. Gravitation D. Compaction
235. Brush·additive technique refers to:
A. Addition of dry porce lain powder to wet porcelain
B. Using s.lble hair brush 10 Iransfer wei porcelain 10
platinum matr ix
C. Brush is touched with a paper tissue during
condensation
D. Using surface tension principle while condensing
ceramic
236. Following are true for Air-Firing cer .. mic procedure,
<'Xrtpt:
A. A slow maturation period is ideal
8. Maturation period should be quicker to eliminate
entrapped air
C. Full m.l\uration temperature should no! be achieved
D. A heat-soa k, up to naif hour is re.:ommended
237. Following ;ue troe for vacuum firing ceramics, except:
A. Vacuum removes all the entrapped air
8. Vacuum mus.! be applied befol"(' the porcelain enters
hot zone of furn'}ce
C. Should not be prolonged .. fter maturation of ceramic
D. Vacuum should end while the ceramic is still in hoi
lone of furnace
238. Following are true for process of NThermal Shock" in
ceramics, except:
A. It is a process of st ressing ceramic crown
B. It is caused by uneven heating and cooling
C. Process of developing Crack propagation
D. Crown surface e ~ p a n d s more quickly than interior
234 0 235 B 236 B 231 A 238 C
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
Fixed Partlat Denture Prosthodontics M
239. Bulk diffusion refers 10:
A. Diffusion of air entrapped in ceramic to the surfare
B. Diffusion of air to a condensed form due to vacuum
C. Process of formation of o)!;idcs on the surface of alloy
D. Diffusion of gases to the surface during sintering
240. Following are true for Griffith Flaws, t;ltUpt:
A. They are occlusal errors in ceramic restoration
B. Crystill!ine phase in glass malri)!; reduces them
C. Flaw size is governed by distance between particles
dispersed
D. Smaller the flaws, better the strength of ceramics
2·11. Refracti ve i ndu of denLtI pon:dain is:
A. 1.51-1 .52
B. 2.51-2.52
C. 3.52-3.53
D. 4.51-4.52
242. Following art tl1,l e for Bonding Agents for (er.tmies,
txupt:
A. They are Colloidal Gold
B. They may increase potential oxide surface area {or
bonding
C. They condition the surface color of metal
D. They mask the surface color of the metal
243. Stokes' Law:
A. 5.1ys that surface flaws st rengthen the ceramic
B. States that glazing reduces the surface flaws
C. Is related to wavelength of tight emitted by
fluorescent substance
D. Refers to components of color in ceramics
244. En.mel Veneer required to crnte depth of
translucency in ceramic Is about:
A. 1.5·2 mm B. 0.5-0.8 mm
C. 0.8-1 mm D. 1.0-1.5 mm
mc 241 A 242B U3C a«c
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
m Meal for PGI In PrOllhodontlcs
245. Following are trut for Adams Co-ordinate
System', except:
A. Otherwise known as Munsell Color System
8. 'Lab' system
C. Used for ceramic shade gUide
D. Made of three c<rordinates
246. Following are the binders used for binding cer.lmic
particies, except:
A. Propylene glycol
B. Alcohol
C. Formaldehyde based liquids
D . Warm water
247. Following mtdications can be ustd to control saliva
except:
A. Atropine B. Dicyclomine
C. Clonidi ne D . Amoxycillin
248. Mtthantheline when used, the dosage is:
A. 100 mg tds B. SO mg Ids
C. SO mg once D. SO mg bd
249. Atropine is strictly contraindicated in the of:
2".
A. Glaucoma B. Di.lbetes
C. Epilepsy D. Carcinoma
Clonidine when used
A. 2 mg
C. 200 mg
to control saliva, the dosage is:
B. 20 mg
D. 0.2 mg
251. cords may
A. Plain B. Braided
C. Knitted D. Any type mentioned
252. Gingival ret raction cords may be dipped in:
A. Epinephrine B. Aluminum ch.loride
C. Ferric sulfat e D. Any of the above
245 A 246 D 247 0 248 C 2.' A 250 0 251 0 252 0
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
Fixed Partial Denture Prosthodontics m
253. Percentage of aluminum chloride when used is:
A. 15.5% B. 8%
C. 20-25% D. lO%
254. Polential dangers of us ing displacement cords are
following except:
A. R('traction of th(' marginal gingiva
B. Trauma to gingiva
C. Trauma to tooth struct uT(,
D. Trauma to smear layer
255. Dentin etching occurs around p H value:
A. 3.l
B. 1.7
C. 5.7
D. 2.7
256. Frequency of current used in electrosurgery unit is:
A. l)XlO,OOO Hz to l,500,OOO Hz
B. 1,000,000 Hz to 4,000,000 Hz
C. 8,000,000 Hz to 9,000,000 Hz
D. 4,000,000 Hz to 9,000,000 Hz
257. Fully rectified, filtered current is used because it:
A. Breaks down the cdls
B. Causes localized polarity change
C. Minimizes deeper tissue damage
D. CauS<!s all of the above
258. CUlling with electrode should be:
A. Continuous
B. Intermittent
C. Repeated with 5 seconds interval in-between
D. Fo!lowed intermittently with 5 seconds between each
attempt
259. Contact of ti ssue with e lectrode shouJd not uceed:
A. 0.4 secs B. 4 sees
C. 1.4 sees 0 .2 sees
253 C 154 A 255 B 2S11 B 2Jj1 D 2S11 0 259 A
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
M Meal lor PGs in Prosthodontics
260. Thickness of lin foi l 10 be placed for special IrdY for
eldstomers used for dentulous impressions is:
A. 0_025 mm B. 0_25 mm
C. 2.5 mm D. 15 mm
261. Thickness of spacer for elutornedc impression for
denlulous mouth is:
262.
A. 4-5 mm B. 2-3 mm
C. 0.5-1 mm D. 5-6 nun
Border of speci,d tTdy
extend apical
A.lmm
C. 4 nun
for dentu lous mouth should
to cresl of free gingival:
B. 2 mm
D.5 mm
263. Thickness of 2
approximately be:
of modeling wax would
A. 1.5 mm
C. 3.5 mm
B. 2.5 mm
D. 4 nun
264. Temperature of thermoslatically controlled water bath
in conditioning unit of agar is:
A. IOO·C, 65·C, 40·C
B. 65°C, IOO·C, 40·C
C. 100·C, 40·C, 65·C
D. 40·C, l OO·C, 65·C
265. Preformed celluloseacetale crowns have _____ _
thickness:
A. 1- 2 mm
C. 0.8-0_9 mm
B. 0.2-0.3 mm
D. 3-4 mm
266. All are advantages of Indirect-direct procedure of
fabricating except:
A. Reduced chair side ti me
B. The ESF is lined wi th resin
C. Less heat generatt'd
D. Contact b-e tween resin monomer and soft tiss ue is
minimized
260 A 251 B 252 D 253 B 28-4 A 25S B 256 B
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
Fixed Partial Denture Prosthodontics M
261. Ease with which an can be poured without
bubble formation is related to:
A. Hardness of impression material
B. Resiliency o( the impression material
C. Contact angle of the die material with impression
D . Surface contamination
268. Following material is easiest to pour "mong elaslomen;:
A. Addition silicones
B. Condensation silicones
C. Polyether
D. Polysulfide
269. Length of the individual dies is approximately:
A. 15 mm B. 25 mm
C. 30 mm D. 10 mm
270. Diagnostic casts for natural dentition are but mounted
in:
A. Centric occlusion
B. Cl."nlric relation
c. Maximum intl."rcuspal position
D. Inll."TCuspai position
271. While us ing arbitrary hinge axi s, a 3 mm centric
relalion record can create acdusal discrepancy
at fin;1 molar region:
A. 2 mm B. 1.2 mm
C. 0.2 mm D. 2.3 mm
272. When using arbitrary face bow, the Irue hinge axis is
usually away:
A.l mm B.2mm
C. 4mm D.5mm
213. Conformitive occlusion refers 10:
A. Occlusion of restOTJtion at Cent ric relation
B. Occlusion of restoration at inlercuspal position
C. Occlusion at Centric slidl."
D. All of Ihl." abovl."
;,ell II aTOll VIC anD 27311
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
m MeQs for PGs In Prosthodonllcs
274. occlusion is givt'n for:
A. Full mouth restorations
B. A small resloration
C. One quadrant of Ihe mouth
D . Both 'A' and 'C' are (orrect
275. At the margin, tht' casting should clost' ly adapt:
A. For a good fit
B. To prevent dislodgement
C. To prevent dissolution of luting agent
D. To get good retention
276. Oplimum dimension fDr the cement for each
wall of the CTOwn is:
A. 40-80 mkrons B. 20-40 microns
C. 10-20 microns D.O.S·\ minons
277. i ntem.li diameter of the cut crown should be least
-;--;;;-;;;larger than
A. 40-80 minons
C. 10-20 mi(rQfls
prepilred tooth:
B. 20-40 microns
D. 1-3 mi(tons
278. expansion of investment matt'fia l may
cause:
A. Larger crowns
B. Fins in the <:rown
C. tnmmpJete scating of <:TOwns
D. Porosities in the crown
279. In a set of PKT i nstruments, no. 3 is for:
A. Wax addition
B. Carving
C. Burnisher for refining occlusal anatomy
D. All of the above
280. No.7 spatula is used for:
A. Adding large amount of wax
B. Burnishing
C. Carving
D. Both 'B' and 'C'
274 8 275 C 276 8 277 A 271 C 279 C 280 A
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
Fixed Partial Denture Prosthodontics [4!J
281. Darby-Perry Trimmer no. 6 is:
A. A metal trimmer
B. A wax burnisher
C. Used for cutting sprues
D. USt.'<i for trimming acrylic
282. Hollenback (no. J ) and Ward carv<!l'$ (no. 2) a r ~ :
A. Used for carving composite core
B. Used for amal gam core
C. Used for compaction of gold foil
D. None of the above
283. R<!commend<!d occlusal scli<!me for r<!storation is:
A. Cusp to single marginal ridge
B. Cusp to both marginal ridges
C. Cusp to developmental groove
D. None of the above
284. Typ<! of occlusal schtm<! usually prt'Sent in nonnal
natural dentition b:
A. Cusp to single marginal ridge
B. Cusp to fossa
C. Cusp to marginal ridges
D. None of the above
285.
Occlusal contacts can be evaluated
using:
A. Potassium stearate
B. Sodium stearate
c. Zinc stearate
D.
None of the above
286. Cut-back is us ually done to a depth of:
A. 0.5 mm
B. 2 rum
C. J rum
D. None of the above are correct
211 B Z82 0 253 D "28-4 C 215 C 216 0
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
M Measlor pas I" ProsthodOl'ltles
287. Cent ric stops should
junction by at lust;
A. lmm
be away from metal-cerami c
C. 2 mm
288. Angle at porcelain-metal
A. > 90 d e g r ~ s
C. < 90 degrees
8. 1.5 mm
D. 0.5 mm
interface is;
8. = 90 d e g r ~ s
D. None of the above
289. Denial alloys prefened for fiud prosthodontics must
have;
A. Low yield strength
8. Low modulus of elastici ty
C. Low elongati on
D. None of the above
290. In noble metals, Rutheum and Iridium are added as;
A. St wngth{!ners 8. Grain refin{!rs
C. Passivators D. Surface hardeners
291. Minimum amount of gold content in hi gh-noble alloy
that should be present is;
A. SO"IQ by weight
B. 60"10 by weight
C. 10% by weight
D. 40"10 by weight
292. Tin and Indium in alloys;
A. Oxidiz{! during porcelain application
8. Give strength
C. Achi{! ve hardening of metal
D. Both 'B' and 'C' are tru{!
293. Silver helps in:
A. Oxidizing during porcelain application
B. Castability
C. Hard{'ning of metal
D. 80th ' A' and 'C' are correct
287 82118 2UD 2108291 D 292 A 2938
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
Fixed Partial Denture Prosthodontics m
294. d iscolo ration of Au-Pd-Ag a ll oy du r ing
porcelain firing is due 10 lhe presence of:
A. High sodium
B. High potassium
C. High calcium
D. Both ' B' and 'C'
295. Purgi ng refers to:
A. Periodic decontamination of porcelain furnace
B. Using carbon block to decontaminate porcelain
furnace
C. Removal of green discoloration from restoration
D. 'A' and '8'
296. lower o f metal mnn,
A. Restorations will be lighter
B. LeSli e.:.:onomic treatment
C. Less restorations per unit material
D. Both 'B' and 'C' are corre.:.:t
297. Semi preci ous contain more of:
A. Platinum-Palladium
B. Silver-Platinum'
C. Gold-Platinum
D. None of the above
298. Two pe f( ent Beryllium:
A. Lowers melting range
B. Lowers fluidity
C. Lowers castability
D. Does all of the above
299. All are symptoms of Be rylliOSiS
A. Weakness
B. Contact dermatitis
C. Jaundice
D. Respiratory symptoms
214.1. H!i D 2M.I. H YO 211.1. HOC
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
M Meas for PGs In Prosthodontics
300. To ,ont.ol thi ekntss of oxidt laytr in mttals
during firing of poretlain following is
A. Gallium B. Copper
C. Beryllium D. Silver
301. Base mtlal all oys may have noble metals by:
A. < 10% by weight
B. < 25% by weight
C. < 25% by volume
D. < 10"/" by volume
302. Acule dfects of txposure to nickel include:
A. Fatigue B. Weight loss
C. Skin sensitization D. All of the above
303. Following are thl:' alloys of Titanium uapt:
A. Ti·Cu·Nickel B. Ti·AI·V
C. 'A' and 'B' D. Ti-Callium
304. Pontic! with normal width prderrtd
for followi ng cases
A. When support is required
B. Knife l'dgl' ridgl'
C. Whl're good abulml'nts are preserved
D. Both 'A' and'S'
305. The established rati o for Golden proportion is:
A. I : 1.618
B. 2: 1.618
C. 0.1 : 1.618
D. 1.8 : 1. 61 8
306. In posterior ,eramic restorations, junction should
bt placed:
A. More buccally
B. AI thl' crest of Ihl' ridgl'
C. Stightly buccally
D. Lingually
300 C 301 B 302 C 303 0 3().4 B lOS A 306 0
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
Fixed Partial Denture Prosthodontics rsa
307. A C<lSt retaiJ1u used for removable partial denture
abutment has in addition:
A. Mesial guide planC5
B. Distal guide planC5
C. Lingual guide planes
D . None of the above
308. Path of withdrawal in an abutment preparation for
removable p a r l i ~ 1 denhlTt rtlainu is:
A. Lingual
B. Bucral
C. Mesial
D. Distal
309. Remo ..... bl e partial denture retai ners can have:
A. Buccal line of withdrawal
B. Lingual path of wi thdrawal
C. Different paths of withdrawal
D. Both ' A' and 'C'
310. The rotary instrument used for milling purposts in wax
is:
A. Cylindrical diamond burs
B. Tapered carbide burs
C. Cylindrical carbide burs with cross cuts
D . Carbide burs wi thout cross cuts
311. Exlracorona l attachments a re retained on tooth
through:
A. Single casting
B. Gla :;s ionomcr ceme nt
C. Zinc phosphate ceme nt
D. None of the above
312. Retention through
is by:
intra coronal predsion attachment
A. Frictional fit
C. Micropores
B. Cements
D. All of the above
301 C 30$ 8 309 D 310 0 311 0 312 A
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
am Mea. for PG.ln Pro.thodontlc.
313. Majority of the semi-precision att. chments requl«>:
A. Buccal retentive arm
B. Lingual retentive ar m
C. Ocdusal rest
D. Cingul um rest
314. Tinker's diamond points give . :
A. Shoulder margin
B. Long chamfer margin
C. Chamfer margin
D. Knife edge in tilled molars
315. Attuhmenls .. nd occ1us . 1 rest suts must be .t lust
__ aw.y from metal-ceramic interface:
A. 3 mm B. 2 nun
C. 1 mm
D. S mm
316. Rtcommtndtd diamtt". of th" . pru" for mobn ;s:
A. 1-2 mm B. 1 nun
C. 5 nun D. 2-3 mm
311. u:pansion of th" mold can bt obtained by:
A. Wetting the liner
B. SquC{.'zing the liner
C. Placing the mold in water aftl'r set ting
D. Both ' A' and 'C'
318. Av"rag" length of the
A. 10 mm
C. 12 mm
sprue is about :
B. 15 nun
D.5 mm
319. Angulati on of the placed sprue should be
to axial wall :
A. 90
B. 45 degrees
C. 135
D. 145 degrees
313 B 3U C 315 C 311 0 317" 311 C 31t C
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
Fixed P,rtllil Denture Prosthodontics rsa
320. Bue metal alloys melt with:
A. Gas-oxyacetylene torch
B. Gas-air torch
C. Both 'A' and ' B'
O. Single orifice gas-air torch
321. Preheating crucible avoids:
A. Fins and cracks
B. Excessive slag forma tion during casting
C. Porosities
O. All of the above
322. Approximate quantity of high density noble melal
alloy for a molar pontic may be:
A. 5-6 gm
B. 2-3 gm
C. 10-12 gm
O. 15-20 gm
323, In nickel-chromium ,liloy, indintion for readiness for
casting is that:
A. It will have a shiny surface
B. It will look dark
C. Sharp edge of ingot rounds over
D. All of the above
324, When metal in the sprue solidifies prior to in the mold
-;--;;c porosity occurs:
A. Back pressure
B. Generali7.ed
C. Subsurf ... ce
D . None of the above
325. Improper poros ity in the investment may cause
-:--;c--;.,-- porosity:
A, Suckback B. Generalized
C. Subsurface O. Back pressure
320 A 321 B 322 C 323 C 32. D 325 a
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
M MeQs lor PGs in Prosthodontics
326. Conversion from Photopic to Scotopic vision takes
about:
A. 20 seconds B. 20 minutes
C. 40 seconds D. 40 minutes
321. Blue paint on the wall of the operatory is advised
because:
A. It gives shine to the tooth
B. It is complementary to yellow
C. It illuminates the area
D. All of the above
328. Metamerism can be of following type:
A. Achromatism
B. Dichromatism
C. Trichromatism
D. None of the above
329. Complete lack of sensitivity to hue is referred to as:
A. Achromatism
B. Dark adaptation
C. Scotopic vision
D. Photopic vision
330. The opaque layer of cenmic:
A. Masks the dark metal oxide
B. Gives tunslucense to restorations
C. Functions as primary source of color
D. Acts as 'A' and 'C'
331. Base metal thickness recommended for framework of
an ceramometalli c restoration is:
A. 0.5 mm
B. 1 mm
C. 0.1 mm
D. 0.2 mm
328 0 327 B 328 0 32t A 3lD 0 331 D
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
Fixed Partial Denture Prosthodontics R
332. Ultrason ic d u ning of the casting is done for:
A. 15 minutes B. 5 minutes
C. 50 minutes 0 .25 minutes
333. Following are el ements that fonn oxides in gold alloy
except:
A. Tin B. Magnesium
C. Indium D. Zinc
334. Coefficient of thermal u :pansion of porcelai n should
be:
A. Less than metal
B. Such that ceramic is under tension
C. Above its glass transi tion t ... mperature
D. All of the above
335. Cont"c' angle developed between high gold alloy and
ceramic is "bout:
A. 40-60 degrees
B, 80-100 degrct"S
C. 20-30 degrees
D. 70-80 degrees
336. Particle s ize of a fi ne-grain porcelain ranges from:
A. 5-110 microns
B. 110-200 microns
C. 80-100 microns
D. 300-400 microns
337. Thickness of opil que porcel" in should not exceed:
A. 0.3 mm B. 0.1 mm
C. 0.5 mm 0 . 1 mm
338. Vacuum "ltained in porcelain furnace is between:
A. 20-30 em Hg
B. 80-100 cm Hg
C. 60-80 cm Hg
D. None of the above
332 II 333 II :t34 A 335 A 33& A 137 II 338 C
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
M Meas for PGsin Prosthodontics
339. Collarl eu crowns have:
A. Facial margin in porcel ain
B. Li ngual margin in porcelain
C. Proximal margin in porcelai n
D. 'A' and 'C' are true
340. Prim,try purpos .. of platinum foil during firing is to:
A. Create oxide layer
B. Create good bonding
C. Give shape to the restoration
D. None of the above
341. In Dir .. ct Lift Tf-Chnique of porcelain firing ___ _
is applied onto the die prior to firing:
A. Die spacer
B. Lubricant
C. Cyanoacrylate resin
D. Di e hardener
342. In porcelain wax technique, the ratio betw .... n
porcelain and wax is approximately:
A. 6 : 3 by weight
B. 6: 1 by w(' ight
C. 6: 1 by volume
D. 6 : 3 by volume
343. First ceramic nown was made by:
A. Taggart
B. CH Land
C. Mclean
D. Hugh('s
344. High·strength cerami c WillS introduc .. d by:
A. Mclean and Hughes
B. C H Land
C. Taggart
D. P K Thomas
339 A UO D Ul C U2 B U3 B :wi A
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
Fixed Partial Denture Prosthodontics CS!]
345. To improve strength:
A. Silica was added
8. Magnesium was removed
C. Aluminum oxide was fused
D. None of the above mentioned was done
346. Leucite is:
A. Magnesium-aluminum·silicate
B. Potassium-aluminum-silicate
C. Zinc-aluminum-silicate
D. Could be any of the above
347. Leucite:
A. Decreases CTE of porcelain
B. Increases CTE of porcelain
C. Decreases strength
D. Increases polishability
348. Following systems contain ieucit e except:
A, Optec HSP
B. IPS empress
C. Dicor
D. Cerinate
349. In ion exchange method of strengthening ceramics:
A. Molten nitrate salts are used
B. Molten citrate salts are used
C. Potassium and zinc ions are used
D, All of the above may be true
350. Ion exchange method incrnses strength by:
A. 10 percent B. 20 percent
C. 40 percent 0 .80 percenl
351. S t ~ n g l h of ceramics reduces in moist environment, due
10:
A. Static fatigue B. Stress corrosion
C. May be 'A' or '8' O. Shear thinning
letS C :J<I6 B 347 B 34& C 34g A 350 C 351 C
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
M MCQs for PGs In Prosthodontics
352. Platinum foil used for Porce lain Jacket Crown is
A. 0.001 inch thick
B. 0.01 inch thick
C. 0.1 inch thick
D. 0.2 inch thick
353. Tinne,..'s joint is:
A. Other name for TM joint
B. When Tin joins aluminum
C. Where Tin joins Platinum
D. None of the above
354. Preferred si te for TiOller's joint placement is:
A. Buccally
B. Mesially
C. Distally
D. lingually
355. The Platinum matri x is degassed at:
A. SOO· C
O. SOO· F
C. lOOO·C
D. 9OO·C
356. In-ceram uses:
A. Lost wax; technique
O. Ceramming technique
C. Slip cast technique
D. Machining technique
357. Preui ng procedure of cerami c rt!storation fabri cation
utilizes:
A. 900· temperature
O. 1500· temperature
C. llOO· temperature
D. 920· temperature
$2 A 353 0 35. 0 355 C 356 C 357 C
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
Fixed Partial Denture PTo.thodontlcs M
358. During gU.l.mming.. glu5 is co nvuled to crys lals
through:
A. Growth of leuci te crystals
8. Growth of tetrasilicic mica
C. Growth of tetra aluminum mi ca
D. Growth of al uminum. magnesl um-siJicate
359. Puce nlilge of hydrofluori c add used for etching
ceramic laminat", is:
A. 10.5 percent 8. 1.5 percent
C. 15.5 percent 0 .9.5 percent
360. Etching gel for cUlmic is applied for.
A. 10 seconds B. 10 minutes
C. 5 minutes D. 5 seconds
361. Pro1Cimal wrap in an Resin Bonded Prosthesis helps
m.l.i nly:
A. To retain the restora tion
B. To support the restorati on
C. To resist torquing forces
D. To d o all of the above
362. Muilluy molus for Resi n Bonded Pros thesis u",
prepared in:
A. One plane only 8. All planes
C. Two planes D. Any of the above
363. Mandibular molar for Ru i n Bonded Pros thuis is
prepared in:
A. Two planes
C. Any of ' A' or ' 8'
B. One plane
D. All planes
364. Chemlul-bonding in Resin Bonded Pros thesis Is also
achlevt!d by:
A. Tin plati ng
8. Glass lonomer cement
C. Sand blasting
D. Bot h ' 8' and 'C' are corre<:t
35e IS lSI 0 :JIG C 361 C 3112 C :tel II ,.. A
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
M Measlor pas ]n Prosthodontles
365. Electrolytic etching utilizes approl(imatdy:
A. 25% sulfuric acid
B. 30% hydrochloric acid
C. May be 'A' or 'B'
O. 18% hydrochloric acid
366. Chrmical Etching grl of Cisting consists of:
A. Sulfuric acid and hydrochloric acid
B. Hydrochloric acid and nitric acid
C. Nitric acid and sulfuric acid
O. Sulfuric acid and citric acid
367. Etch ing can be done for:
A. Nickel-chromium alloys
B. Nickel-aluminum alloys
C. Gold alloys
D. Both 'A' and 'C'
368. To improv'" bonding of nobl", m",ta! Ruin Bond",d
Prosthesi s to tooth:
A. Tinner's joint can be formed
B. Tin plating can be done
C. Platinum fOil can be used
D. Etching can be done
369. Adhuive resins may employ:
A. 4-META
B. Polyethylene glycol gel
C. Both' A' and ' B'
O. Hydrochloric acid
370. In brazing, th", fill",r mat erial has temperature as:
A. Same as parent metal
B. Less than 450°C
C. More than 450°C
D. More than 550"C
365 0 368 8 3$1 A 361 8 3$11 C 370 C
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
Fixed Partial Denture ProsIl10d0nlles C¥]
311. Recommended Soldering gap is:
A. 0.025 mm B. 1.25 mm
C. 2.25 mm D. None of the above
372. Solder to be used for Type IV gold alloy is:
A. 24 carat B. 10 carat
C. 18 carat D.22 carat
373. laser welding procedure has:
A. Reduced strength
8. High corrosion
C. Titanium component
D. None of the above
374. Internal nodules in casting can be detected with the
help of:
A. DisclOSing wax B. Chloroform and rouge
C. Mylar strip D. All of the above
375. To ilChieve matte finish on occlusal surface of casting.
sandblasting is done u$ing:
A. 250 microns alumina
B. 500 microns alumina
C. 75 microns alwnina
D . None of the above
376. For matte finish on metal. sandblasting should be
done at for
A. 90-100 psi for 1 minu te
B. 70-80 psi for 3
C. 70-80 psi for 1 second
D. 70-80 psi for 5 se<:onds
377. Beilby layer consists of:
A. Large crystills
8. Unpolished metal surface
C. Both' A' and '8'
D. Rearranged microcrystalline surface layer
371 D 372 C 373 C 374 II 375 D 378 C "Sr7 D
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
M MCQs lor PGs In Prosthodontics
378. A stone die from polysulfide impression is usually
:---;;;-::c than the tooth:
A. iO microns wider
B. 10 microns nar rower
C. 25 microns narrower
D. 25 microns wider
379. Rem.ining luting .gent on tooth after removal of
temporary restoration can be removed through
following except:
A. Explorer
B. Water-Pumice- mixt ure
C. Slow speed rotating instrument
D . Air-water spray
380. If careful technique is followed, the marginal
adaptation of a casting can be kept to:
A. 100 microns to 110 microns
B. 25 microns to 30 microns
C. 10 microns to 15 microns
D. 2 microns to 5 microns
381. More reliable indicator of occlusal contact is:
A. Ar ticulating ribbon
B. Shim stock
C. Both 'A' and 'B' are good ind icators
D. Articulating tape
382. Among luting cements, shear thinning is a property
exhibited by:
A. Calcium hydroxide
B. Zinc phosphate
C. Zinc oxide eugenol
D. None of the above
383. Working time of pol ycarboxylat e is about:
A. 2 to 2.5 minutes B. 5 to 5.5 minutes
. C. 3 to 3.5 minutes D. I to 1.5 minutes
378 0 379 C 380 B 311 B 312 0 383 II
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
Fixed Partiat Denture Prosthodontics @]
384, Prior to cementati on with zinc phosphate, loolh can
be prepared by:
A. Air abrasion
B, Applying a coating of varnish
C. Both' A' and' S'
D. Applying citrate
385. Prior 10 us ing polycarboxylate cement, the tooth
should be prepared by:
A. Applying varnish
B. Oxalate treatment
C. Both 'A' and 'B'
D. Applying citrate
386. Ther;{peulic occlus ion for fixed parlial denture was
first dtscribed by:
A. DAmico
C. McCollum
B. Stallard and Stuart
D. Gysi
387. (add-on) tfchniquf of devtloping occlu-
s ion in wu is credit ed 10:
A. PK Thomas
B. Meyerson
C. E Payne
D . Stuart
388. Centric cusps are otherwise known as:
A, Functional cusp
B. Stamp cusp
C. Shear cusp
D . Both 'A' and 'B' arc correct
389. laterosurlrusion is:
A. Lateral and downward
B. Lateral and upward
C. Lateral and posterior
0, Lateral and anterior
3M8 38511 3M8 381e 188D 3898
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
M Measlor pas tn Prosthodontics
390. Latuosurtrusion demands:
A. ~ p e r grooves
B. Steeper ridge angles
C. Both 'A' and ' B' are correct
D. Shallow groovt>S
391. GuateT immediate side shift tails for:
A. Longer cusp height
B. Mesial positioning of oblique grooves in the
mandible
C. Both ' A' and 'B'
D. Mesial positioning of oblique groove in maxilla
392. In laten.J movements, dEed of mediotrusion is seen in:
A. Ipsilateral canine B. Contralateral canine
C. Both canines D.lncisors
393. Non-working condyle is otherwi se ta iled as:
A. Translating condyle
B. Rotating condyle
C. Orbiti ng condyle
D. ' A' and 'C' are correct
394. Proximal box preparation for precision attachment used
must have following dimensions:
A. 2 mm faciolinguaJ, 4 mm occlusocervical, 4 mm
mesiodistal
B. 4 mm occlusocetvical. 2
mm mesiodistal, 3 mm
faciolingual
C. 4 mm occlusocervical, 2 mm mesiodistal, 4 mm
buccolingual
D. 3 mm occlusocervical, 2 mm mesiodistal, :; mm
buccolingual
395. For a small casting, the casting pressure required is:
A. 50 to 60 psi B. 100 to 120 psi
C. 15 to 20 psi D.5 to 10 psi
390 0 391 B 392 B 393 0 39. C :tH C
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
Fixed Partial Denture ProslhodonlJes M
396. Pickling refl'rs 10:
A. Using 70% hydrochloric acid
B. It is done for base m e l ~ l alloys
C. Both 'A' and 'B'
D. 50% hydrochloric acid for gol d alloys
397. Borax;lS flux during mdting mdal does following
uc:ept:
A. Prevents oxidation
B. Increases fluidity
C. Increases strength of the metal
D . Minimizes porosity
398. Holtl'st zone in a flame of gu· .. !r torch is the:
A. Inner most zone
B. Reducing zone
C. Oxidizing zone
D . Combustion zone
399, Asbestos liner hn following advantages txcept:
A. Prevents contaminating metal from crucible
B. It bums during casting
C. Insulates metal from crucible
D. Facilitates melting of al loy
400. Transfer of cnting ring from burnout furnacl' to thl'
casting machinl' should bl' donI' in:
A. < 0. 1 minutes
B. < 1 minutes
C. < 1.5 minutes
D. < O.S minutes
401. Agl' hardening of thl' gold alloy casting can bl' donI'
by following txcept:
A. Bench cooling
B. Immediate quenching
C. Quenching after 15 minutes
D. Heat soak' at 200°C
3"D me 3M II 39111 4008 40111
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
A Measlor PGsin Prosthodontics
402. Foll owing are types of ring liners ucept:
A. CellulOS('
B. A ccramic material
C. Asbestos
D. Polyethylene sheet
403. Orientati on of wax pallern in the casti ng ring helps
10:
A. Place the casting rin g in the machine
B. Decrease the heat
C. Achieve changes in expansion of investment
D. Allow gases to escape easily
404. Thielemann's formula. is more relaled 10:
A. Natural dentition
B. Complete denture-s
C. Occlusion in articulators
D. Both 'N and 'C'
405. Frankfurt Horizontal Plane is:
A. Porion to orbitale
B. Lower border of porion to orbi tale
C. Lower border of porion to upper border of orbitale
D. Upper border of porion to lower border of orbi tale
406. Freedom i n centric:
A. Occurs in everyone
B. Helps in all adults
C. Is 0.5 to 1 mm long anteroposteriorly
D. Has anteroposterior and lateral component
401. Freedom in centri c:
A. Is rarely found in natural dentition
B. Developed during occlusal adjustments
C. Formed in complete dentures
D. Is in all of the above
402 0 403 C 404 0 405 0 408 0 401 0
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
Fixed Partial Denture Prosthodontics M
408. For less Bennett movement:
A. Cusps should be longer
B. Ridge and groove direction should be distal
C. Ma)(iIlary anterior lingual concavity should be more
D. 'A' and ' B' and 'C' are correct
409. Following (.:actor will affect cusp h .. ight, ridg .. and
groov .. dir .. ction and lingual concavity of maxillary
ant .. rior t .. eth, all thr .... :
A. Rotating condyle direction
B, Inter condyle distance
C. Bennett movement
D. All of the above
410. Uses of inci sal pin and tabl .. is aU except:
A. Setting incisal guidance
B. To Wa)( up anterior res torations
C. Maintain centric relation
D. Maintain vertical relation
411 . If incisal guidance of the patient is too steep, in th ..
cast:
A. It has to be changed
B. Incisal table must be customized
C. Incisal table must be changed
D. All of the above can be done
412. Schuyler incisal tabl .. has following except:
A. Long centric pin
B. Centric pin
C. Center pin
D. Off-set Pi n
413. Long c .. ntric pin of S<.:huyler table can b .. raised upto:
A. 3 mm
B. 4 mm
C. 2 mm
D.1 mm
401 A 41H1 C 410 0 411 B 412 B 413 C
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
M Measlor PGsin Prosthodontics
414. In full mouth re(onstru(tion:
A. The clinician determines amount of freedom in
centric
B. Occlusal adjustments required determines freedom
in centric
C. Both ' A' and 'B' are corred
D. Amount of discrepancy centric occlusion
and centric relation determines the amount of
freedom in cenlric
415. Curved indsal pin:
A. Is p resent in dentatus articulator
B. Helps the (onstant radius for a short distance
C. Helps maintain centric relation
D. 'A' and'S' are true
416. Compensation for changes in centri( relation can be
done using:
A. Curved incisal pin
B. Changing offset incisal pin
C. Changing central pin
D. None of the above
417. A simple face bow is used 10:
A. Mount the maxilla to a transverse axis of the
Temporomandibular joint
B. Mount the maxillary dentition 10 infraorbital notch
C. Mount mandibular cast in relation to maxillary cast
D. Mount maxillary cast in relation to hinge axis
418. The error of usi ng simple fa ce bow:
A. Is great when face bow is not self.centering
B. May not be clinically significant if centric relation
check bi te is less than 0.5 mm thick
C. Is about 0.2 mm anterop,osteriorly if centric relation
check bite is 5-10 mm
D. All of the above
414 A 41 5 0 418 0 417 A 411 8
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
Fixed P • ..u.1 OerIture Prosthodontics M
419. uis is oblain",d by:
A. Twirl bow B. Kinematic face bow
C. Slidematic face bow D . All of the above
420. Following."", limitation. of articulators ucept:
A. Ecrentric movements are unrelated to the patient
B. No provision for movement into centric relation
position
C. It holds the casts in vertical dimension
D . Centric Occlusion in not accurately defined
421. Arbitrary Axis is to
tragus:
A. 13 mm posterior B. 10 mm anterior
C. 20 mm anwrior D. 13 mm anterior
422. Condylar path of a simple articulator musl be sel al:
A. Zero degree B. 30 degree
C. 70 degree D. None of the above
423. Ear f;l.(e bow localn. hinge axis 10 an enor of:
A. :t 0.5 mm B . .r 5 mm
C. :t 1.5 mm D. :t 2.5 mm
424. using arbitrary face bow for simple articulator,
intinl 'l'dge of anterior 1'I''I' th should be
.,--;,-C":c of Ihe arti culator:
A. 32 mm B. 50 mm
425.
C.54mm D.60mm
'" A.
B.
C.
D.
Ditching
Porcelain is removed from shoulder <lrea after ini tial
build-up
The die is ditched lill the base around the cervical
margin for better cxposure of finish margin
It is done around thc base of a working casl for
Pindex Syslem
The groovcs are made on the base of Ihe cast for
retention
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
ru Me a s lor PGs In Prosthodontics
426. to:
A. The green discoloration that occurs after firing
B. The freshly built-up ceramic
C. The dark e{(eet at the margin of ceramic restoration
D. The type of staining porcelain for characterization
421. Foll owing for Dual Wax Technique, except:
A. Uti l izes two t ypes of waxes for fabricati on of
patterns
B. Uses hard inlay Wa)( on cervical two-thirds and soft
inlay wa)( on occlusal one-thirds
C. Uses soft Removable Par tial Denture Framework
Wax on occlusal two-thirds and blue inlay wa)( on
cervical one-thirds
D_ Thi s technique helps in equal expansion of
investment in all di rections
428. Following are tme for Eamu except:
A. 11 uses two coats of die spacer
B. Produces approximately 25 microns die spacer
C. Material is supplied in two colors
D. Spacer must not be applied to cervical margin
429. Mandibular measures upto:
A. 10 mm in mediola!eral and 20 mm In antero-
post{'riorly
B. 15 mm in mediolateral
"d
20 mm
'0
antero-
posteriorly
C.
20 mm i n mediohteral
"d
10 mm
'0
antero-
posteriorly
D. 30 mm in mediolateral
,od
10 mm
'0
antero·
posteriorly
430. consists of following. except:
A. Disturbance of stylomandibular process
B. Fracture of calcified ligaments
C. Associated with styloid complex
D . Tinnitus
428 B 427 B 428 A 429 C 4:tO 0
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
Fixed Partial Denture Prolthodontie. m
431. long centric applies to all but one:
A. Freedom in centric
S. Advocated by D'Amico
C. Used mostly in full mouth r(' habili tation
D. May be ei ther anteroposterior or lateral
432. Range of threshold for detecting objects between
ocdu5al surfaces of teeth is:
A. 100-200 microns
S. 1-6 microns
C. 8-60 microns
D. 60-100 microns
433. Each chewing cyde has ol duution of olbQUt:
A. 200 milliseconds
S. 500 milliseconds
C. 700 milliseconds
D. 1000 milliseconds
434, CiI5t'pi»1 coping:; in over-dentures require:
A. 5<J..70 microns die spacer
B. low temperature burnout
C. Both 'A' and 'B'
D. Oversized posts
435, In over·denture!;, the preferred height of covered
portion of retolined tooth is:
A. I mm B. 2 mm
C. 3mm D.4mm
436. Pontip is a:
A. Pontic
S, Retainer
C. Prdabricaled pontic D . Metal frameworJr,
437. Amount of lateral shift of condyle during lateral
movement of mandible Is:
A. 10-12 mm S, 0-7 mm
C. ()..4 mm 0 .5-7 mm
431 B 432 C 433 C 434 C 435 B 438 C 431 C
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
M MCOI for PG.ln Pro.thodontlc.
438. Average latual shift of condyle during lateral move·
ment of milndible is:
A. 0.1 mm B. 0.075 mm
C. 0.75 mm 0 .0.5 mm
439. Curvature of condylilr path is in mediotrusive
rathu than protrusive, by about __ ,
A. Less, 10 degrees
B. More, 10 degrees
C. Less,S degrees
O. More,S degrees
440. Thickness of shim stock is about :
A. 0.05 inch
B. 0.5 inch
C. 0.005 inch
O. 0.0005 inch
441. Functionally genuated path technique records:
A. Chewing pattern of pat ient
B. Lateral movement of mandible
C. Both 'A' and ' 8'
D. Vertical dimension
442. Fo llowing ilre close· packed position of mandible
except:
A. Cent ric relation position
B. Maximum intercuspation
C. Maximum protrusi on
D. Maximum right lateral
443. Tek·Scan System hilS following, except:
A. A sensor unit
B. A milling unit
C. A built-in printer with computer
D. Provides immediate information
m C U8 0 «0 D 441 II 442 8 443 8
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
Fixed Partial OentUI1I Prosthodontics m
444. Thf most commonly uSfd fibfl15 in dfntill applin.tions
for Rfinforcfd Composites ilrt following txctpt;
A. Glass B. Polyethylene
C. Carbon D. Porcelain
445. Preimpregnattd Fiber Reinforced Composites are
following txapt:
A. Vect ris
B. FiberKor
C. Splint-It
D. Ribbond
446. Contraindications for Fiber Reinforced Compositf
Prosthesis ilre following exapt:
A. Long span
B. Parafunctional habits
C. Nt'ed for excellent appearance
O. Patients with unglazed porcelain restoration
447. Tooth preparation for Fiber Reinforced Compo!iite FrD
indudes following u" pt;
A. Deep chamfer finish line
B. Linguoproximal step
C. Occlusal isthmus
D. Counter-bevel
448. Fluibl e die material is used:
A. For making castings for three unit fixed partial
dentures
B. Is used for making Provisional Restorations
C. Can be used for 'A' and 'B'
D. Are similar to hydrocolloid duplicating materials
449. OVA system and Zfiser systems are:
A. Types of articulator systems
B. Types of cast-and-die systems
C. Types of crawn remover systems
D. Types of casting techniques
...... D 445D 44SC 447D «IB 449B
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
M Meas for PGsin Prosthodontics
450. of OVA system is
A. They allow for expansion of stone
B. They are very esth.etic for ceramic work
C. Th.ey deliver gentle vibrations on crown
D. They can withstand high temperature
451. Following are true for Milling procedure except:
A. Consists of using conventional straight hand pie<:e
B. Uses cylindrical carbide burs
C. Uses fine diamond points
D. light pressure is used
452. While snibing survey linf"S on
foll owing should be used:
A. Red or green pigments
B. Graphite
C. lead pencil
D. All of the above can be used
453. Following materials can be used with Cerec system
except:
A. In-Ceram Spinell
B. Vi ta Mark II
C. Dicor MCC
D. Procad
454. In-Cuam Spinell contains following as major crystalline
phase:
A. Sanidine
B. Magnesium spinel!
C. Zirconium oxide
D. Manganese spinell
455. The si ze of Mica crystals prestont in Di eor MCC is:
A. 10 to 50 microns
B. I to 2 microns
C. 10 to 15 microns
D. 25 to 32 microns
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
Fixed Partial Denture Prosthodontics m
456. Mica structures strength of the by
following
A. Leads to multiple crack deflections
B. Leads to stress concentrat ion at the ends
C. Leads to breaking of crdck forma ti ons
D. Leads to Ion Exchange mechanism
457. Heat Pressed Ceramics contain mainly _____ "
crystalline phase:
A. Magnesium Spinel! B. Leucites
C. Zirconium Oxide D.Sanidine
458. When Leucite is a cryst"lline phase, the size of particles
is:
A. 1 to 2 microns
B. 3 to 10 microns
C. 40 to 50 microns
D. 100 to 120 microns
459. Leucile strengthens ceramic due to:
A. Crack deflections
B. Crack bonding
C. Tangential stresses
D. Thermal tempering
460. Coronafl u crown remover consists of following tXCtpt :
A. Air-driven device
B. Multiflex coupler
C. A flexing device to flex the crown
D . Loops and adhesive damp
461 . One of the following is wrong for Richwil crown
remover.
A. Consists of making a perforati on in crown and lifting
it up
B. Involves using an adhesive resin tablet
C. Using sharp opening action to remove crown
D. Tying a floss to the resin
456 A (57 B (5' B 4Si C 460 C (61 A
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
S Mea. lor PG. In Pro.th o<Ion1lc.
462. The Merritt EZ CiSt Post System consists of following
except:
A. A stick of thl'rmoplastic resi n
B. Plastic rod
C. A metal rod of canal size
D. Can be used for direct technique
463. Following are positioner muscles of mandible except:
A. Right lateral pterygoid
B. Left latl' ral pterygoid
C. Tl'mporal muscles
D. Masseter
464. ViScular knee refers 10:
A. Varicose veins under the tongue
B. A shunting system for blood behind the condyle
C. The pterygoid plexus behind external auditory
meatus
D. Vascular rl' turn to the heart from knee
465. An improperl y made anterior Jig for deprogramming
the mandible will displace the condyle:
A. Mesially B. Anteriorly
C. Distally D. Downward
466. Bilateral manipulation of mandible during recording
centric relat ion helps verily the following tx<:rpt :
A. The proper functioning of the ligaments
B. Correctness of condylar position
C. Alignment of the condyle-disk assembly
D. Integrity of Mticular surfaces
467. To show that Bimanual technique is most consistently
Dawson used:
A. V('rticuiator method
B. Buhnergraph or Veri Check analysis
C. Leaf gage used by Long
D. Dcprogramming device by Lucia
462 C 463 D 464 B 465 C 466 A 487 B
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
Fixed Partial Denture Prosthodontles m
468. Aqualin r
A. Is meant for Functionally Generated Path technique
B. Used for muscle deprogramming
C. Used for fixing Pantographs
D . Used along wit h casting rings for hydroscopic
eKpansion
469. splints:
A. Also referred to as muscle deprogrammers
D. Are designed to position mandible in a specific
relationship to maxilla
C. Thcy align the condyle-disk assemblies
D. Used when a centric re-Iation should be corrected
470. Following are diffuent types of permi ssive splints
except: •
A. Full occlusal splints
D. Postcrior bite plane
C. Splints with occluS<11 fossae
D . Anterior bite plane
471 . A Splint is contraindicated in following
conditioll$ txcept:
A. If condyle and disk can be aligned correctly
D. If disks can maintain their alignment with condyles
during function
C. If it unlocks occlusal incline contacts
D . Both 'A' and 'D'
4n. Chu k art iculators:
A. Have check bites on the incisal gUide table
B. Condylar pathways are limi ted to straight lines
C. Condylar pathways are customizable
D. Condylar pathways are curvilinear and are adjustable
_B 4eg A 470C 471 C 472 B
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
rn Meas for PGs In Prosthodontics
473. Following sl .. temenls for Denar Combi articulator are
true ucept:
A. It is a set path articulator
B. It is ~ fully adjustable articulator
C. Condylar path is interchangeable
D. Cannot accept stereographiC clutches
474. Set P,lIh Arti culators have horizontal condylar path sd
at:
A. 30 degrees B. 20 degrees
C. 45 degrei.'s 0 .15 degrees
475. Fabri cation of customized condylar path "'quires:
A. Use of simple stereograph;c recording
B. Use of gothic .arch tracing
C. Use of broadric],.; plane "analyzer
D. Both 'A' and 'B'
476. Pankey-Mann instrument:
A. Is a special ized oct;;!\IS;I1 plane devke
S_ [t is a type of face bow
C. It is a type of gothic arch tracer
0 , Is a type of device to measure condylar angle
477, Hinge Axi s Angle refers to:
478.
A. Inclination of hinge axis to condylar path
B. Inclination of true hinge axis to condylar path
C. Inclination of low!.'r incisor to a line drawn from incisal
edge to center of the condyle
D. Inclination of rna",illary incisor to center of the
condyle
Average Hinge Axis Angle is:
A. 45 degrees
B. 90 degrees
c. 110 degrees
D.
135 d('gr('es
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
Fixed Partial Denture Prosthodontics m
479. Mashed·potato occlusion refers to:
' 80.
481.
A. Tripod contact
B. Surface-Io-surf"ce cont"cl
C. Cusp tip- to-foss" contact
D. Cusp lip· to-marginal ridge contact
Following are choi ces for
natural dentition except:
A. Group function
C. Parti,,1 group function
Foll owing are methods
disdusion except:
A. Harmoni:wd an lerior
movements
working sid!! ocdusion in
B. Cusp tip to fossa contact
D . Posterior disclusion
to accomplish posterior
guidance with bord er
B. Anterior group function
C. Lateral group function
D. Cuspid prote<: teG occlusion
482. Most practical method for discluding posterior teeth
is:
A. Anteri or group function
B. Cani ne guided occlusion
C. Lateral group function
D. Cusp to fossa occlusion
483. Altering Anterior Guidance depends on following
main factors except;
A. Envelope of function B. Esthetics
C. Periodontal support D. Phonetics
484. following are common methodti of utablishing an
acc!!pbbl!! occlusal plane in natural dentition, exupt:
A. Using fo)!; pl ane
B. Analysis on natural teeth through selective grindig
C. Using face bow mounted casts with corre<:1 condylar
paths
D. Use of Pankey- Mann instrument
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
M MeQs for PGs In Prosthodontics
485. The assembly of Broadrick Plane cOrulisb of
following exupt:
A. A survey centC'r
B. An art iculator
C. Caliper set at 8 inch radius
D. A plastic flag
486. Following art' true for Occlusal Plane Culling Guide
rxupt:
A. Consists of C'xlra hard base plate wax
B. A mouth temperature wax reinforced with base plate
WH
C. Is kept on the tooth to be corrected to established
occlusal plane
D. Is prepared on the articulator and is scribed by the
caliper
487. Following are true for Fossa Contour Guide exupt:
A. It is used if only upper teeth arc to be restored
B. Ensures non.interferi ng accommodation of upper
palatal (usPS
C. Is used on tower posterior teeth
D. Can be easily modifit-od to accommodate Bennett Shift
488. Advantages of Functi onally Generated Path ate
following napt:
A. They record the border pathways
B. It is a Mush-bite
C. Shape of occlusal surfaces can be carvC'd by this
method
D. Occlus ion is generated by the patient while
functioning
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
Fixed Parllllli Denture Prosthodontics em
489. Following <lire true for Johnson.Oglesby spring
Articulator
A. Can hold casts for single tooth using
Functionally Generated Path
B. Does nol require bite record
C. Can hold casts for extensi\'e tooth restorations using
Functi onally Generat{'d Path
D. Each incline of the tooth can come in contacl when
Articulat or is closed
490. Following are instruments that can be used to mount
cuts for Functionally Path Technique
except:
A. Yerticulator
B. Twin-Stage Occluder
C. Johnson-oglesby Ar ticulator
D. A Jectron yig
491. An anterior slide in natural dentition can be produced
due 10:
A. Interferences to the line of closure
B. Interferences to the arc of closure
C. Interferences in protrusion
D. Both 'B' and 'C' are correct
492. The basic Selective Grinding rule for anlerior slide is:
A. BULL B. MUDL
C. DUDL D. BUBL
493. Photocdusi on refers to:
A. Qualitative analysis by measurement of the strains
induced in a photoplastic wafer
B. Quantitative analysis by IT\{'asurement of the strains
induced in II photoplastic wafer
C. Involves frequency analYSis through phototelemetry
during occlusion
D. Study of temporomandibular joint during occlusion
by photoclastic measures
419 C 4110 0 491 II 4n II 493 II
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
M Meal for PGlin Proithodonlici
494. Tek·Sn n S)'lIlem:
A. Is used for qUil Iit at.iv(' analysis of occlusion
B. Used for quanti tative analysis of occlusion
C. Uses ul trasonic methods
D. Both '8' and 'C' are true
495. Protedive muscle splinting refeB to;
A. Limited mouth opening due to tonic contraction of
muscles due to infection
B. Chronic resistance of a muscle to passive st retch
C. RcduU'd jaw motion to avoid pain due 10 movement
D. Sudden involuntary contraction of muscles
496. Di stal Displacement Theory fefeB to:
A. Distal migration of premolars in the long a b s e ~ of
molars
B. Monson's theory that the articular disk gels
displaced during mandibulM closure
C. Costen's argument that mandibular overc\osure can
\XCV! if vertical dimension is more
D. Monson's theory that distall y displaU'd condyle can
causc deafness due to mandibular overcl osure
497. Lateral mandibular monments have a mun value of:
A. 15 mm B. 10 mm
C. Smm D.20mm
498. All about MORA art true but one:
A. Takes the condyle to retruded position
B. Brings mandible forward and downwilrd
C. It is a repositioning device for mandible
D. It recaptures disc in internal derangements of TMJ
499. Following are true for Pivot Appliance, except:
A, Pivots are created on the maXill ary 2nd molar areas
B. Pivots ate created on the mandibular 2nd molar
areas
C. It reli(.'v('s str(.'ss on TM]
D. It improvcsocclusion by increasing vertical dimension
4948 495C 4960 497B 4HA 4990
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
Fixed Partial Denture Prosthodonttcs Cii]
500. Following an' not true for Beilby l;tyer except:
A. Molecular disorganized surface layer of a unpolished
metal
B. Molecular disorganized surface layer of a polished
metal
C. Mo lecular organized surface layer of it polished
metal
D. Molecular organized surface layer of a unpolished
metal
SOl. Bezold-Brucke effect refers to:
A. Metamerism effe<:t
B. A change in hue with change in luminance
C. Change in brilliance when translucent ceramic is
applied
D. Formation of internal opacity in ceramic during
firing
S02. Biologic width rders t,,:
A. Width of epithelial attachment
B. Combined width of epithelial attachment and width
of connective tissue
C. Combined width of connective tissue and epithelial
attachment inferior to crestal bone
D. Combined width of connective tissue and epithelial
attachment superior to crestal bone
S03. Essig Splint:
A. It used to stabilized fractured or repositioned t('{' tn .
and alvffilar bont'
B. [s used to correct TM] problems
C. Is used to correct occlusal discrepancies
D. Is a mandibular orthopaedic repositioning device
504. Cantilever find partial denture is othelWise called as:
A. Sectional bridge B. Extension bridge
C. Unsupported bridge D. Removable bridge
500 B 501 B 502 D 503... 500l II
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
G Meal for PGI In Proi thodontici
S05. Mush bite refers to:
A. Inter-occlusal record made in impll"Ssion paste
B. Inter-occlusal record made in beeswax without
record base
C. Triple tray bite of natural dentition
D. Inter·occlusal record made in protrusion of mandible
506. Spring lock Bridge is a lso called as:
A. Swing lock denture
B. Spring fixt.>d partial d enture
Co Spring p late denture
D. Spring cantilever bridge
507.
Primary colors
of subtractive color
system m
following, except:
A. Yell ow
B. Red
c. Magenta D. Cyan
SOS. Foll owing are true for Sleeve Coping of CSC
Prosthesis, except:
A. Made of Type IV gold casting
B. Proteo;:ts abutmt'nt tooth from caries
C. It furnishes support for gingival tissues
D. S l ~ v e Coping has a conical taper
509. Average dimensions of a Sleeve Coping are following,
t xapt:
A. 0. 2-0.3 mm thickness buccaUy
B. 0.3·0.4 mm thickness in other axial surfaces
C. 0.4-0.5 mm thickness on occlusal surfaces
D. 0.5-0.6 mm thickness buccaUy
510. Finish margin for Sleeve Coping is:
A. Shoulder at buccal and lingual aspeo;:t
B. Chamfer at buccal and lingual aspect
C. Modified chamfer at labial or buccal surface
D. Knife edge all around
505 II SOlI C 507 II 501 A ~ a StO C
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
Fixed Partial Denture Prosthodontics M
511. The amounl of space Ihal must be presenl bet ween
Slel'vl' Coping and Seco ndary Crown at thl!' gingi val
third of a CSC pl'05the5is is:
A. 0.001-0.002 inch B. 0.002-0.000 inch
C. 0.003-0.010 inch D . 0.010-0.015 inch
512. Amount of milling to be done at cervical third of CSC
Pl'05thl!'sis is dd l!'rminl!'d by following. tXCf'pt :
A. Amount of yield of mucoperiosteum
B. Number of abutments
C. Occlusal forces
D. Angle of the milling device provided
513. The main di fference bd ween CSC Prosthesis and
Hybri d Tel l'scopic Prosthesis is in:
A. Sleeve Coping apical third
B. Sleeve Coping occlusal third
C. Design of the secondary crown
D. All of the above
514. Following arl!' trul' for Caninl!' Guidl'd O(clusion, exupt:
A. It p rotects the other teeth
B. It is a type of balance-d oa::Jusion given for romplete
dentures
C. It is a type of occlusion
D. It is a mutually protected occlusion
515. In cenlric relation position of the m,l.ndibl l!', thl!' ( ondyll!'
516.
is in with the glenoid fossa:
A. Anteroinferior relation
B. Poeleroinferior
C. Posterosuperior
D. Anterosuperior
AVl!"age fi5(hu angl e is
A. 10 degrees
C. 15 degrees
about:
D. 5 degrees
D. 45 degrees
811 C 812 0 513 C 814 a 51 5 D 51& 8
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
M Measlor PGs In Prosthodontics
517. Average discrepancy between cenlric occlusion and
Cl.' nlric relation in complete dentures is:
A. 0.5 10 I mm B. I 10 1.5 mm
C. 2t03mm D. None of Ihi:! above
518. Following are differenlthird-poinls of reference, except
one:
A. OrbitalI.'
B. Nasion guide
C. 43 mm superior to incisal edge of t he maxillary
centrals_
519. Average intrusion ot teeth is:
A. 56 microns B. 20 microns
C. 28 microns D. 10 microns
520. Teeth lilil.' d --- should bl.' I.'Xlracll.'d:
A. :> 10 degrees
C. :> 5 degrees
B. >20 degrees
D. > 25 degrees
521. Unilateral, optimum taper of the prep.red axial wall
of looth 10 receive a full veneer crown is:
A. 6 degrees B. 3 degrees
C. 5 degrees D. 12 degrees
522. Path of insertion for fixed prosthesis can be evaluated
from a dist.nce of:
A.30 cm B.40em
C. IOcm D.25 em
523. Ml.'tal-cl.'r.mic rl.' sloration rl.'quires reduclion
on fundional cusps:
A.3mm B. 1 mm
C. 1.5 to 2 mm D. 3 to 3.5 mm
524. PI.'r(l.'ntage of epinephrine present in gingival retracti on
cord is:
A. 80% B. 8%
C. 18% D. 28%
517 0 51' B 51' C 521) 0 521 B 522 A 523 C 52' e
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
Fixed Partial Denture Prosthodontics raa
525. Setting lime of addition silicone impression material
is:
A. 9-10 mts.
e. 6-8 mts.
B. 15-20 mts.
D.3-4 mts.
526. The gingival bevel serves the following pu.rposn:
A. Wea k enamel is removed
B. Metal on bevell"<l margi n is burnishable
e. A lap sliding fi t is produced at the gingiva
D. All of the above
527. The mineral content of enamel on a weight buis is:
A. 81).- 85 percent
B. 6O-6S percent
C. %-97 percent
D. 40-45 percent
528. Watn content of enamel
A. I percent
C. 5 percent
amounts to:
B. 4-5 percent
0. 2-3 pewmt
529. The amount of organic malin in enamel amounts to:
A. < 1 percent
B. > 1 percent
C. < 5 percent
D. < 10 percent
530. The main minnal of enamel is:
A. Calcium phosphat e
B. Calcium carbonate
C. Hydroxyapati te
D. Sodium (Juoride
531. Enamel i ~ :
A. Not pl'rml'abll' to ionic ma terial in saliva
B. Permeable to ionic materials
e. Not permeable to ionic materials in pul p
D. Only occasionally permeable to ionic materials
525 C 52e D 527 C 521 D 529 A 530 C 53\ B
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
M Meas forPGsln ProsthodonUcs
532. contain. following
A. Fluoride, zinc, sodium and magnesium
B. Fluoride. zill<:. a nd magn",,;um only
C. Fluoride, sodium. 7.;n, only
O. Calcium, and phosphate
533. of vacuum invuting i. only wilh an
invutment:
A. With no silica
B. Wi th an a" erage silica content
C. With a high 511ic,' content
O. With a low si lica content
534. On Mi ng the casting gold pas.H through the
following vi .ible otages:
A. They ronge. ! into bUllon
B. They torn d lCHy red
C. 1Rcy b<.-come spher<>i dal in shape
D. All 0/ the above
535. The radic.1 method for ...,Iraction of i. :
A. Use 0/ 1 pt',cent Epinephrine
B. Use 01 8 perc .. nl Epinephrine
C. Use <>1 instwments OT chemical agents
D. COllon stra nd dipped in Al .. m
536. Con5<'rvltive .et.action of the marginal gingival can
be achieved by:
A. Removal of gingival by eleclrical iflSlrumenlS
B. Removal of gingival Ii .. "" by chemical agents
C. Single <Ollon strand dipped in alum crystals
D. Gingilage
537. Followi ng drugs can be used u che mical agenl$ 1m
gi ng;"al tl .... .droclion, e>:upt:
A. 8'1' . zinc chloride B. 20% ta nnic acid
C. 8% epinephrine 0.40% zi"" chloride
532 A uac U4D 53SC SHC 537C
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
Fb:ed P.rtJel o.nl\lr. Pr<nthodontlcs M
538. Indnl
A. Guid..,. the mand ible into centric positiQn as the
mandible protrudes
8. Is not influenc.-d by the amount of overjet
C. Guides the mandible into centric positiQn as the
mandible retrud..,.
D. Is not influenced by the amount <>I overbite
539. If th condyle on the working .ide il pivoting and if
i. no side shift, then:
A. There is nQ condylar path
8. There is nO hinge ""is
C. There no Bennett movement
D. There i. no «nlcr of rotation
540. of a Axi. l ocator all' following..
erupt:
A. It should be ,;0 that it is stable
8. It should be stable
c. It should be read ily ad justable
D. It . hQuld be light in weight
541 . The Protrusive and Bennen Shift r« ordings:
A. Are variable
8. Are not constant to the true plane
C. Always remain romt"nl to the true a>:i.-orbital plane
D. Vary very lightly
541. When interceptive contact involve. I cu.p incline:
A. Reduce thedi.ul indine on the upper and the mo..os;al
indine on the IQwcr k",'h
B. Reduce incline on upper and distal incline of
lower
C. "educe a cusp tip
D. Deepen the fQSS;l. of the lower molars
5SI C 5H C 540" 54t C B
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
M Meas lor PGsin Prosthodontics
543. A tip of the cusp is reduced:
A. When the mesial incline on the upper tooth is reduced
B. When it is an interfering contact in rentric, working
and balancing posi tions
C. When the fossa is deepened
D. When the distal indi ne of the lower is reduced
544. When reducing the non-working sidt' contacts, dt'cide
which supporting cusp mainlains bellt'r ct'nlric
ocdusion and then reduce:
A. Its adjacent tooth in the same affh
B. Its opponent
C. The buccal slopes of the lingual lower cusps
D. The lingual slopes of the upper buccal cusps
545. Indications for occlusal t'quilibration are:
A. Severe occlusal wear
B. Periodontal problems
C. Occlusion related TMJ problems
D. All of the above
546. Contraindicalions for occlusal t'quilibration art'
following.. except:
A. When one arch is lar ger than the other
B. Dual quadrant restoration with TMJ disturbances
C. When teeth do not occlude in centric relation
D. When funclional occlusion is being restored in its
enti rety
547. Tt'mporomandibular joint disturbances due to occlusal
imbalanct' art' following.. except:
A. Disharmony between centric occlusion and
protruSion
B. Locked bite due to deep vertical overlap
C. Premature contacts on the non-wor king side
D. Long centric contacts
543 B 544 B 545 D 546 B 547 D
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
Fixed Partial Denture Prosthodontie. fill
548. Indic.tions for Inlay abutment are following. except:
A. Mutilated tooth
B. ?ingle tooth replacement
C. Minimal occlusal forces
D. Good crown length for the abutment
549. Contraindications for Inlay abutment are following.
except:
A. Long span bridge
B. Short span bridge
C. Mutilated tooth
D. Poor alignment of abutments
550. Dowel pin retainers ue contraindicated in:
A. Triangular shaped central incisors
B. Caries frl"(' dentition
C. Young person with large pulp
D. All the above
551. Advantages of ultra·high speed hand pieces are
following. except:
A. Firm pressure on the tooth can be applied
B. Less time to prepare the abutment
C. Less annoyance to the patient
D. Minimized vibration
552. In fixed partial denture prosthodontics, the plane of
occlusion is:
A. The anatomic curvat ure of the occlusal alignment
B. An imaginary surface that is related to the cranium
C. A fixed (actor
D. The oppasing functional occlusion
553. Most of the cases of fixed partial dentures have incisal
guidance as:
A. An surface related to the cranium
B. Variable factor
C. A fixed faclor
D. A steep curvature
548 A 548B 5 ~ C 551 A 552B 553C
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
M Meas for PGs In Prosthodonllcs
554. A hi gh occlu5;l\ pl ant will product :
A. Too short cusps of posteriors
B. Too long cusps of posteriors
C. Too short anteriors
D. Too long anteriors
555. A short radius Curve of Spte will produce:
A. Long cusps for molars and short cusps for premolars
B. Long cusps for molars and long cusps for premolars
C. Short cusps for molars and short cusps for premolars
D. Short cusps for molars and long cusps for premolars
556. A nat Curvt of Sptt will product:
A. Long cusps for molars
B. Short cusps for molars
C. Long anterior teeth
D . Short anterior teeth
557. Too low p l ~ n t of occl usion will cause posterior cusps
to:
A. Appear too long
B. Appear too shor t
C. Appt'ar norrn.l\
D. Appt'ar in disdusion
558. A Curvt of Spee, which is reverse in nature products:
A. Too long molar cusps and too long premolar cusps
B. Too short molar cusps and too long premolar cusps
C. Too long molar cusps and too short premolar cusps
D. Too short molar cusps and too short premolar C\.lSps
559. When a knift t dgt ridgt is encountertd in tht
mandibular anterior rt gion, usually tht pontic is:
A. Adapted lingual to the ridge in positive contact
B. Adapted labial to the ridge in positive contact
C. Adaptt'd labial to the ridge in a negative contact
D. Adapted lingual to the ridge in a negative contact
5:>4,. $$$ 0 sse ,. 557 ,. 551 C 559 C
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
Filed Partial Denture Prosthodontics M
560. Rt'quirt' mt' nts of .. connedor ue following.. e;"'pt;
A. Their dose adaptation to the crest of the ridge
B. Supply mechanical strength to the prosthesis
C. Provide convenient embrasures
D. Correct occlusal function
561. Tht' dimt'nsion of tht' ,onnt',tor thai is importolnt for
jill strength is:
A. Buccolingual width
B. Indsal-mesial thickness
C. Occlusal-cervical thickness
D . Mesio-dislal thickness
562. Following ue the factors for incomplt'tt' suting of the
mt'tal framt'work, txupt:
A. Nodules present within the retainer
B. No parallelism between abutmenlll
C. Undercuts present in abutmenlll
D. Over trimmed pro)(imal contacts of the retainer
563. Following factol"!'l should b .. ch .. ck .. d in 01 ' oIsling during
its try-in. txupt:
A. Contact areas
B. Centric occlusion
C. Centric relatiot:\
D. Functional stability
564. Too small sprut rtsullll in:
A. Distortion of casting
B. Shrinkage porosity
C. No alteration in casting
D. Causes fracture of the casting
565. Sprue that is improperly positioned Coluses:
A. Fracture of the casting
B. Turbulence and porosity in the casting
C. No changes in the casting
D. Shrinkage porosity
560 A 561 C 562 D 563 C 564 B 565 B
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
S Mea. lor PGs In Prosthodontlc.
566. A non· rigid connector is selected:
A. When the alveolar bone is excessively reduced
B. When the alveolar bone is receding
C. For long span bridges
D . As a broken·stress joint
567. A solder joinl must have:
A. A partial and convex periphery
B. A partial and concave periphery
C. A complete and concave periphery
D. A triangular periphery
S68. The accepted rate of increase in firing temperilture for
porcelain is:
A. 25 degree/minute
B. 100 degree/minute
C. 76 degree/minute
D. 120 degree/minute
5069. A bridge may become loose because of following. except:
A. Torque
B. Solubility of cement
C. Presence of undercuts
D . Mobility of the abutment
570. Richmond Crown:
A. Cannot be used as an intraradicu]ar crown
B. Is an intracoronal ret.liner
C. Is an intraradicular retainer
D. Is an ext racoronaJ retainer
571. A shoulderleu preparation:
A. Gives a well -defined finish margin
B. Is a least conservative finish margin
C. Facilitates use of copper bands while making lube
impression
D. Rt.'Sists occl uS<l1 forces better
S66 D 567 C 568 B 569 C 570 C 571 C
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
572. Following",gistroltions olre required to olccur.lttly mount
the casts on the olrticuloltor to reproduce I h ~ mandibulolr
movements, txupt:
A. Terminal Hinge Axis position
B. A face bow transfer
C. Angular slope of the condyla r pa th
D. Beyron and Bergstrom points
573. The critical ttchniqut in casting procedu", for a fi n d
partioll dtntu", is:
A. Good wax pattern
B. Investing the pattern
C. Melting the metal
D. All the above
574. Befon: qut nchi ng a gold casting, it has to be cooled
for:
A. 1 minute
B. 2 minutes
C. 5 minutes
D. 15 minutes
575. An idul occlusion rtfen to:
A. An arrangement of teeth for functiona l and esthetic
goals
B. Arrangement of teeth that is conducive to ocdusal
stabil ity
C. Both ' A' and 'B'
D. Angle Class I
576. Following fador will afft<:1 all Ihe three bcton: cus p
htlght, ri dge and groove direction, and lingual
conuvlty of upper ol nl rrior teelh:
A. Direction of the rotating condyle
B. Benne\! movement
C. Intercondylar distance
D. All of the above
5120 5710 514C 575e 578 8
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
M MeQs lor PGs In Prosthodontics
577. The small er the Bennett Movement:
A. Shorter the cusps
B. Longer the cusps
C. Greater the maxillary anterior lingual concavity
D. Both 'B' and 'C' ar(' corr('ct
578. Gruter oUlwud-upwud direction of the rotating
condyle in vertical plane, gruler Bennett movement,
and greater intercondylar distance:
A. Gr('at('r th(' lingual concavity of the maxillary anl('riot
tC<'th
B. Long('r the cusps
C. Both ' A' and 'B'
D. Mor e distal the ridge ;!nd groove direction on
maxillary teeth
579. Occlusal interferences will interfere with:
A. Swallowing
B. Speaking
C. Centric occlusion function
D. All the above
580. Foll owing are reasons for a cemented full casl crown
t hat requires occluul grinding. ucepl One:
A. Case mounted in centric relation
B. Case mounted in centric occlusion
C. Thickness of cement film
D. Poor temporization
58t. Freedom in cent ric:
A, Is rarely found in natural dentition
B. Form('d in restorations
C. Dewlop<.><! in comple te d('nturcs
D. All of th(' abov('
582. Freedom in centri c:
A. Has anterior-posterior and [ateral components
B. Occurs in everyone
C. Is best when about 1.5 mm long
D. All of the above
S77B 571 A 5nD 5SOA SliD 5UA
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
Fixed Partial Denture Prosthodontics CW]
583. Physiological rest position in natural dentition:
A. Should be used to relate the mandibular (ast to the
maxillary ( ast
B. Should be considered i n a single res toration
C. Shoul d be taken in consideration only in multiple
restorations
D . All the above .ue correct
584. A Hanau H2 PR articulator:
A. Is zeroed with the incisal table set to zero
B. Is 7.erocd wi th the condylar element «'ntric stop set
to zero
C. Both 'A' and 'B' are correct
D. Is zeroed with the condylar element centric stop set
to 30 degrees
585. On a uroed Hanau H2 PR ;u1iculator, when the casts
art' mounted and later the spacer is removed and the
centrk stop is moved anteriorly, following events take
place, except:
A. Incisal pin will be centered on th{' table
(anteroposteriorly)
8. Centric occlusion remains the same
C. The most re lative retrusiv{' position of t he
mandibular cast would be 3 mm
D. Incisal pin wil! not be centered on the table
(anteroposteriorly)
586. Usually, when an Hanau H2 PR articul ator is adjusted
correctly, all of the following <lTe correct, except:
A. The condylar element seats in di rect contact with the
(entri( stop wi th the incisal pin centered
B. The maxillary cast wil! usually have adequate room
to move in a protrusive direction
C. The condylar element should bind on the shaft
housing
D. The housing for the condylar shaft res ts lightly
agai nst the surface of the condylar element
513 B 584 C 515 A SI6 C
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
M Meas for PGs in Prosthodontics
587. In Hanau H2 PR articulator, following may affect the
latrral positioning of the incisal pin:
A. Centric stop adjustment
B. Anterior gllidance
C. Centric relation record
D. All of the abov('
588. The Whip-mix and the Hanau H2 PR articulators are
similar in following manner:
A. lnterocdusal record is used to S('t condylar guidance
B. Both have provisions for adjustm('nt of intercondylar
distance
C. Both 'A' and ' 8' are correct
D. A is the correct answer
589. If the condylar indin.tion is moved from 0 to 70 degrees
following events would take place:
A. Maxillary cast would move upwards
B. Maxillary cast woul d move backwards
C. Both ' A' and 'B' arc true
D. Non(' of the above a re correct
590. A steep incisal guidance is:
A. Not related to vertical overlap
B. Not import"nt for neuromuscular harmony
C. Simulated on the articulator by the lateral wings of
incisal table
D. All of the above are t rue
591. When the maxillary incisors lire mi ssing, the incisal
gu ide table is set using:
A. Maxillary posterior teeth
B. Indination of the condylar gUidance
C. Slide in centric
D. Cuspid guidance if they are pn.'S('nl
587 A 588 0 589 0 590 8 59' 0
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
Fixed Partial Denture Prosthodontics Ci9"]
592. One of the following is not a fun,tion of an adjustable
anterior pin .. nd table;
A. To maintain ,entri, relation
D. To prevent wearing down of stone cast
C. To fadlitate an increased vertical dimension
D. To help in fabrkation of wax patterns for a restoration
593. A 5<:huyler pin and table is used for following.. except:
A. Complete dentures
D. Full mouth re<:onstruction
C. . Splinting procedures
D. Single restoration
594. When there is no freedom in ,entric on the casts, one
of the following is wrong:
A. A Schuyler pin and table should be used
B. The FC pin should be below the surfare of the indsal
table
C. If the vertical dimension is not to be changed, a
straight indsal pin can be used
D. Both'S' and 'C' are wrong
595. Vertic;tl dimension may be maint;tined by ;tn inciul
pin that:
A. Can be adjusted in length
B. Is curved with radius related to the axis of the
articulator
C. Has an o f f ~ s e t pin related
the articulator
to the arc of closure of
D . Both '8' and 'C' are true

596. True hinge axis is obtained by:
A. CR registration bite
B. The k.inematic face bow
C. An ear piece face bow
D. All of the above
592 A 593 C 5114 A 595 0 598 B
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
R MeQs for PGSln Prosthodontics
597. f .. bow:
A. Locates the centric relation
B. Locates the terminal hinge axis
C. Is a nonear piece device
D. Relates the mandible to maxilla
598. A simple bow:
A. Is centered on the articulator
B. Is not centered on the articulator
C. May be ' A' or ·B'
D. Is not centered to the axis of an articulator
599. The Orbital ilnd t he damp on a si mple fa ce
bow are used to foll owing. exupt:
A. Maxillary cast to an infraorbital point
B. With an ear piece face bow
c. To locate the third point of reference for mounting
the maxillary cast
D. Both ' A' and ·C'
600. A simple articul ator:
A. Is related to the motion of the TMJ
8. May permit face bow record
C. May permit both vertiCil! and horizontal movement
D. May be ' B' and 'C' are true
601. A thick occl usion int trocclusal record may result
in following. except:
A. Premature contact in centric occl usion
B. Absence 01 centdc stops
C. interfert'nces in eccentric movements
D. Absence of contact of teeth during function
602. Use of a large-size articulil tor:
A. Often gives better r('sults
B. Is always indicated
C. Is always practical
D. Both 'A· and 'C' are correct
593 A 5"8 $(lOA &01 0 &02 A
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
Filed Partlal Denture Prosthodontics A
603. Usage of following will lead to lust errors in a simple
articulator that hu np.lbility for lateral movements:
A. Molar group (unction
B. Balanced occlusion
C. Cuspid guidance only
D. Anterior open bite
604. In a simple articulator, the occlusal interferences un
be minimiz.ed by following, tXCI'pt:
A. Moving the oblique ridge distally
B. Reducing the axial contours of maxillary lingual cusps
C. Removing wax mesially from contact areas for
maxillary supporting cusps
D . Moving the oblique ridge mesially
605. Absencl!' of centric stops in thl!' mouth signifil!'s
following. txCl'pt :
A. Temporomandibular joint dysfunction
B. Infraocclusion in restoration
C. Excessive occlusal adjustment
D. Shifting of teeth has occurred
606. The condylar indination to use the simple face bow
must be about:
A. 20
B. 30
C. 40
D. 70
607. The distance between the articulator axle and the ur
piece pin when the condylar inclination is set to ri ght
position is about:
A. 10 mm
B. 11 nun
C. J2 mm
D. 13 nun
603 C 504 0 &05 B 606 0 1107 C
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
[W21 Mcaslor PGs in Prosthodontics
60S. Whiif' using an fOar pif"f' fa,f' bow, thf' inciui f'dgf's
of thf' muillary anlf'rior tu lh should be,-",--,--_
abovf' the surface of the lower rof'mber of the articulator:
A. 50 mm
C. 58 mm
B. 54 mm
0. 62 mm
609. In .ubilrary mounting of thf' muillary whf'n " face bow
is not uSf'd, the most important principle to follow is:
A. Maximize horizontal condylar guidance
B. Maximize lateral condylar guidance
C. Maximize tooth gui d ance
O. Both 'B' and 'C' are c o r r ~ t
610. Whf'n a centric relation rf'cord is not utilized to mount
Ihf' mandibular cast on a arliculator, the mf'thod uSf'd
to mount the cast is:
A. To mount it in centric occlusion with PR adjustment
moved clockwise
B. To mount it in ~ n t r i c occlusion with a shim inserted
between condylar elements and condylar stops
C. To mount the cast in c('ntric occlusion with PR
adjust('d to minus zero
D. To mount the cast in centric occlusion with PR
adjusted to zero
611. f ollowi ng cli nical information is necessary when a
protrusive check bite is not availabl e to set the condylar
inclinati on:
A. Angle of eminentia B. Balancing interferences
C. Balancing cont3(!S D. Both ' B' and 'C'
612. The most common nror that O(curs during mounting
casts in cen tric relati on occurs due to:
A. Curved articubtor condylar guide
B. Use of arbi trary hinge axis
C. Incorrect centric relat ion check bite
D, Incorrect third point of reference
&08 C 609 C 810 B 611 0 812 C
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
Fixed Partial Denture Prosthodontics Goo]
613. The most common cilluses for an incorrect centric relation
record are following. PXCl'pt:
A. Failure to use thoroughly softened wax for recording
B. Muscle hypertonicity
C. Patient not trained properly
D. Muscle hypotonicity
614. Facets of wear do not on the articulator, but
they do in the mouth. The probable causes may be
following, txupt:
A. Incorrect condylar s.etting
B. Inadequate articulat or design
C. Incorrect vertical relation
D. lncorre<:t centric relation record
615. Third point is more important for a ear·piece
face bow than for the nonur·piece face bow, because:
A. The third point of reference for the nonear·piere face
bow can be set at any point
B. The nonear'piece face bow is not related to the hinge
axis
C. The ear pit"Ce does not rest on the transverse axis
of the articulator
D. The ear pit"Ce face bow is more accurate
616. One of the following is most accurate in taking a centric
relation to mount lower cut:
A. Use of centric relation check bite
B. Use of PR adjustment
C. Use of shim between condylar element and rondylar
stop
D. Protrusive bite that is straight
617. The most common cause for the difference in condylar
indination of about 7 degrees between si des, is:
A. Not enough protrusion in taking the ret:ord
B. Face bow positioned incorrectly
C. Protrusion not straight while taking the re<:ord
D. Protrusive record obtained too far forward
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
S MCa.'or PG.'n Prosthodontics
618. Among the supporting cusps and
opposing f05sae, thl' cus p is ground:
A. When it makes premature contact in centric and not
in lateral e:w; cursions
B. When it is premat ure in «,ntric
centric oo: lusion and prot rusive relat ions
C. Only when it makes a prematull' contact in cent ric
and lateral e:w;cursions
D. In all thl' above cases
619. Following is trul' for cl'nlrk stops:
A. Should never be removed
B. If required to be removed, BULL rule should be
followed
C. May be rcquirt'(\ to be removcG, under very spt'Cific
rules
O. All of the above
620. On the casts, the fi rs t step in occlusal adjustment is:
A. Mark centric stops and supporting cusps
B. Mark balancing interferences and prematull' contacts
C. Adjust working side contacts
D. Adjust balancing side int{'rferences
621 . A rull' for adjustment of supporting buccal cusps and
cusp ridges of mandibular molar teeth is:
A. To grind t hl' intl'rfer{'nc{'
B. Adjust 10 c{'nlric rebllon
C. Not to grind on mandibular molar buccal cusp tips
D. Grind away from function
622. Balancing sidl' adjustment is completed wht'n:
A. Grinding of the balancing side results in smooth
gliding movements
B. Grinding of Ihe working side results in s moolh
gliding movements
C. Teeth are no longer mobile
D. Dentin is smooth
IIIB Ilec &20 A UIC
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
Fixed Partial Denture Prosthodontics CWS]
623. In wn·added method of fabrintion of a wax pattern,
the first wax 10 be added should be:
A. Supporting cusp tips
B. Nonsupporting cusp tips
C. Centric stops in fossa
D. Triangular ridges
624. Lingual concavities of the maxillary anterior teeth are
detennined by:
A. Molar guidance
B. Mandibular moveme nt, only
C. Condylar inclination, !TIJinly
D. Toot h guidance, mainly
625. During fabrication of wax pattern, the part of the waxing
instrument that is huted to pick up wax is:
A. The tip of the blade
B. Midd le of the blade
C. Shank of the blade
D. Full blade ,md Ihe shan k
626. The dusting powder that is used for checking occlusal
relation in wax patterns is:
A. Zinc carbonate
B. Diatomaceous earth
C. Zi nc stearate
D. Calci um carbonate
627. Main aim of occlusal bile plane splint therapy is:
A. To isolate the occlusal contacts from masticatory
system
B. To protect the teeth from wea ring d own
C. To prevent p ressure on the joints
D. None of the above
623 '" 6 2 ~ 0 625 B 626 C 627 '"
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
S Meas for PGs in Prosthodontics
628. Following is not true for the Twin-Hoby articulator:
A. Has a simplified condylar guide ml'Chanism
B. Has a prcrise anterior guide ml'Chanism
C. Beli eves in Ihat condylar path affects the incisal
guidance
D. The anterior guidance c['('atN controls the condylar
path
629. Twin-Stage procedure for producing preci se eccentric
occlusal relations can be used for following treatment
procedures, except:
A. Occlusal diagnosis
B. Single crown fabrication
C. Complete mouth re<:onslruction
D. Training flange pr05theS<!S
621 C 629 D
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
Removable Partial
Denture Prosthodontics
1. A rl'monble partial denture may be:
A. All tooth-supported
B. Tooth and t issue supported
C. Both 'A' and '8'
D. All tissue supported
2. Following condition(s) is/are also called as distal
extension partial denture:
A. Kennedy's cl ass IV
B. Applegates class VI
C. Kennedy's class I
D. Both 'A' and 'C'
3. Stability is mainly against:
A. Horizontal forces
B. Functional forces
C. Both 'A' and '8'
D. Forces against removal of prosthesis
4. Height of contour is:
A. A line encircling the tooth
B. M a ~ i m u m bulge area of the tooth
C. Determined by surveyor
D. All of the above
, ,
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
108 j Meas tor PGs in Prosthodontics
5. An undercut in relation to tooth lies:
A. Below the survey line
B. Above the survey line also
C.
Both 'A' 'B'
D. On ocdusal surface
••
Guiding plants are:
A. single
B. multiple
C. Usually
D. Both 'B' and 'C-
7. Internal attachment:
A. Or precision attachment
B. Frictional
C.
Contains internal rests
D.
'A' and 'B'
••
Retention in a edracoronat retainer is through:
A. Frictional resistance
B. Resistance of metal to deformation
C. Both ' A' and 'B'
D. Tight contact of retention arm with tooth
9. Palatal bar ;5 always:
A. > 8 mm width
C. <: 8 mm in width
B. > 8.8 nun width
D. 1.8 mm in width
10. Indirect retainer:
A. Assists direct retainer
B. Resists lever Jction
C. Prevents displacement of RPD
D. all of the above
n. Rest:
A. Is placed on rest scat always
B.
Need not have rest seat
C. Mainly offers stability
D.
Both ' A' and 'C' are true

,
" "
..
" '"
"
,
,
• •
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
Removable Partial Denture Prosthodontics [ 109
12. Functional impression refers to:
A. Functional ridge form
B. Anatomical replica of teeth
C. Supporting tissues of the edentulous area
D. Both ' A' and 'C'
13. Functjonal occlusal registration:
A. Registers dynamic relation of opposing dentition
B. Registers static relation of opposing dentition
C. Records border movC'ments
D. Both 'A' and 'C' are correct
14. relief is required under.
A. Mandibular major conne<:tor
B. Nonmovable soft ti ssues
C. Both' A' and 'B' aTe true
D. Maxillary major conne<;:tor
15. In removable partial denture, health of gingivallissue
is ensured by:
A. Keeping minimum of 6 mm distance for major
connedor
B. Keeping minimum of 4 mm distance for major
conne<;:tor
C. Both' A' and 'B' are true
D. Minor conne<:tors joining major (onnC'(tor at < 90
degrC'C's
E. All of the above arC' correct
16. Lingual Bar major (onnetlor is filbricated using __ _
plastic pattern:
A. 12 gauge B. IS gauge
C. 6 gauge D.8 gauge
17. Method 10 delem,ine height of floor of the mouth is:
A. Use of periodontal probC'
B. Use of straight probe
C. US<' of individu.alized tray
D. Both 'A' and 'C'
12D 134 144 ISC leC 170
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
ij 112 ] Measlor PGsin prosthodontics
30. A major connt'clor should:
A. Provide vertical stabili zati on
B. Horizontal support
C. Both 'A' and ' B'
D. Not be flexible
31. Lust rigid palatal major connt'ctor is:
A. Single palatal bar
B. Palatal strap
C. U shaped palatal connector
D. palatal bar
32. Rt'sts without suts can cauSt':
A. Orthodontic movement of tooth
B. Slippage of the denture
C. Both 'A' and 'B'
D. Breakage of the rest
33. Complrtt' palatr major connt'ctor is indkatrd:
A. When the abutment tee th are canine in class I
situation
B. When there is less resorption of the ridges
C. Both 'A' and 'B' Jre right
D. When resistance has to be accomplished
34. Purpose of buding maxillary cast art' following.
A. To ensure intimate contact with palatal tissues
B. To provide visible finishing line for casting
C. To incorporate the valleys of rugae in casting
D. To transfl'r major connector dl'Sign to investment
cast
35. Depth and width of beading of Maxillary cast is:
A. ::> 0.5 mm
B. ::>1.5 mm
C. 1.5 mm
D. <0.5 mm
l'C 32C 33 C 35 0
,
• •
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
Removable Partial Denture Prosthodontics [ 113 ~
36. Following are functions of mi nor connectors, except:
A. Joining denture parts
B. Join parts from one side of the prosthesis to other
side
C. Abutment to prosthesis function
D. Transfer functiona l stress to abutment teeth
37. The only minor connector that is fl exible is:
A. That which connects major connector to denture base
B. That which connects dir ect retainer to major
connector
C. Vertical arm of an bar clasp
D. That which connects embrasure hook to major
connector
38. A minor connector located al embras urt' should bt':
A. Thinnest toward lingual surface
B. Tapering away from contact area
C. 80th 'A' and '8'
D. Thickest toward lingual surface
39. When a minor connector contacts tooth surface on
either side of t'mbruu"" it should:
A. Abruptly end at the tooth
B. Be sharply angled
C. Not have space between it and the toot h
D. All of the above are true
40. Bulki t'st portion of a proximal minor connt'ctor is
towards its:
A. Buccal side
C. Lingual
B. Centre
D. Inferior
41 . Angl e Oi l junction bt'lwt'(Jl major connector il nd
denture base minor connector should be:
A. ;,. 90 degrees B. > 11 0 degrees
C. 90 degrees D. <'" 90 degrees
368370 laD 3110 40C .10
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
ij 114 ] Mea, lor PG"n Pro,thodontic,
42. Minor connector for mandibular distal extension will
e"tend unto:
A. One-third the length of edentulous ridge
B. Two-thi rd the length of the edentulous ridge
C. Entire length of edentulous ridge
D. Half the length of the edentulous ridge
43. Att .. chment of acrylic trays to the latticl' minor
Conneetor can bl' I'stablishl'd by:
A. Tray adhesives
B. Nail head minor connector
C. 80th 'A' and 'B'
D. Nail heads on the framework
44. Minor connector for mnill .. ry dist .. 1 I'xtl'nsion
base will ntend unto:
A. One-third the length of the edentulous ridge
B. Two- third the length of the edentulous ridge
C. Entire length of edentulous ridge
D. Half Ihe len/ol th of the edentulous rid/ole
45. Tissul' stops .tee u51' ful in:
A. Stabilizing framework during processing
B. Stops the tissue impingement by tray
C. 80th 'A' and 'B'
D. Engaging buccal slope of the residual ridge
46. Finishing line junction with major connector should
have angle:
A. = 90 degrees B. <= 90 degrees
C. >= 90 degrees D. > 90 degrees
47. Sm .. U window in rl'lief w .. x distal to termi nal
.. butment in dist .. 1 ntension denture base
puti .. 1 denture acts as:
A. Tissue SlOp
B. Finishing line
C. Finishing Inde" Tissue stop
D. Nail head retention
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
Removable Partial Denture Prosthodontics [ , , 5 ~
48. Settling 01 a removable putial denture may occur due
to one of the following renons, except:
A. Improper rest design
B. Row of amalgam underneath restorations
C. Giving canine rest seat
D. Intrusion of abutment
49. Deepest part of a rest seat is tow .. rds:
A. Distobua.:al line angle B. Distolingual line angle
C. Central fossa D. Marginal ridge
SO. Base of the rest sut should be .. t lust ____ fo,
Mola rs and Premolars:
A. 1.5 mm
C. 2 mm
B. 1 mm
0.2.5 mm
51. Marginal ridge for a rest sut should be reduced by at
least:
A.lmm B. 2mm
C. 1.5 nun D.3 mm
52. Floor of the rest sut should be:
A. Convex B. Spoon·shaped
C. 'A' or'S' D. Flat
53. An angle > 90 degrees bdween rest and its minor
connector may result in:
A. Slippage of prosthesis
B. More support for prosthesis
C. Both 'A' and'S'
D. Orthodontic correction of the abutment
54. When it is not pouible to make the angle between
rest and its minor connector < 90 degrees:
A. Give a rest -less denture
B. Use secondary rest on opposing side
C. Either ' A' or'S'
D. Give embrasure hook
4aC 41C 500 StC 5211 53,""11
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
1161 MeQs lor PGs In Prosthodontics
55 . . snts are at intHproximal aru on
two .. djaCfnt tffth:
A. It should extend far lingually
B. They avoid wedging by the framework
C. They do not shunt food
D. Both 'A' and '8' are true
56. Interproxim .. 1 occlusal rt'st seats:
A. Violate contact points
B. Extend rar lingually
C. Both 'A' and 'B' are true
D. Do not avoid wedging effect by framework
57, Internal occlusal rests ire in:
A. Tooth-tissue supported class I designs
B, Tooth-tissue supported class 11 designs
C. Tooth supported class III designs
O. All distal extension denture baS(' designs
58, following of nmov;oblf p;ortial dfntUff giv"
both occlusal support and horizontal slabHiution:
A. Occlusal rest
B. Interproxim.1t OCduSlt rest
C. Internal occl usal res!
D, Indirect retainer
59. Oifferencf internal occlusal rest and
attachment is thai:
A. Internal attachment 1150 provides support
D, Internal occlusal res; also provides retention
C. internal occluSJI rest also provides stabilization
D. internal at tachment al so provides ret"ntion
60. Whfn intern"] occlusal rests are used, Wf , .. n use:
A, Buccal reCiprocal arm
B. Proximal retentive arm
C. Lingual reciprocal arm
D, Lingual retentive arm
550 sia S7C sse 60 0
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
1181 Meas for PGs In Prosthodontics
66. of PlIrtilll away from
tissue is by following. txupt:
A. Tissues of residual ridge
B. Action of retentive clasp
C. Stabilizing minor connector
D. Indirect retainer
67. Rotations occurring about an nis through most
aK:
A. Towards the ridge
B. Away from the ridge
C. Either 'A' or 'B'
D. Rotation along a longitudinal axis
68. of partial denture about
longitlldinal nis:
A. Occurs around residual alveolar ridge
B. Is resistL'(\ by di rect retainer
C. Both 'A' and 'B' are true
D. Is resisted by stress breaker
69. Movement around longitudinal nis if not resisted,
may cause:
A. UnQue st ress to sides of ridge
B. Sinking in denture
C. Horizontal shifting of denture base
D. Both 'A' and 'C' are true
70. Rotation of .emovable partial denture in vertical axis
O(curs due to:
A. Vertical occlusal forces
B. Diagonal forces
C. Both 'A' and 'B' are true
D. Diagonal and horizontal occlusal forces
71 . Stlbili:r.ing components of paTtial denture
act against forces "ting from:
A. Ipsilateral side B. Contralateral side
C. Both 'N and 'B' D. Occlusal side
I58A 57C HA "D 700 718
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
R.mov.ble Partial o.ntureProlthodontlcs [119
72. Magnitude of lateral fortes may in
presence of following.. fiXapt:
A. Ocdusion without lateral interference
B. Abnormal jaw relation
C. Malpositioned teeth in the arth
D. Improper ocdusal plane
73. In a tooth-supported the signifi cant
that has to M considered is:
A. Vertital
B. Horizontal
C. Sagittal
D. Frontal
14. In a horizontilll forces
by
A. Ocdusal rests·floor
D. Internal ocdusal rest·floor
C. Internal occlusal rest-walls
D. Occlusal rests-walls
15. A lingual re5t:
A. Is nearer to axis of rotation
D. Has less tendency to tip the tooth
C. Is more esthetic
D. All of the above are true
16. Ungual ci ngulum rest sut may prepared:
A. On the mandibular canines
B. Just incisal to cingulum
C. Both 'A' and 'D' are true
D. On steep lingual surface
11. Following are lrue for cingulum Test, rxupt:
A. Mostly done on mandibular anterior
B. It can be prepared just incisal to cingulum also
C. It is mostly done on maxillary anteriors
D. It is done on thicker tooth labiolingually
nA 73B 74C 750 7e B TT A
,
• •
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
~ 120 I MeaS for PGs in Prosthodontics
7S. Usually rtst seats art loc.ttd .t:
A. The junction of enamtl and dentin
B. Enamel
C. Dentin
D. At cemento-enamel junction
79. Roor of tht cingulum rest St.t is plactd towards:
A. Ml'Sial axial wall
B. Distal ;lxial wall
C. Cervical end
D. Incisal end
SO. Approach for. cingulum rest is:
A. Perpendicular to lingual slope
B. Horizontal to lingual slope
e. Parallel to lingual slope
D. Cep, ical to lingual slope
81. Incisal·apical
A. 2 mm
dtpth of cingulum rest is minimum:
82.
e. 1 mm
Mtsio-Dislal Jt·ngth of
A. 2.5 to 3 mm
C. 3.5 to 4 mm
B. 1.5 mm
D. 0.5 mm
cingulum rest is
B.l to2mm
D. 4 ~ 5 mm
minimum:
83. Labiolingual width of tht cingulum rtst is minimum:
A.lmm B.3mm
C.2mm D.4mm
84. Most apical portion of a cingulum rtst is:
A. Mesial corner
B. Distal corner
C. Apex of the preparation
D. Floor of the preparation
85. A lingual rest can bt
A. Laminate veneer
C. Mandibular canine
plactd on following. except:
B. Composite restoration
D. Etched metal restoration
788 nc &oC 818 82", 13C ... 0 IS C
• •
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
Removable Partial Denture ProsthodonUcs [ 121 ij
66. Ban t y ~ rests are indicated in following. except:
A. Where thin enamel is present
B. Where overly sufficient enamel is present
C. On amalgam restoration placed on the teeth
D. On compacted gold restoration
87. Incisal rests:
A. Mostly used as auxiliary rests
B. Mostly used as indirect retainer
C. Both 'A' and 'B'
D. Mostly preferred for maxillary Jnteriors
88. Disadvantages of inci sal rest are following.. except:
A. Less esthetic
B. Unfavorable leverage on teeth
C. Causes intrusion of anterior teeth
D. Causes ortho movement of the teeth
89. Dimensions of an incisal rest seat is:
A. 1.5 mm wide, 2.5 mm deep
B. 3 mm wide, 2 mm deep
C. 2.5 mm wide, 1.5 mm deep
D. 2 mm wide, 3 mm deep
90. Full incisal rests are indicated in following. except:
A. To provide anterior gUidance
B. In abraded anatomy of tooth
C. To provide retention
D. To provide stabilization
91. Parts that offer support for removable partial denture
are following:
A. Rest and reciprocal Jrrn
B. Rest and retentive Jrm
C. Rest and denture base
D. Rest and minor connector
MA UC MC S9C ~ c 91C
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
ij 122 J Mea. for PG. in Pro.thodontics
92. Retention for removable partial denh1re is obtained by:
A. Retaining elements and denture bases
B. Denture bases and minor connectors
C. Both 'A' and 'B'
D. Rests and rest seats
93. Direct Retainers offer.
A. Primary retention
B. Mechanical retention
C. Both 'A' and 'B' are true
D. Secondary retention
94. Denture bases of removible putiil denture offer.
A. Primary retention
B. Mechanical retention
C. Both 'A' and 'B' are true
D. Secondary retention
95. Mech .. niCil retention in removible parti .. ) denture m .. y
be .. chieved through:
A. Frictional means
B. By t>ngJging a depression on tooth
C. Engaging an undercut cervically
D. Anyone of the above
96. Inlricoron .. 1 reliiner mech .. nism is:
A. Engaging the undercut intracoronally
B. Frictional resistance
C. Dimpling
D. Any of the above
97. Exlricorona) retainers may be:
A. Placed on the extemal surface of crown
B. Attached to the extem .. l surface of the crown
C. Either 'A' or '8'
D. Precision attachments
HA 93C ~ D MD ~ B 97C
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
Removable Partlll Denture Prosthodontics [ 123
98. Extr;IComnal retainers may be of following types,
exc:rpt:
99.
100.
A. Dalbo attachment
B. Clasp type retainers
C. Attachment with dips or rings
D. Chayes attachment
Internal
A. Dalbo
C. Ney
is first formulated
B. Chayes
D. Kennedy
Precision attachments
."
otherwise
following. txcrpt:
A.
Internal attachment
B. Internal rest seats
C. Intracoronal retainers
D. Intlacolonal attachments
by:
known ..
101. lntracomnal attachment:
A. Eliminates visible utentive component
8 . Gives betler vertical support through a rest seat
C. Offers less vertical support
D. Has both 'A' and '3'
102. Limi tations to un of Internal attachment are following.
txcrpt:
A. Size of the pulp
B. Availability
C. Clinical crown-short
D. Cost of the prosthesis
103. A stress-breaker i ii a must in distal extension denture
base when using intemal attachment, for following
reason:
A. To prevent transmission of horizontal forces to
abutment
8. To prevent vertical forces to abutment
C. To prevent rotational forces to abutment
D. Any one of 'A' or'C'
M D " II 100 II 101 D 10: II 103 D
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
124 1 MeQs lor PGs In PrOSlhodonlics
104. Thoe .. pic;tl formoed boetwoeoen survoeyor bl .. dl.' .. nd
Ihoe tooth surf .. coe is known .. 5:
A. Angle of ocdusal convergence
B. Angl{' of occlusal divergence
C. Angle of cervical convergenc{'
O. Angle of cervical divergence
l OS. If grutl." .. ngll.' of cl.'rvical convl.'rgence is present, clasp
terminus should be pl .. ced height of
contour:
A. Away
B. Far away
C. Nearer
D. At
106. The amount of retention, clasp may be generating
depends on following. except:
A. Size of angle of cervical convergt'nct'
B. How far into angle of cervical convergence cl asp
Icrm..i'HlS is p laced
C. Flexibility of dasp aIm
D. Tilt of the cast
107. Term Hei ght of Contour is coined by:
A. Cummer
B. Dc Van
C. Kennedy
D. Craddock
108. Term Suprabul ge
A. Cummer
C. Kennedy
109. Guiding
is coined by:
B. Dc Van
D. Craddock
A. Help maintain pOSition path of placem'mt
B. Are prepared tooth ,ut faces
C. More the number, t he better
D. All of the above are true
16<1 C 105 C 106 0 107 C 108 B 109 0
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
Removable Partial Denture Prosthodontics r 125 ~
110. Unifonnity of "'tention between 2 clasps depends on
Location ot retentive tip:
A. In relation to height ot contour
B. In relation to angle of cervical convlO'rgenre
C. Both ' A' and ' B' are true
D. In relation to gUi ding plane
111. Even though the length of the retentive .re of a bar
clasp is longer than that of the circumferential clasp
ann, retention obtained is less because:
A. Flexibili ty is not proportionate to its length
B. It lies in several planes
C. It starts from gi ngival side
D. It li es in several planes thereby preventing its fl exibility
112. Nonnally, diameter ot a clasp ann is detennined at:
A. Its point of origin
B. Midway between origin and terminal end
c. Its terminal retentive lip
D. A point of flexure
113. Edgewise flexing means:
A. Half round fl exion
B, That offered by cast clasps
C. Universal flexion of round cl asp
D. Both 'A' and 'C' are corre<:t
114. Retentive clasp /Inns in a tooth supported ",movable
partial denture flex during:
A. Placement and remov,,1
B. Functional movement
C, Both 'A' and ' B'
D, All rotations of removabl e part ial dent ure
115. Advantage of wrought wire clasp are following. ,xupt:
A. Higher toughness
B. Greater tensi le strength
C. Greater bul k
D. Greater flexibili ty
110 B 111 D 112 B 113 C 114 A 115 C
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
Removable PartJal Denture Pfolthodonta r 127
122. In a Ring Clup, ann from:
A. Principal ocdusal rest to the tip
B. Strut to the tip of the clasp
C. Secondary occlusal rest to the tip
D. Entire length of the clasp arm
123. Supporting ,trut for Ring Clup should be pla(ed on
the:
A. Retentive side of the clasp
B. Near the retentive terminal
C. Bot h ' A' and ' 8' are true
D. On the non·retentive side of the abutment
124. Redproution in a Ring Clnp originates from:
A. Portion between secondary rest to tip of clasp
8. Portion between principal occlusal rest and
se<:oridary rest
C. Portion between principal occlusal rest and
supporting' strut
D. Portion between set:ondary occlusal rest and strut
125. In dist.ti denture bUe, when there is no
modifiution area exists on opposite side of the arch,
a dasp Is suilabll .. at that side:
A. Ring clasp B. Reverse ring clasp
C. Back action clasp D. Embrasure clasp
126. Undercut at the point
approa(hed by:
of origin of a clasp un be
A. Embrasure clasp
C. Hair pin clasp
8 . Back adion clasp
D. Half and Half clasp
127. Following ue part of squeala of not providing double
occluul rest for embrasure clasp, exupt:
A. Separation of abutment
B. InterprO)(imal wedging
C. Food impaction
D. Insufficient support for prosthesis
122 8 123 0 12-4 C 125 0 128 C 127 0
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
Removable PilttYlOenturti Pro,ttMKlonUes r 131
143. While using T bac clasp, the mesial ulension serves
to:
A. Give retention
B. Encompass more 1800 contact
C. Both' A' and'S'
D. Offer all the stability
144. Bar type configuration of can al!lO be used for:
A. Stabilization S. Reciprocation
C. Both 'A' and'S' D. Retention
145. When a survey line is high:
A. A bar clasp can be given
B. A circumferential clasp can be given
C. Circumferential clasp cannot be designed
D. Bar clasp cannot be given
146. Infrabulge clasp is a type of:
A. Akers clasp
B. Circumferentially approaching clasp
C. Sar clasp
D. Ring clasp
147. lnfrabulge clasp
A. Kennedy
is advocated by:
C. Applegate
B. De Van
D. Wills
148. In an infrabulge clasp, the clas p ,urn ari ses either hom:
A. Denture framewor k
S. A metal base or framework
C. Border of metal base or cast against metal shim
D. Lingual flange of acrylic or border of melal base
149. Following are features of infnbulge clasp, txupt:
A. Split clasp arm
B. Plated lingual aspect
C. Ckdusally approaching retentive arm
D. Absence of proximal plate
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
Removable Partial Denture ProsthodonUcl [ 133
156. Composite supporl for remov,Ible partial denture can
be found in following.. except:
A. Class IV conditions B. Extensive Class (If
C. Class I conditions D. Class II conditions
157. Tissueward Df the removable partial
denture depends on following. except:
A. Oa.:lusal lOild
B. Quality of tissues
C. Extent of denture base
D. Material used for denture base
158. Fukrum line is an imaginary line through which:
A. Removable partial denture can rotate anteropos·
teriorly
B. Removable partial denture can rotale away from
ridge
C. Removable partial denture can get displaced
D. May anyone of the above
159. Most common fulcrum line on dass I removable partial
denlure is:
A. One passing through ri gid component of direct
retainer occlusal to height of contour
B. One passing through flexible component of direct
retainer
C. One passing through minor connectors of direct
retainer below heigl'll of contour
D. One through crest of the edentulous ridge
160. FOKes that try to lift the dfnture away from bual Stat
an! by:
A. Activation of dired retainer
B. Part of removable partial denture framework located
on basal scat area on opposite side of fulcrum side
C. Both 'A' and 'S'
D. The activation of both occlusal cest that acts as a
indirl'Ct retainer and the direo::t cetainer
'Sf!.a 111 D 1Sf! 0 ISi.a 1110 0
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
Removable Partial Denture Prosthodontics r 137 ij
176. AUa,hment between aCl)' lk resin and metal base may
be achieved by followin&:
A. Nail heads B. Retention loops
C. Diagonal spurs D. All of the above
177. Tube teeth are made up of:
A. Resins
B. Cast mctal
C. Can be both 'A' and 'B'
D. P.orcelain fused to melal
178. DisadvanlagH of tube teeth attached directly to met.l
bilses incl ude following. except:
A. Unsatisfactory ocdusi(Jn
B. Required grinding of teeth
C. Lack of adequate functional contours
D. Unaesthetic display of metal at margin
179. Metal teeth in removable puti al denture is indin ted
when:
A. Prevention of extruSion of opposing tooth is needed
B. Whcn space is too limited
C. Both 'A' and'S'
D. Abutmcnt tccth arc tilted
180. Chemical bonding of resin to metal involvH following.
exupt:
A. Silica coating
B. Resin bonding agent application
C. Loops and Mesh
D. Thin layer of "crylic over the melal
181. Tribochemical refel'5 to a procedure of:
A. Fusing acrylic to metal
B. Fusing metal to metal
C. Fusing ceramic to metal
D. Applying a thin film of acrylic layer on mctal fo r
chemical bonding
176 0 171 A 17' II 17' C 180 C 1'1 C
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
~ 138 J Meal for PGlin Proithodontici
182. Tribocheminl pllJoCedun involv" following. except:
A. Sandblasting
B. Silane
C. Denture base resin with 4-META
D. Pressing on tube teeth chemically
183. Manife51atioM of loss of support for dist.ll exteMion
denture base nn be following. except:
A. Loss of occlusion
B. Lifting of the denture
C. Lifting of Indirect retainer from seats
D. Rotation of prosthesis around fulcrum line
184. Besl method to check occlusion inlraon.lIy 10 U5ess
relining of remov,llble p;lrtial denture is:
A. Articulating ri bbon B. Green casting wax
C. Mylar strips D. Acrylic-self cure
185. Methods 10 check loss of support for di5t.11 ulension
denture base include following. except:
A. Using free flowing irreversible hydrocolloid under
denture base
B. Applyine alternate pressure over the artificial teeth
C. Allowing tissue rest by removing the removable
partial denture
D. Evidence for heavy occlusal contacts of natural
dentition .
186. Following are lrue for dist.ll extension denlun base
removable partial denture, except:
A. Metal denture bases can be used
B. If relining is required, metal denture base Ciln be
replaced
C. Metal denture bases can be used when the tissues
are displaceable
D. More resorption occurs at the distal most end of
edentulous area
112 0 1&3 B 114 B 1&5 C III C
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
Removable Partial Denture Prosthodontics r 139 ~
181. Rigidity of the connectors in removable partial denture
accomplishu following effects, txcrpt:
A. Effect of stabilizing components
B. Retention of the removable partial denture
C. Broad distribution of stress
D. Structural durability
188. Following are forms of stress-breakers, txcrpt:
A. Wrought-wire clasp arm
B. Cast clasp retentive arm
C. Articulated prosthes:s
D. Split major connector
189. Stress-brnkfT ability of wrought wi re clasp is due to
following. f'XUpt:
A. Its half round form B. Its flexibility
C. Its taper D. Its round form
190. In a distal extension denture bue, stress on abutment
is minlmiud by following:
A. Less coverage denture base
B. Harmonious ocdusion
C. Both 'A' and 'B'
D. Anatomic basing
191. Methods to minimizt' stress on abutment tooth in
distal extension dt'ntull' bast' are following. uupl :
A. Functional basing
B. Less coverage denture base
C. Correct choice of direct retainer
D. Use of stress-breakers
192. Action of stress·bruktr separates:
A. Major connector from denture base
B. Minor connector used for denture base and the
denture base
C. Retaining elements (direct retainer) and distal
extension base
D. Indirect retainer from direct retainer
117 e '" e 110 '" 100 e '" e "2 C
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
~ 140 J Meal for PGlin Prosthodontici
193. Stress-breakers are of following types, except:
A. Those with hinge action
B. Those with flexible connection
C. Those with frictional movement
D. Those allowing vt rtical movements
194. Following designs of stress-breakers have movable
joint, except:
A. Sleeves and cylinders
B. Hinges
C. Ball and socket devices
D. Double bar major connedor
195. Movable joint s tress-breaker pennits:
A. Vertical movement of the denture base
B. Horizontal movement of dent ure base
C. Both 'A' and 'B'
D. Hinge action as well as vertical movement
196. B .. , .. du ign of s tress·breaker usn:
A. Hinge movement
O. Lateral movement
C. Both ' A' and '0'
D. Vertical and hinge movement
197. Dnigns of strus-breahrs whkh penni! limited
vertical and hinge movements are following, except:
A. Dalbo attachment
O. Oaca design
C. Spl it major connector
D. ASC-52 attachment
198. Stress-breaker designs with n exibte connection are
following. ""upt:
A. Wrought wire conn&tor
B. Divided major connector
C. Ticonium-Hidden·Lock
D. Split bars
193 C 194 D 195 D 11'" 0 1117 C l iS C
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
Removable Partial Denlure Proathodontlet: r 149 ~
245. Guiding plilnn mily be contacted by following puts
of pilrtial denture, ",xu"t:
A. Body of extracoronal direct retainer
B. Stabilizing arm of direct retainer
C. Minor connector of indirect retainer
D. Minor connector of denture base
246. Guiding planl!:s which are not in thl!: saml!: paraHl!:l
plane horizontOlIly:
A. De<:rease the stabili2ation
8. Enhance cross-arch resistance to horizontal rotation
C. De<:rease cross-arch resistance to horizOntal rotation
D. Increase the food tnp
241. Following ut' tht' inlendl!:d functions of guiding
plann, exupt:
A,. Provide one path of placement
B. To support the retainer arm and reciprocal arm
C. Ensure intended aclion of retainer
D. Eliminate food trap
248. Thl!: minor (onnl!:ctor that contacts thl!: guiding plant':
A. Has the same contour as gUiding plane
B. Is thicker lingually than buccaUy
C. Has both' A' and '8' qualities
D. No change in thickness buccolingually
249. The reduced thicknl!:S5 of minor connl!:ctor contact
guiding planl!: buC(ally:
A. Helps in more resistance to forces
B. Pl'('vents food trap more efficiently
C. Helps to abut the artificial tooth more dosely to
natural tooth
D. Helps in stability
245 0 248 B 247 B 248 C 24g C
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
Remevebole Partial Denture Prosltiodontlcs [ 153 ~
267. following is the primary purpose of using Surveyor:
A. To determine internal rests
B. To locate undercuts
C. To plan modifications of tooth surfaces
D. To design intracoronal retainers
268. Main difleffnce bttwefn Ney and Jelenko Surveyor
is in:
A. The platform in which base is moved
B. Swiveling of the horizontal arm
C. In the undercut gauges
D. Tilt that can be given to the cast
269. Best Surveyor for placement of internal attachment is:
A. Wills
B. Ney
C. Williams
D. Jelenko
270. Williams Surveyor:
A. Best suited for analyzing cast
B. Has jointed and spring-supported survey rod
C. Both 'A' and'S' arc true
D. Has immovable horizontal arm
271 . Gimbal Stage table is advantageous in that:
A. It cannot be tilted in any direction
B. Center of rotation 01 any tilt remains constant
C. Degree of inclination can be recorded
D. Both'S' and 'C' are true
272. Mai n advantage of jointed horizontal ann is:
A. It permits the horizontal arm to be moved
B. It permits the vertical arm to be moved to scribe the
survey lines without moving the cast
C. It filles the relation of the cast to the Surveyor
D. Can be used to placement of intracoronal
restorations
2111 C 2aI B 26 C 210 B 211 0 112 B
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
Removable Parti,l Denture Prosthodontics [ 155 ~
2.79. FunctiollS of guiding planes are!
A. EllSuring definite path of placement
B. Ensure predictable clasp retention
C. Both 'A' and 'B'
D. They make all the teeth parallel to each other
2.80. Clasp retenlion is!
A. Perpendicular to p ~ t h of placement
B. Resistance of metal to deformation
C. Both 'A' and '8'
D. Tighl holding of tooth by the clasps
2.81. Wh,m anl..,ior teeth are to be replaced, the best path
of placemenl Ihat can be selected is!
A. Right lateral
B. Vertical
C. Horizontal
D. Anlero-posterior
282. TI,,,, main aim of .. nt uo- p<>st",rior tilt of th", c .... t during
surveying is to establish:
A. Good esthetics
8 . To provide parallel proximal surfaces
C. To avoid interferences
D. To determine retention
283. later;!.1 tilt of the cast has to be considered for:
A. Creating guiding planes on the axial surfaces
8. To determine stabilizing component of the direct
relainer
C. To local" resl s"ab
D. Both 'A' and '8'
2S4. Non-retentive clasp arm is best placed at the:
A. Gingival third of the tooth
B. Between occlusal and middle third
C. Between middle and gingival third
O. On the occlusal third
2N C 210 C 281 II 282 II 213 D 2&4 C
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
1621 Meas for PGsin Prosthodontics
319. Chromium·cobalt has:
A. High modulus of elGsticity
B. High density
C. Low flexibility
D. 'A' and 'C'
320. Modulus of of gold is:
A. Higher than chrome.cobal t alloy
B. Lower than chrome.cobalt alloy
C. Half of that of chrome.cobalt alJoy
D. One·third that of chrome·cobalt alloy
321. has:
A. High modulus of elasticity
B. Low yield s trength
C. High yield strength
D. 'A' and '8'
322. of for chrome-cobalt
should of gold
A. More than
B. Half of
C. Less than
D. Same as
323. Chrome·cob;l lt ;llloy has proportional limit ___ _
gold alloy:
A. Same as
B. Lower than
C. Higher than
O. >= same as
324. High modulus of of chrome-cobalt is
for:
A. Greater rigidity of major connectors
B. Lesser rigidi ty of minor connectors
C. Can be used when undercut is minimum
D. 'A' and ' C'
3 1' 0 320 C 321 0 322 C 323 B 324 0

Printable Copy to DrEzaby
~ 164 ] Mea. for PG.ln Prosthodontics
331. Wrought ilnd gold wire un be of following type':
A. High precious metal all oy
D. Low precious metal alloy
C. Ei ther ' A' or 'D'
D. Medium precious ,1110),
332. Wrought wire hH to be embedded in framework 10
lie in two planes:
A. For mechanical retention
B. Since oxidation occurs it prevents wetli ng of the
wi re
C. For chemical retention
D. 'A' and '8' are true
333. Wrought wire retenti ve clasp arm when stiected, it
un be:
A. Mechanically retained in denture base
D. Cast 10 d,mlure base
C. Soldered to denture base
D. Ei ther cast or soldered or embedding in denture
b , ~
334. Soldering method prt:ferred for aUaching wrought wire
to framework is:
A. Torch soldering B. Oven soldering
C. Electric soldering D. Gas-oxygen soldering
335. Electric soldering is best for iltlilching wrought-wire
to metal framtwork for:
A. High recrystallization of molc<:ules
B. Rapid localization of heat at site
C. To allow grain growth quickly
D. To allow surface oxidation for better bonding
336. Fluoride typt flux can be used:
A. When chrome-cobalt alloys are soldered
B. When gold allo)'s are soldered
C. When gold alloy is soldered to chrome-alloy
D. For both 'A' and 'C'
U tc 3320 3330 3:W C 3S5 B 338 0
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
~ 1661 Mea, lor PGs in Prosthodontics
343. Commonly used probes for examination of perio-
dontium for removabl e partial denture:
A. Is Nabers probe
B. Michigan-O probe
C. Explorer
D. Ei ther' A' or'S'
344. Nabers probe is used to:
A. Check for pocket depth
B. Check for bleeding on probing
C. Check the furcation involvement
D. Feel crest of the bone
345. Fi rs t obj ective in selective grinding is:
A. Coordination of occlusion in protrusive
B. Coordination of occlusion in right lateral
C. Coordination of occlusion. in left lateral
D. Coordina tion of occlusion in centri c relation
346. Cusp point is reduced only when:
A. It is in premat ure contact
B. It is in premature contact in centric
C. It is in premature contact in eccentric
D. It is in p rema t ure contact bot h in cent ric and
ecrentric relation
347. lingual inclines of muillary anterior are conecled
when:
A. Anterior teeth are in premature contact only in
centric relation
B. Anterior teeth are in prema t ure contact only in
('(centriC relation
C. Anterior teet h are in premature contact both in
centric and eccent ric relation
D. All of t he above
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
Removable Partial Denture Pro.thodontlc. r 1 71 ~
310. True reciprocation;
A. Is when continuous (orces are applied to the tooth
B. Is when an orthodontic forces is applied to the tooth
C. Is obtained when redprocal arm contacts tooth prior
to the retentive arm
D. 'A' and 'C' are true
311. Crown ledge is usually prepared on the:
A. Mesial surface
B. Distal surface
C. Buccal surfact'
D. Lingual surface
312. Crown ledge or shoulder is contacled by;
A. Retentive arm
N. Prollima! plate minor connector
C. Redprocal arm
D. Embrasure hook
313. Crown ledge is:
A. Prepared at the junction of gingival and middle third
B. Curved according to gingival tissues
C. Both ' A' and 'B'
D. Slightly diverging occlusally
314. Crown ledge is:
A. Usuall y placed on the lingual aspect
B. Converging occlusally
C. Continuous with prOllimal gUiding plane
D. 'A' and 'C' are true
375. Best to mill internal rcst seats or lingual groovt'$ and
ledges on crowns is:
A. A hand piece altached to Surveyor is used
8. A drill is used for precise milling
C. A parallellometer can be devised
D. Faro hand piece can be used on Surveyor
370 C 371 D 372 C 373 C 374 D 375 B
• •
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
ij 1761 Measlor PGsin Prosthodontles
399. Prt<:autions to be taken during making of intert>cdusal
record aR following. except;
A. Occlusion should be satisfactory
B. Casts are accurate
C. Records should be trimmed
D. It should record the undercuts also on the tooth
400. Shellac bues can be stabilized by following method, :
A. By burnishing tin foil onto lubricated casts
B. Using impression paste
C. Both 'A' and 'B'
D. Lined by heat cure resin
401. Jaw relation records may be:
A. Functional
B. Static
C. Of occlusal pathways
D. Of all types
402. In ntablishing occlusion for nalural dentition, the
diffeffnt schools of thought that exist aff:
A. Incisal guidance prior to occlusal rehabilitation
B. Canine guidance pri or to occlusal rehabilitation
C. Mutual protection
D. All of the above
403. Advantages of canine guidance for mandibular move"-
ments is following, except:
A. Transmission of proprioception
B. It is the corner tooth in the arch
C. It has long roots
D. Canine is a st rong tooth
404. A dynamic registration of occlusion helps in
developing hannony with following structures:
A. Facial skelet on B. Muscles
C. Joints D. All of the above
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
ij 180 1 Mea. for PGsin Prosthodontics
424. During duplin.ting. remonl of the muter cut from
the mold "'n be accompli, hed by:
A. Flexing the mold
B. Applying a rubber suction tip
C. Both 'A' or ' B'
D. Breaking the mold
425. During duplication, t h ~ filled mold i, immersed In
water:
A. Fully
B. Partially
C. To supply needed water of crys tallization
D. 'A' and 'C' are correct
426. Immersion of filled mold of a duplicating material
should be done for:
A. >'" 30 minutes
C. > 45 minutes
8. <: 45 minutes
D. " 60 minutes
427. While separating freshl y duplicated cut:
A. It should be retrieved from mold carefuUy
B. The mold shoul d be broken away from the cast
C. Care should be taken not to abrade the mold
D. Mold should be preserved to pour second time
428. An investment cast:
A. Should be trimmed on a model t rimmer
B. Should be washed under running tap water
C. Should be washed In slurry water
D. Should be trimmed with a sharp knife and residue
blown off
429. Adnntages of sprayins cut are following. except:
. A. Provides dense surface
B. Prevents marring of cast during handling
C. Gives a slimy, shiny surface
D. Facilitates adherence of pattern on the cast
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
Removebte Pertlal Denture Prosthodontles [ 181 ~
430. Whitt fabri cating wrollght-win> clasp, tht foot is
plactd:
A. Buccally
B. Far-lingually
C. On the crest
D. Just lingual to crest
431. Lingual bar wax patttm:
A. 6 gauge half pear Wal< form
B. 24 gauge sheet wax
c. Should be st retched to alter its thickness
D. 'A' and 'B' are true
432. Guiding Plant art madt up of
A. 6 gauge wal< pattern
B. 6 gauge half round wax pattern
C. 8 gauge half round patlem
D. 24 gauge pattern
433. Use of 24 gaugt pink shetl wax on tht dentUn> but
acta:
A. Facilitates trimming it accurately to the design
B. Helps to alleviate SQre spots, if any, later
C. Both 'A' and 'B'
O. Helps in nexibility of the denture base
434. Rungs of tht laddtr-likt constructi on for mi;;or
connt(tor an> plactd ap/lrt:
A. 3mm B.2mm
C. 5mm O. 4mm
435. Bar typt rtt/linu is fanned from _____ wax:
A. 8 gauge wax
B. 10 gauge half round wax
C. 12 gauge half round wax
D. 20 gauge half round wax
430D 4310 432 C 433 C U4C USC
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
~ 188 1 MCQI for PGlin Prolthodontlcs
471. When gold ocelu"ls are used for artificial teeth in
rtmovable partial dentllres:
A. Resin teeth should be reduced by 2 mOl
B. About 3 mOl of rtsin are trimmed
C. An undercut should be prepared along central fossa
of resin teeth
D. 'A' and 'C' are t rue
472. The gold ocelu"ls which are casl, lire attached to the
denlure by:
A. Sprinkling tooth shade acrylic
B. Cementing using zinc phosphate
C. Mechanical retention
D. Press-on method
473. Process of attaching auylic resin teeth dirtctly to
rttentive elements on metal frame with matching resin
is known as:
A. Cementation of teeth
B. Sprinkle-on method
C. Pressed-on method
D. Tube teeth attachment
474. The rules for varying height of gingival tissue at
cervical portion of artificial teeth are listed by:
A. Hippocrates B. Tylman
C. Frush D. Fischer
475. Rules for formation of interdental papilla for artificial
dentition were advocated by:
A. Frush B. Fisher
C. Fish
D. Lcon Williams
476. Interdental papilla in dentures should be:
A. Flat in all directions
B. Concave in all di rections
C. Convex in all directions
D. None of the above are correct
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
Removable PartlalOenture ProsthodonUes [ 201 ij
541. Proximal Occlunl Rests:
A. Are locatl'd in a meSial fossa adjacent to another
tooth
B. Arl' located on mesial or distal fossa adjacent to
another tooth
c. Are located on mesial or distal fossa adjacent to
edentulous space
D. Are located on mesial fossa adjacent to edentulous
space
548. The ",515 thai are localtd in a mesial or distal (OMa
adjacenl to anothtr tooth is calltd as:
A. Proximal OCCIUS.ll rest
B. Embrasure occlusal rest
C. Embrasure incisal rest
D. Proximal incisal hook rest
549. When an occlusal resl approaches ocdunl s urfac .. from
midlingual Or midbcial s uriacl', it can bl' tl'nlIed:
A. Occlusal rest
B. Mid-cervical rest
C. Basic facial or lingual occlusal rest
D. Incisal occlusal rest
550. Following are tru .. for linguallrdge Rest Seal!., txcept:
A. They havl' to bl' prepared on when cingulum is
prominent
B. Not a vl'ry (,(ficil'nt prl' paration
C. Base of the seat is very narrow
D. It can be preparl'd on tl'eth wi thout prominent
cingulum
so C S4I B S(9 C 550 A
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
Removeble Pertlet DentUn! Prosthodontics [ 205
567. Following are true for Interstitial Grinding.. except:
A. Should be done for patients below 30 years
B. Done to correct minor displacement of tooth
C. Can be done all teeth
D. It transforms contact point to an area
568. Th .. prematuN: contacts b .. lw .. en O(dusat surfae .. , and
nalura] t .. eth are dassifi .. d by:
A. McCollum B. Cross
C. Gysi D. D'Amico
569. Incisal edge pr .. parition
propM .. d by:
A. Kratochvil
C. Kelly
for Rut Seats hav .. been
B. Krol
D. Kennedy
570. A right-angl .. Carbon Mark .. r for Surv .. yor is us .. d:
A. When the teeth have large space between them
B. When there are too many abutments to be surveyed
C. When two teeth tha t have only · a small space
between them have to be surveyed
D. When the abutment ta be surveyed is severely tilted
571. Following d .. sign of d .. ntur .. base for partial d .. ntur ..
Is undesirabl .. :
A. Enlarged space between it and abutment
B. Without any space between it and abutment
C. Small space between saddle and abutment
D. None of the above
572. Combination Onlay:
A. Ha s metal casting over which acrylic reSin is
attached
B. Has acrylic lhlse 0'11'/ which metal is bonded using
Silane agent
C. Has metal only combined with metal retentive arm
D. Both 'A' and 'C' are true
w. 5&$11 UOC U tC 512 .
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
Removable Partial Denture Prosthodontics [ 211 ij
601. Following are true for Infrabulge except:
A. Maximum tooth contact
B. Minimal interferenCE' with natural tooth
C. Better esthetics
D. Maximum natural cleansing action
602. Following an true for Thielemann' s Di agonal Law,
except:
A. It refers to elongation of single tooth into opposing
'p<>re
B. Elongation of entire side of one arch
C. Reduction of the elongated teeth/tooth is required
D. Cause is posterior deflective contact
603. Most Advantageous PO$ition (MAP) rtiers to:
A. Face bow transfer
B. It is the best position of the cast on the surveyor
C. Position of the occlusal rest
D. Position of the guiding plane
604. Foll owi ng factors detu mine MAP:
A. Guiding surfaces of teeth and retentive areas
B. Placement of indirect retainer
C. Placement of major conne<:lor
D. Both 'A' and '8'
605. In a distal n tension denture ban the retentive portion
of the
A. Should engage an undercut forward of the axis of
rotation
B. Should not (,ngage an undercut forward of the axis
of rotation
C. Moves upwards during function
D. Engages the tooth when load is applied.
1501 A 602 A IS03 II e.o. A A
Printable Copy to DrEzaby

Section Three
Complete Denture
Prosthodontics
1. In C'volution, Bi pedal posture of humans:
A. Has eHed on feeding me.:hanism
B. Was Studied by Bennett
C. Both 'A' and'S' are true for this
D. Was studied by McNamara
2. The lIl.:a nifest.1l tions of upright position of humans ,ue
following. uc,pl :
A.SJ-h
B. Influence on skull
C. Feeding mechanism
D. Maximum opening of rt\iIndible is possible only with
translation
3. Epithelium that l i n ~ oral cavity is:
A. Keratinized
B. Non-keratinized
C. Para-keratinized
D. Stratified squamous type
4. Mucosa on hard pal ate> is:
A. Non-keratinized
B. Para-keratinized
C. Keratinized
D. 5pe<:ialized
, . , .
"
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
~ 214 J Meas 'or PGs In Prosthodontics
5. In natural teeth, the
A. Cementum
occlusal load is absorbed by:
B. By enamel
C. Dentin D. Periodontal ligament
6. Aftf'r resorption, maxilla becomes nllrow, due to
following reasons:
A. Changes in incisive papilla
B. Oblique placement of teeth in alveolar process and
laterally inclined alveol ar process itself
C. Both 'N and 'B'
D. Pressure from facial surfaces
7. Arthroidal movement in Temporomandibulll joint
occurs between:
A. Condyle and d isc
B. Disc and temporal bone
C. Both 'A' and ' B'
D. Condyle and lateral pterygoid muscle
8. The parts of glenoid fossa that participate9 in activity
is:
A. Posterior slopt' of the articular emi nence
B. Posterior wall of glenoi d fossa
C. Central area
D. 'A' and 'S'
9. Squamous portion of Temporal bone cons ists of
following, exCt pt:
A. Articular errunel'lCe
B. Tympanic p<}rtion
C. Mandibular fossa
D. Post-glenoid tuberde
10. Retrusion of Condyle is mainl y influenced by:
A. Supt'rior belly of medial pterygoid
B. Superior belly of lateral pterygoid
C. lnf{>rior belly of lateral pterygoid
D. Medial belly of medial pterygoid
.. .. 118 l ac
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
~ 215 ] MCQI for PGlin Proithodontici
17. The uticulu surfaces of Temporomandibulu joint:
A. Contai n nerves
8. Hyaline cartilage
C. ConLlin nonvascular, nerve-free tissue
D. Hdp in drainage of blood easily
18. Portion of articulu disc that is aYl.sculu is:
A. Ant('rior part
B. Central part
C. Post('rior part
D. Peripheral part
19. In the Temporomandibulu joint, the fibrous con·
nKtin tiu ue is thicbd at:
A. Crest of articular eminence
B. Posterior slope of the articular eminence
C. Anterior slope of ntirular eminence
D. 'A' and ' 8'
20. In natural dentition,
bears predominantly:
the Temporomandibulu joi nt
A. Tensile forces
C. Shearing forces
B. Compressive forces
D. Both ' A' and ' 8'
21. In completely edentulous state, the temporomandi-
bular joint takes up:
A. Shea r forces
B. Tensile (orces
C. Compressive forces
·0 . Both ' A' and ' C'
U . In Temporomandibular joint, physiologic adaptations
to function consists of followi ng. uupt :
A. Joint remodeling
8. Increased vascularity of art icul ar disc
C. Appearance of cartibge cells
D. Clycosaminoglycans
11 C " II " D 20 C 21 D Z2 II
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
~ 215 ] MCQI for PGlin Proithodontici
17. The uticulu surfaces of Temporomandibulu joint:
A. Contai n nerves
8. Hyaline cartilage
C. ConLlin nonvascular, nerve-free tissue
D. Hdp in drainage of blood easily
18. Portion of articulu disc that is aYl.sculu is:
A. Ant('rior part
B. Central part
C. Post('rior part
D. Peripheral part
19. In the Temporomandibulu joint, the fibrous con·
nKtin tiu ue is thicbd at:
A. Crest of articular eminence
B. Posterior slope of the articular eminence
C. Anterior slope of ntirular eminence
D. 'A' and ' 8'
20. In natural dentition,
bears predominantly:
the Temporomandibulu joi nt
A. Tensile forces
C. Shearing forces
B. Compressive forces
D. Both ' A' and ' 8'
21. In completely edentulous state, the temporomandi-
bular joint takes up:
A. Shea r forces
B. Tensile (orces
C. Compressive forces
·0 . Both ' A' and ' C'
U . In Temporomandibular joint, physiologic adaptations
to function consists of followi ng. uupt :
A. Joint remodeling
8. Increased vascularity of art icul ar disc
C. Appearance of cartibge cells
D. Clycosaminoglycans
11 C " II " D 20 C 21 D Z2 II
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
Complete Dentur. Prosthodontics r 21 7 ij
23. The estimated r.l tio of neuron to mu ti c.l tory muscle
fi bers is:
A. 1 : 3
Cl:700
B. 1 : 1000
0 .1 : 10,000
24. Elev.ltion of m.lndible is produced by:
A. Sup(' rior belly of lateral pterygOid
B. Superior belly of lateral pterygoid and digastric
C. Inferior belly of lateral pterygoid and digastric
D. Non(' of the above
25. Posterior fibers of Temporalis help in:
A. Protrusion B. RetfUsion
C. Centric occlusion D. Lat('ral movement
26. In somatic awall ow, following muscles are active:
A. Facial
B. Circumoral
C Elevator muscles
D. Tongue muscle
27. Sil ent period of the muscl e:
A. When the muscle is not contracting
B. Can be elicited during contraction of muscle
C [s shortened in pain dysfunctions
D. All of the above are t rue
28. Facial nerve supplies following, t xupt:
A. Buccinator
B. StapediUS
C Stylohyoid
D. Anterior digastric
29. Hypoglossal nerve suppl ies all extri nsic muscles of
tongue, exupt:
A. Palatoglossus
C. Genioglossus
B. Hyoglossus
D. Styloglossus
2:3C 24 D %511 Z8 C 21 11 280 2IIA
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
224 1 Meas for PGsin Prosthodontics
67. Following Uf' lruf' for Tori, except;
A. They are growing slowly
B. They are not growing
C. They are benign
D. They are abnormal oral structures
68. Tori consist of:
A. Laminated cortical rone
B. Thick layer of mucus
C. Thick layer of sub-mucus
D. All of the above
69. Tori are:
A. Delayed over growth; of medial margins of palatine
processes
B. Delayed overgrowths of the medial margins of
horizontal processes of maxilla
C. Overgrowth from premaxilla
D. Present during development of maxilla itself
70. A Tori affects following, except:
A.
B. Mastication
C. Posterior palatal seal in denture
D. Stability of the dent·;re
71. Following are techniques used for vestibulopluty,

A. Mucosal advancement
B. Usage of hydroxyapatite
C. Secondary epithelialization
D. Usage of epithelial gufls
72. The minimum amount of vertical bone height requirf'd
to conduct veslibuJopbsty is:
A.S em B.2 cm
C. 1.5 cm D. 0.5 em
678 68A 69A 708 718 nc
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
~ 232 1 Measlor PGsin Prosthodontics
112. Deepest portion of posterior palatal seal area is scraped
approximately:
A. 3-3.5 mm B. 1-1.5 mm
C. 2-2.5 nun D.4-4.5 mm
113. Adv,ml/lge of placing posterior palatal seal in trial base
are following.. except:
A. I I is a physiologic technique
B. More accurate maxillo-mandibular record
C. Early determination of retention
D. Indication of poslerior ext('llt of the denture, 10 the
palient
114. Dindvantage of placing postt'rior palatal seal in lrial
bue are following.. except:
A. Potential for over compression of tissues
B. Trial denture base will be too relentive
C. It is nol J physiologic technique
D. Depends on careful ;craping of Ihe cast
11 5. In Fluid W..,. technique, the posterior palatal 5eal ,un
is recordt'd in tht':
A. Trial denture base B. Final wash impression
C. Primary impression D. Special tray
116. Preferred imprusion malnial for Fluid Wax technique
of placing posterior palatal seal area is:
A. Elastic impression material
B. Zinc oxide eugenol
C. Eit her ' A' or 'B'
D. Reversible hydrocolloid
117. Di sadvantage of using elasti c impN:ssion malerial for
placing of poslerior palatal seat aN:a in Fluid Wax
technique is:
A. They arc not resilient
B, Wax will not adhere to the material
C. Both 'A' and 'B'
D. More expensive mJterials
112 B 113 A 114 B 115 B 11& 8 117 8
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
CompleteOenture Prolthodontlel [ 239 ij
152. Following articulators will accept face bow Iransfer,
rxcept:
A. Grittman articuliltor
8. Kinoscope articulator
C. Stansberry articulator
D. Teledyne articulator
153. In Gysi simple;{ articulator, the condylar path is fixed
al and inci n l guidance is find at :
A. 60 dcgrees and 30 dcgrccs
8. 30 degrces and 60 degrees
C. 33 degrees and 45 degrecs
D. 25 degrees and 60 degrees
154. In Grillman Arti culator, the casts are mounted based
on:
A. Monson's CUTVC
8. 8onwill's trianglc
C. Conical theory
D. Curve of Spec
155. Articulator that incorporates a rotary guidance for
milling-in purposes is:
A. Gritlman
8. House articulator
C. Dentatus
D. Denar
156. Hanau-Mate articulator:
A. Has horizontal condylar guidance fixed at 25 degrees
B. Bennett angle fixed at 20 degrees
C. Will not accept protrusivc or lateral interocdusal
records
D. All of the above are true
152 A 153 B 154 B 155 11 156 C
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
~ 2441 Meas lor PGs In Prosthodontics
183. Following articulator i n class IV-S have non-
cus tomizable Bennett gUide:
A. Denar 4A S. Gnathoscope
C. Simulator D. Denar 5A
1M. Pantographic tracings for condylar pathways are not
necessary for complete denture patient because:
A. It is time consuming to make
B. Resiliency of supporting tissue does not call for its
accuracy
C. Both' A' and '8'
D. Teeth are not present to gUide the mandible
185. Anterior Reference Point helps in following, except:
A. Face bow t ransfer
S. Minor adjustment in vertical dimension
C. Facilitate arrangement of anterior teeth
D . Recording centric relation
186. Immediate Side Shift influent":
A. Inclination of grooves of posterior teeth
S. Inclination of cusps of posterior teeth
C. Both 'A' and ' B'
D. Width of the central groove of the posterior teeth
187. In complete denture, an average intercondylar distance
of is sufficient:
A. 94 mm
B. 110 mm
C. 124 mm
D. 138 mm
188. Lack of Bennett adjustmf'nt in complete df'nture is
conlpenuted by providing:
A. Occlusal ad justment for freedom in protrusive
B. Occlusal adjustment for frE'Cdom in right lateral
C. Occlusal adjustment for freedom in left lateral
D. Both 'B' and 'C'
113 C lU II 115 D lae D 1.1 II lSI D
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
CompletaDenture Prosthodontics r 245 ~
189. "anau "2 Non-Arcon articulator can accr pt following
facr oows, exupt:
A. Fada face bow
8 . Twirl bow
C. Kinematic face bow
D. Quick-Mount face bow
190. Whrn usi ng Adjustabl e A"is face oow for "anau "2
articulator:
A. The intercondylar distance must be modified using
extendible condylar shaft
B. The adjustable a" is race bow has to be e"tended to
meet the requi rements
C. A Hanau H2-X articulator should be used
D. Both 'A' and 'C' are true
191. When UlIing a protrusivr rrcord to obtain latrral
condylar guidancr, the error will be:
A. Heavy ocdus.:ll contact on balancing si de
8. Heavy occlusal c o n t ~ c t on working side
C. Heavy ocdusal contact on balancing side and light
on working side
D. Light occlusal contacl on balancing side and heavy
on working side
192. Lateral condylu guidancr obtainrd from protrusivr
records:
A. Is same as prolrusiv<'
B. Is steeper than t rue lateral inclinations
C. Is less s t ~ p than true lateral inclinations
D. Is better than true lateral measurements
193. Hanau H2 articulator hiS:
A. Adjustable, angled 'foot' incisal gUide pin
B. Curved incisal gUide pin
C. Straight incisal gUide pin
D. Split incisal guide pin
I" D 100 0 111 1 0 lU C In A
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
ij 2461 Measlor PGs In Prosthodontics
194. Twirl-bow relates muilla to:
A. Axis-orbital plane
B. Ala- tragus plane
C. Frankfort Horizontal Plane
D. Horizontal occlusal plane
195. In Hanau AKon H2,the notch on incinl guide is about
below thl! condylar planl!:
A. 7 mm
D. 47 mm
C. 23 mm
D. 34 mm
196. Hanau radial shift:
A. Has curved Immediate Side Shi ft
D. Has non-adjustable Progressive 1k>nnett Shift
c. Has both' A' and ' 0'
D. Adjustable intercondylar distance
197. Thl! curvature for Imml!diate Sidl! Shift in Hanau
Radial Shift Articulator has about:
A. 5 mm radius
D. 6 mm radius
C. 3 mm radius
D. 2 mm radius
198. Thl! sUp1'rior wall curvature in Hanau Radial Shift
articulator has a radius of about:
A. 0.25" B. 0. 75"
C. 0.50" D.1"
199. The available Incinl GuidI! Tables for Hanau Radial
Shift Articulator arl! foJlowing. ~ x u p t :
A. Curved
D. Flat table
C. Mechanical table
D. Pantacrylic table
1M C 195 8 196 A li1 C 191 B le11 A
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
~ 2481 Meas for PGs in Prosthodontics
206. Detent mechanism:
A. Is used in Hanau radial shift articulator
B. Helps return the upper member of articulator to
U'ntric position
C. Is used along with protrusive guides
D. All .of the above are true
207. For Whip Mho: articulator, Immediate Side Shift can be
set using:
A. Protrusive interocdusal record
B. Centric interocc!usal record
C. QUick set recorder
D. Both 'A' and 'C'
208. Following are articulators designed by Denu
Corporation, except:
A. Mark II B. Omni
C. D4A D. Panadent
209. Following adjustments in articulators has to be done
to accept adjustable axis bce bow, txupt:
A. Telescopic mounting studs
B. Transfer fixture
C. Extendible pins
D. Quick-set recorder has to be added
210. Denar Reference Plane Locator locates the:
A. Anterior reierence point
B. A point 15 mm anterior to External Auditor Meatus
C. A posterior reference point
D. Both ' A' and 'C'
211. Following are instrulllents designed by Denar
Corporation, exctpt:
A. Mark II articulators
B. Slidematic face bow
C. Omni articulator
D. Quick·Mount face bow
206 B 207 C 201 0 209 0 210 0 211 0
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
~ 250 j Mcal 'or PGI ln PrOlthodontlcl
218. Dt'nar Mini Rt'Corder un bt' un d for following. uupt :
A. To locate the hinge axis
B. To standardize articulator
C. Protrusive horizontal inclination
D. Immediate Side Shift
219. Richey condylar miuk.., is Lind:
A. To stribe an a rc 10 mm a"terior to External
Audi lory MNtus
B. To stribe an a rc 13 mm anterior to E)(terna l
Audilory Meatus
C. To determine Axis-Orbi tal plane
D. To deter mine Frankfort Horizontal Plane
220. Arbitrary axis for HaniLi face bow is within ___ _
of true ct'nler of opt'nins axi, of tht' jaws!
A. 10 mm
B. 1 mrn
C. 8 mm
0. 2 mm
221. Antulor rdt'rence poii'll for SHdemiti c face bow is:
A. 34 mm above incisIve edge of right central incisor
B. 43 mm above lower border of upper lip
C. 54 mm above lower border of upper lip
D. 26 mm above lower border of upper lip
222. The Kile on the slidt'matlc face bow reprnenl8:
A. The intercond ylar d is tance
B. 3/4th of intercondylar di$tance
C. 1/ 2 the intercondylar distance
D. 1/ 4th of intercond yla r dis tance
22.3. Advantage of Sli dematk face bow is:
A. It is kin('matic
B. Multiple transfer jigs can be osed with face bow
C. Incisal table ca.n be removed to attach face bow
O. Cast support is not required
~ 1 ' " ~ 1 ' 8 uo 0 221 " 222 C 222"

• •
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
Complete Denture Prosthodontics r 273 ~
347. In a Hanolu Protrusive-Retrusive articulator, 1I8th tum
of the Protrusive-Retrusive screw equals _ _ _ _
movement of the condylu element:
A. 1 mm B. 0.08 inch
C. 0.005 inch D. O.008 mm
348. Arbitrary verticoll landmuks for folce bow trolnsftr in
01 Hanau articulator appNr& on the Inci sal pin. -C-:;;'--_
and below tilt Frankfort Horizonul Plane:
A. 54 mm and 47 mm
B. 37 mm and 54 mm
C. 54 mm and 37 mm
D. 43 mm and 54 mm
349. The width of the central guiding table of the Incisal
Guide table in Holnau l rti culator is;
A. 5 mm B. 5.76 mm
C. 5.20 mm D. 5.56 mm
350. The lateral wings of Inci sal Guide tabl e III Hilnau
articulator is adjus tibl e up to:
A. 70 degrees B. 45 degrees
C. 60 degrees 0. 120 degrees
351. The audilory pins in Hmau ilrticulilor are ___ _
to the condylu center:
A. 13 mm anterior
B. 13 mm p<)Sterior
C. 12 mm posterior
D. 16 mm poster ior
352. In Hanau oIrticulators, in balancing side, the condylar
element will mike contact with:
A. Centric SlOp
B. Condylar s haft
C. Auditory pin
D. Condylar t rack
347 C 348 II 3.' 0 350 II 3$1 C. 3$2 II
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
ij 274 1 MeQslor PGsin Prosthodontics
353. The met.ll th.lt is used to m.lnuf.lcture H.ln.lu
uti<:ublor is:
A. Alwninwn
B. Nickel
C. Chromium
D. Stainless-steel
354. Buccin.tor muscle uises from following. except:
A. Pterygomandibular raphe
B. Alveolar process of maxilla
C. process o.
D.
355. Following .I .. true about linguliz.ltion of occlusion
in complete dentures, except:
A. Helps in good seal buccally
B. Creates a space bet ween cheek and teeth and
external surface of the denture
C. Helps to accumulate food in the buccal area
D. It prevents from neutralizing th .. 13teul
forces from tongue
356. One of the following is true for Modiolus:
A. It is at the angle of the mouth
B. Is just to angle of the mouth
C. Is formed of 7 muscles
D. Affects denture flange in maxiflary molar area
357. Following is true for sublingual flange aru, during
construction of compl ete denture:
A. If used correctly. can aid in retention of lower
denture
B. It extends from canine to canine
C. Flange in this area should be extended vertically
D. It cannot form a valve seal
353 A U. 0 355 A 358 B 357 A
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
286 PI Mea. for PGs in Prosthodontics
424. Centric relati on is a
A. Antero'posterior
C. Postero-superior
------position:
B. Antero-inferior
D. None of the above
425. Buccal shelf is a stress bearing area because:
A. It has cortical bone
C. Both 'A' and 'B' corn...::t
B. Mucosa is to t he occlusal load
D. Buccinator fibl'-rs are parallel
426. Retromolar pad contains following.. eXrl'pt:
A. Buccinator fibl'-rs
B. Mylohyoid fi bers
C. Superior constrictor fibers
D. Glandular tissue
427. The residual monomer level in denture bases:
428.
429.
A. Is about 3% in correctly polymerizl'<l heat cured
resin
B. Is about 30% in correct ly polymerized heat cured
reSIn
C. Is likely to bt.' high if a short curing cycle is employed
D. Both 'A' and 'C' are correct
Denture stomatitis:
A. Is usually associatc<i with a sore mouth
B. Is usually associated wi th wearing denture at night
C. Is more common in men than women
D. Both A and B are correct
Thickness of buccal flange of a complet e denture is
affected by:
A. Zygom<lticus muscle
B. The position' of the mandible
C. Determined by the orbicularis oris
D. The pterygomandibubr raphe

424 0 425 C B 427 D 428 0 429 B
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
~ 296 j Mea, for PG,ln PrOithodontifa
478. Balandng side occlusal error includes:
A. Balancing side contact
B. Heaving contact on balancing side, wor king teeth
out of contact
C. Ma)(i llar y cusps He distal to t hei r intercusping
positions
D. Maxillary cusps He mesial to their intercusping
positions
479. The least needed information while selecting teeth for
esthetics in compltle denture is:
A. Size of the face
B. Form of the face
C. Color of the eye
D. Length of the upper lip
480. The lingu .. l flange of the mandibular denture should
be:
A. Made concave
H. Made concave under the lingual surfaces of the teeth
C. Slightly concave but not under the lingual surfaces
D. Convex in nature 10 keep the longue away
481. Following at .. advantages of wearing an immediate
denture, exrept:
A. No edentulous p ~ r i o d for the patient
B. Esthetics is maintained
C. Can be relined later
D. Prevents excess bleeding
,
482. In a comple' .. dentuR, 'he common cause for fraclure
of teeth as well as the d .. nlure is:
A. Thermal conductivity
B. Change in occlusal relation
C. Increased bul k in palate
D. Decrease in tiSSUf tolerance
411 II 47i C 4IlI C 411 C 412 11
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
~ 3041 MeQllor PGlln Proltl'lodonilci
524. In speech, palatolingu.1 consonants ue following.
except:
A. '5'
C. 'P'
B. 'N'
O. 'L'
525. One of the following i, not true for Transograph:
A. [t is a split axis instrument
B. Each condyle functions independently
C. Insists on a true hinge axis
O. Dot.'S not believe in a:'l imaginary line through which
the two condyl es mlate
526. A record of (on tact made between tongue and the hard
palate during 'puch, is called:
527.
A. Pantogram B. Palatogram
C. Electromyogram D. Electrokinesiogram
Speaking wu consists
A. Paraffin wax
mainly of:
B. Beeswax
C. Microcrystalline wax O. Carding wax
528. Christen5en'5 Distance is menu red from:
A. Distal cusp of maxillary second molar to the posterior
end of the denture
B. Distal cusp of maxil lary second molar to the dist,ll
cusp of mandibular molar
C. Di stal cusp of maxillary second molar to
perpendicul arly downwards to mandibular second
molars
D. Oistobuccal cusp of b st mandibular molar to a point
perpendicular to the maxillary occlusion ri m
529. During Gothic arch Ira(ing. a blunt apex may be the
ruult of following. t""pt:
A. Instabili ty of t rial bases
B. Interference between the bases at distal ends
C. Lack of equalization of pressure
D. Limited range of movement of mandible
524('525(' 528B 527B 52'0 5 ~ 0
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
3181 Meas for PGs In Prosthodontics
4. During a Iranslalory of following
(Kcur at joint in i ts ..... rious stl'1.l ctun's,
except:
A. Head of the condyle rotates on the superior surface
of the meniscus
B. Upper surface of disc contacts articular eminence
C. The complex slides as condyle rotates
D. Condyle rotates on underside of disc
5. of foll owing is not cDlncl:
A. Inferior surface of disc is convex
B. Superior surface of di sc is concave-convex from
before backward
C. Superior surface is in cont act with articular suriilce
of temporal bone
D. Inferior surface of the disc is conCilve and fits to
condyle
6. sln'ss bnring arn of disc is:
A. Anterior part In contact with ilrtleular eminence
B. Inferior part in contact with ilrticular eminence
C. Central part in contact with ilrticular eminence
D. Supero-anteri or surface of the disc
7. of axis us in following.
except:
A. Making the patient use this location for function
B. Tracing its path for duplication
C. Making the casts in the same dynamiC relati on to each
other
D. Permitting to have ver tical dimension under our
control
8. Actual loc.tion of of robtion of condyles is
-;---cC "c::c:-- to loc. ted axis on the skin:
A. 10-13 mm, lateral B. 10-11 mm, medial
C. i3 mm, superior D. i3 mm, inferior
• •
, .
..
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
9. In nonnal denlititon, the , enlri c rdol tion , oincides
with:
A. Hinge axis
B. Cent ric occlusion
C. Maximum position
D. Terminal hinge axis
10. During recording hi nge axis, if the pati ent has
diffi cultyfpain in exuuting molndible, following un
be done:
A. Use a jig to Irain the patienl
B. Manually handl!.' the mandible
C. Use bite plane for some days
D. Either' A' and 'C'
11. The Split-US! technique of mounting usts u n
demonstrate discrepancy of about:
A. l/l00th of the inch
B. 1110th of the inch
c. l(lOOOth of the Inch
D. 1/ 10,000 of an inch
12. The writing apparatus () f the Hinge Axis Locollor can
be attached to pati ent's jaws using one of the
following. except:
A. Customized clutches·metal
B. Reference plales by ,Iuarl
C. PI"s!ic custom made clutches
D. Compound clutches
13. An oulwnd and downward Progru siv" Sid" Shift is
otherwi se call ed u:
A. Lateroretrusion
B. Lalerosurtrusion
C. Lalerodetrusion
D. Lalcrotrusion
• D 10 D 11 C 12 D 13 C
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
3221 Meas for PGs in Prosthodontics
24. Foliowing aN' for lingual bradng arm for an
used in di stal
except;
A. It should be in the same height as attachment
B. Should be carried around to opposi te proximal space
C. Should occupy only the occlusal 1/3rd of lingual
surface
D. It adds s tability to the prosthesis
25. Pin (CSP) s ys tem consists of
following.. except:
A. A «,mented and a removable section
B. Parallel·sided pi ns
C. Retention grooves
D. Occlusal rests
26. Following are true for Channel·Shoulder pin sys tem,
except;
A. Have lesser frictional area
o. Can be u,;.cd in areas where vertical lacking
C. Gives firm bracing acti on
D. Milling machine is not required
27. Foll owing statements ue true for semiprecision rests,
ex cept."
A. They have parallel sides
8. They have tapt'red sides
C. Bracing action is less
D. They may be carved in wax
28. In Semi preci sion Attachments following aN'
e_Tcept;
A. Lingual arm provides retent ion
B. Lingual arm provides bracing
C. The semiprecision rest provides bracing
D. They can be intracoronal
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
General Topic. r 323
29. Thompson Dowel system consists of following. except:
A. Intracoronal retainer
B. Retention through minor engaging
dimple on lingual aspe<:t
C. Retention through a minor connector engaging
buccal
D. Retaining dimple is in line with dowel
30. When constnu::ling iI Unililteral removilble bridge using
Precision Attachment, the male attachment can be joined
by il gold bar - are following. except:
A. Attachments are better retentive in acrylic
B. Processing changes that occur in acrylic will not
affect location of attachment
C. Will increase surface area for attachment of acrylic
D. Accidental breakage of acrylic is unlikely
31. Following statements are wrong for alignment of hinge
in a extracoronill iltlilchment, except:
A. Hinges do not wear with time
B. They must be aligned with sagittal plane
C. They must be aligned with edentulous ridge
D. They have to be aligned slightly twisted lingually
32. Following are tme for Dalbo Allchment, except:
A. They do not allow any play between male and
female sections of the attachment
B. They are available in two configurations
C. They provide resistance to rotational and lateral
displacing forces
D. No addi tional bulk
33. In a Dalbo system the verticill load Ciln be transferred
through any of the following, .. xapt:
A. Spring
B. Solid spacer
C. Reducing vertical space in female section
D. Bracing arms
HC JOC 310 32A 330
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
328 J Mea. lor PGsin Prosthodontics
56. Following statements ire true for direct transfer coping.
except:
A. [t has ,1 hollow transfer coping
B. Has a long cent ral screw
C. It within i mpression till is
poured
D. [t requi res impression materials with elastic p rO"-
perties
57. The force applied to the implanllo check ils mobility
is approximately:
A. 1000 B. 250 grams
C. 400 grams 0 .500 grams
58. Following are signs and symptoms of failure of <In
implanl, except:
A. Severe radiO"-opacity around the implant
B. Bone loss around omplant
C. Pain during percussion
D. Huril:untal mobility ;> 0.5 mm
59. Rr-5 in implantology is a:
A. Removable prosthesis completely support ed by
implants and / or teeth
B. Removable prosthesis CQmbining implant and soft
tissue support
C. Fixed/removabJe prosthesis that replaces natural
crowns and portion of soft tissues
D. Removable prosthesis that restores anatomic crowns
and portion of root of natural tooth
60. Following are true for Computed Tomography, tJecept:
A. [t was invented bv House
B. [t enabl es differentiation and quanti fication of both
hard and soft tissues
C. It is a digital and mathematical imaging tffhnique
D. Does not require .ny invasive tl'Chnique
SSD 57 D seA U8 so.
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
General Topic. r 331 ~
73. Disadvantage of D4 bone for implant placement are
following. except:
A. Has high amount of trabecular bone
B. Greater diameter hydroxyapat ite coated implants
are needed
C. Offers limited me<:hanical advantage
D. Difficult to obtain r i ~ i d fixation
74. Following are troe about Reverse Torque Testing.
except:
A. Involves placing revers.e torque on implants
B. Involves verification for rigid fixation of implants
C. May not be aff('(;ted by bone density and implant
design
D. It is most beneficial in less dens.e bone
75. Advantages of posterior single tooth restoration for
Implants are following, except:
A. Variable bone quali ty
B. Greater initial bone width
C. Thicker facial plate of bone
D. Non--t:ritical esthetics
76. Most idul posterior tooth to replace with an implant
is:
A. First molar
B. First premolar
C. 5e<:ond premolar
D. Second molar
77. Following are troe whil e replacing maxillary first
premolar with implants. except:
A. Canine may be angled d istally and roots curved
B. Verticill height limitations should be considered
C. It is placed more palatally to enhance esthetics
D. Occlusal contact is (YVef central fossa
13/1.. 1'C 15/1.. 168 TIC
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
334 j Meas for PGsin Prosthodontics
91. Following are factors to be considered for keepi ng the
implant screws tight:
A. Mi nimi«e clamping force
B. Maximize joint separating force
C. Implant placed with 20-30 N...:m torque
D. All of the abQvc
92. Following true for EsthetiCone for
except:
A. Made of titanium alloy
B. Have hexagonal base
C. Are tapered
D. Designed for screw-retainerl restorati ons
93. Cera One abutment:
A. Pure titanium
B. Screw-retainerl
C. For multiple restorations
D. All of the above are true
94. Onplanl is:
A. A surface adherent titanium disc
B. A type of Holl ow BlSkct implant
C. Embedded into bone
D. All of the above are true
95. First evidence of use of implanb dates back to
approximately:
A. 100 AD
B. 1000 AD
c. 600 AD
D. 1500 AD
96. Ramus blade endosseous implant was developed by:
A. Roberts and Robert s
B. Lee
C. Linkow
D. Goldberg
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
156. Cuspid-guided disclusion is iI requirement in splints
for:
A. Prevention of bruxism
B. Prevention of temporomandibular dysfunction
C. Both 'A' and '8'
D. Centric relation achievement
151. Freedom in (entrk is usenliil l in splints beuuse;
A. Patient has to disdude posterior teeth
B. Obtaining exact centric relation is not possible during
function disturbances
C. Patient has to masticate with splint
D. All of the above
158. Incisal table i8 not used for splint because;
A. Patients cannot masticate
B. It is difficuJtto adjust once mandible is refXlSitioned
after treatment
C. Mandibular incisors will not get entrapped behind
maxillary incisors
D. All of the above are true
159. Occlusal splint ciln be used as one of the following
tXCt pt;
A. Treatment of temporlmandibular joint dysfunction
B. Diagnostic device
C. To measure vertical dimension
O. Aid for registering centric relat ion for restorative
pu""""
160. Increase of vertical dimension during splint therapy
depends on following tXctpt:
A. Aggravated curve of spee
B. Presence of balancing interferences
C. Increase in high overjet
D. Presence of deep overbite
154i C 157 8 153 8 1St C 160 C
Printable Copy to DrEzaby
~ 352 J Meas for PGs in Prosthodontics
195. Bryron's detrrminants of a physiological occlusi on for
implants indudr s foll owing, except;
A. Acceptable inter ocdusal distance
B. Monoplane ocdusion
C. Bilateral contads in retruded closure
D. Freedom of contact movement
195 B

Printable Copy to DrEzaby
JPB RI . 2oo.oo

MEDICAL
EMCA House, 231238
Printable Copy to DrEzaby

MCQsfor PGs
In

PROSTHODONllCS

Vinaya 5 Bh~t BSc BOS MDS (Prostho) ONB Assistan t Professor

Department of Prosthodontics
Saveetru Denl31 CoI l"S" and Hoopibls

Chennai

JAYPEE BROTHERS
MEDICAL PUBLISHERS (P) LTD
New DII.hl

Printable Copy to DrEzaby

p"u_Oy

Ji ......... P Vii Joypee B,oth... M"'k:ol Publloh ... IP) Ltd Er.IC.o, HouH, 23J2JB ....... .; flood , [)'''f'I~nj N. .. Dolhl •• 0 002, l<><Ii. P _ •• - '9' ·' '·232121'3, '9'·' '·23212703, '91·' '·23.28202'. ' ~\·l '·23.2<5672 F.> , '9 H' ·2321""'110, '9'· ' ' ·2320_3 .... ~. :.>m,",pubClideI2."onl.fIe1 ,;" V;oil "'" W<l1>Sil0 _. ~_~' ..... o.com
~. 202_~8 K _~_ K _F'w\e .... ~ . ~OO'._:+9'-$)-~71 .

rM F ' 9'~'7lI' _ : ~"III_""'_n.!.I. ... Z$2 nk'd FlIxw. _ _ e _ Foo.oI .... ?Ioza
P.. _
Fa..
~n'I(S3. ..... , ... ,..

• 9 '-$)-~ .·91_' OO73

- . C.... eoo .g,...._2e2fI2:I.:I,""......,.,.-008, """"-' .g'-OO-232e:16M. •g'.o4--2e_r
8Nji _
~_
Hy<St<.I»d !<XI~ .
·9.-<OO-2' ~911

' - 2·'0&7I1~ . II1!'1oc><,

C.".. _ .
Fo:<:

:

_

·g,-M)~'OO20 ,

~

_ _ 1lOfI\

+0'-<00-201580911

_

,.0, ....,." t.OO>O< s_, w"""""",, s.,u.... KoIkoto 700 0'3. I'h>no, +9'-33--2<'4S'92e F..,

: iI>Ix:aIOCOO ...... ,.......

'0& """'......e' 0, SS R-., _ . N.... MGM ........... PoroI. lh"","I O<lOO' 2._ ·g. - n - 24'~ .... -n-2",04Sl2. + ~' -22-301l_ F... +9'-22-2• • $O$2e .,.......; ~"""'7."" . "', "

e._,

+ 9'-33--n.~'s

AlrignIo_. No""rt"" .... ~_boo~._
~"'

O f ... " , __ In .. ytomoOf"_'--O:_~~~ _ _ _ _ 01"' _ _ 1 n o _
T... _ ....

. _..,. . .,.
.. _

10 <><VnoI. eII<>1lo'- '" - . . . """"""'" 01 l>u11no _ . primo<...., _ "'''''''' _ _ _ for''y _ _ '~In"",,OI_dopuIo . ''1o\IOI man.. "' .. _ . - Doit"j ~ oN'y

e..,

_~

.. IJO""_an<I _ _ ...

ma_.

...-~

Printable Copy to DrEzaby

... 317 (Full Mouth Rfhabililation............ 0111............ 213 Gentral Topi cs . 35J Printable Copy to DrEzaby ......••••••••••••• 1O:Z Sec t jo n Thr t't' Complete Denture Prosthodontics ................•••.•••.............. M axillofacial Sterian four..... Prosthodontics...............Contents 51'............ M clion Twg: Prosthodontics •............•••••••......... 1 Removable partial 0 .. Misce/lllnt'Ous) Bibliognlphy •.. Imp/antology........•.......................•....tioll On t: Fixed Partial Denture Proslhodonlics . Prtciskm AIII/ehmen/s...

Printable Copy to DrEzaby .

Epilepsy D. Just posterior to the auricular tragi B. In deciding the treatmen t methodology B. Anterior to the a uricular tragi.lCcural e me d ical his to ry helps: A." " Printable Copy to DrEzaby . Pregnancy 3. Eroded teeth are ~ common si gn of followin g conditions except: A. Anorex ia nervosa 4. Diabetes C. Hiiltal hernia C. An . Bulimia D. Following are systemic conditions that affect the pfriodontium exupt: A. while patient opens and doses the mand ible D . Just antl'rior to the a uricular tragi C.Section One Fixed Partial Denture Prosthodontics 1. Posterior to the auricular tragi while patient opens and doses the mandible . In assessing the oral manifestations D . AIDS B. In identifying the possible risk factors to denia l facul ty C. Temporomandibulu jo int ca n be located by paipa tins : A. In all of the abQve 2. MP!JS B.

1MJ examination D . The dark sp~ce visible between m. Trea tme nt planning B. Auri cular palpation with light anterior pressures helps determine potential disorder in the: A. Solberg-Krogh-Pouls e n and Olssen described: A. Width of the alveolar proct"Ss B. Length of the alveolar process C. Smile anillys is help5 in: A. Capsular ligament D. Periodontal considera tions 9. Poste rior a tta chme nt of the dis k 6. Middle attachment of the disk C. Anterior attach men t of the dis k B. is called as: A. Negative space D . 10 mm B. Margin place ment of crowns C. Corridor space B. li p examina tion 8.u:illary and mandibular teeth when patient laughs. 15 mm C. Length of the up pe r lip D . Both ' A' and 'B' D . Mobility of the upper li p 10. 20 mm 7. 12 mm D. lateral utent of smile depends on following except: A. Smile analySiS B. li ngual space C.m MeQs for PGs In Prosthodontics S. Comprehensive muscle palpation C. Donders space " 9 A 10 C Printable Copy to DrEzaby . Maximum lateral movement of mandible is: A.

Cen tric relation 8. Sudden change in attachment level D. Crepitus D.Fixed Partial Denture Prosthodontics m 11. B.butm ent selection. Keratinized C. Clicking 14. D. Slide in centric 15. Depth of the periodontal pocket B. Occlusal conl3cts in eccentric movement B. Fremitus C. Tooth contact during lateral excu rsions 11 D 12 D 13 A I' C 15 D " D Printable Copy to DrEzaby . Migration D . Present in most of the natural dentition Abno rmal in natural dentition Has a vertical and a horizontal component Both 'A' and 'C' are correct 16. Depth of the gingival sulcus C. th e gingiva s hould be: A. Periodontal mobility B. Tightly bound D. " Walkin g" ci rcumferenli ally through gingival sulcus dete rmines: A. Overcrowding C. In tucus pal position ha~ been earlier referred 10 as: A. freml lus ind icales: A. Sharply pointed at the interdental area 8 . All of the above 12. Mylu s trip un be used to detect: A. C. Slid e in ce nlric is: A. AI! of the above 13. Eccentric relation C. For a good . Centric occlusion D .

Jaw can be guided through hinge closure easily C. Mounted cas ts: A. D. V ila lily te s tin g can be done us ing one of the fo ll ow in g exce. C. Determine the static relationship of the teeth B. Afferent nerve su ppl y D . Determine the dynamic re lationship of teeth C. 20. Effe rent nerve supply B. Patient moves the jaw with ease B.': A. Revea l occlusion not detectable in the mouth D. Jaw maneu ve rabili ty is di fficult Panor~mic A. B.alit y tes ts determine only: A . Type and complexi ty of treatmen t needs B. P~noramic A. Vi t. Th(>rmal stimulation D . In the presence of protective refiens: A.m 18. MeQs lor PGs In Prosthodontics 17.. Stethoscope C. Articulator selection depends on the following except: A. C. films are n()t sa ti sfactory f()r: Assessing bone support Root morphology Caries All of the above film s are espu ially useful in assessing: Buried root tips Impacted third molOlcs Bone prior to implant placement All of the above 19. Operator's skill s C. CNS 22. Do all of the above 23. Electrical s timulation B. Percussion 21 . Blood s upply C. Masticatory func tion can be easily assessed D . D. Demands for procedural accuracy D . B. General expediency 170 liD 190 20 B 2tC 220 23 B Printable Copy to DrEzaby .

Mechanical fossa is related to the maxilla B. D. C. 3 mrn 28.mce betwccn hinge of thc articu lator and the tooth being restored B. A. of erro r for an arbitrary filce bow in reco rding the axis is: A. 10 mm B. Arcon is: A .. B. True for all of the above s ta tem('n ts 26.. Discrepancy in the path of closures of the articulato r and mouth D. Condylar path is fixed rel ative to the occlusal plane D ... C. Centric jaw relation Orienta tion rela tion Hinge axis Both 'B' and 'C' 27. premature contacts in occlusion (l(cur du e 10: A. 2 mrn C. cord~: A.. To facilitate easy pla(ement of th e (ash Because lips are more accura te than fossa Both' A' and '8' To prevent damage to the natura l tee th 240 250 250 21C HC Printable Copy to DrEzaby . In hinge articulators..FIx-eel Partial Denture Prosthodontics IT] 24. bow r. 5 mm D. Morc distance between hinge and the tooth being restored . C. D. O nly cusp tips an rn orded in the recordi ng m . Vilu .. dium (or fae . less dist. A Fae. ARticulator and CONdyle C. B.. Both ' A' and 'C' 25. bo w tran s f.

Following are methods to deprogramme mandiblt' except: A. Denar articulator usn following anterior reference point: A. 10 minutes C. Quick mount face bow B. Anterior programming device mus t be in plact' for at B. Spring face bow C. Mark 43 mm superior to incisal edge of mandibular central incisor 30. Aluwa x C. Plastic leaf gauge D. Following are materials used for inlero<. Polyvinyl siIoxane B. Slidematic face bow D. Orbitale C. Colton rolls C. Twirl bow 31. Verticulator Printable Copy to DrEzaby . CR record least: A. 30 minutes B.05 minutes 33. Using thin articulatin g film B.m MeOslor PGsin Prosthodontics 29. Lucia Jig 32. Denar face now is caUed as: A. Baseplate wax D . By means of split cast mounting C. Ala of the nose B. Mark 43 mm superior to incisal edge of maxillary central incisor D . Irreversible hydroco lloid 34. 60 minutes D .dusal records except: A. Following methods are used to check corred mounting except one: A. With Dena r veriche<:k D .

All of the above 38. Prevent future disease D. ~t('rmines border movements of the mand ible C. Identification of patient's nccds B. Average value for immediate side shift is: A. 7mm B. Custom acrylic anterior guidance table can be used to determine: A.1 mm 37.Fixed Partial Denture Prosthodontics 35. Lingual con tour of the ant(' rior teet h C. A. Treatmrnt objec tiv es ue following except: A. C. Helps in orienting th(' maxilla B. B. Accurate con tact of ante rior teeth B. Each side shift Condyla r inclina tion on one side C(' nt ric rdation Condylar inclination on both sides 36. Panadent quick analysrr detrrminn: A. Determines the refer('nce plane 39. Side shift of the mandible C. Both' A' an d ' 8 ' 40. 0. Occlusal plane of the dentition O. 10 rum 0. Determines arc of opening of mandible D. Influence of anterior tccth on borde r movemen t of mandible D. o. 1 mm C. Condylar pa th inclination B. Anterior guidance diffel1'l fro m anterior refe rrnce point in that it. Protrusive records ue used to adjust: m A. Corre<:t existing disea~ C. Restore function and esthetics Printable Copy to DrEzaby .

Clic king noise O. Do not have sufficient r{'lenlion B. IncreaSing the taper of the preparation C. 00 not have sufficient res istance C. Bo th 'A' and 'B' are co rrect O.m Measlor POsln Prosthodontics 41 . Making labial margins in porcelain 46. Not {'nough tooth s tructur{' B. Esthetic5 nn be enhanced by followi n g met hods ewept: A. Inla y is con lra indiute d in highly weakened tooth brcausr: A. To gain more re s is tan ce ~nd retention. Box B. Require minimal tOQth reduction 44. Sup p ort and r{'tention is no t obtained for the restoration D . Offse t 45. R{'maining too th dot's not resist wedgi ng effect C. RJdiculJr ret aine r 42. Partial veneer crown B.mina tes C. All o f the above 43. Subgingival finish margins O . L. Grooves O. Discolora tion C. Full veneer c!Own D. Problems with resi n -veneered restorations are follow ing ucept: A. following modifications can be Olad~ in prrpar~lion for full veneer crown except: A. Inl~ ys ue not s uitable for retainers for fixed putlal denturu becaus e they: A. Following ue extracoronal restorations except one: A. Sufficient tooth reduc tion B. Pinholes C. Ab ra Sion and wear B. Weak p hysical p roperties 41 C 420 43C 44D 4S8 48C Printable Copy to DrEzaby .

Feldspar 49. Ca ntile vH fixed partial denture is not indicated as: A. Supraerupt B. La ck. Following substances ca n be used to . Width of the normal gingiva va ries from: A. Irenglhen ce ramic except: A. th e Fi xe d partial denture will: A. Leas l preferred m ode of management of tilted abutment is: A. Become mobile D . Zirconia B. Prognosis is poor on long-term C. Orthodon tic uprighting B. Non. Laterally drift C. It will induce la teral forces on periodontal ligament D . Get d islodged 50. of streng th B. Hi ghly complicated procedure D . 2-3 mm B. 15-20 mm 41 D 48 D 49 B 50 D 51 0 S2 B Printable Copy to DrEzaby .Fixed Partial Denlure Prosthodontics m 41. Good es thetics 48. Lcuci te crystals D. It cannot tole ra te forces acting o n it B. Alumina C. 10-12 mm 0. Extraction 52.rigid connector D . When a weaker abutment is not s plinted to the adj ac ent stronger toot h in a fi xed partial d en ture. Difficulty in marginal fit C. Problems with all-ceramic restoration ue following except: A. All above arc true 51. Mesial half crown C. \-9 mm C.

Denloperiosteal fibers D. Syn thesis and resorp tion D . Periosteum and alveolar mucosa 54. Between free marginal gingiva and free gingival groove B. Mucogingival junction C. The junction of free marginal gi ngiva and attached gingiva B. Both 'B' and 'C' ace true 56. Alveolar mucosa and mu cogingival junction C. Mu cogingival junction st!'paratt!'s: A. Col is th e area of g in g iva: A. Periosteum and muoogingival junction 57. Atta cht!'d gin giva is thl!' t!'X tt!'ns ion bt!'twt!'t!'n: A. Consisting of a buccal and lingua l com ponen t . Epithelial allachment and mucogingival junction B. Dentogingival fibers C. Transition from k t!'ratin ized to smooth non-ke ratinized mucosa occ urs at: A. Junctional epithelium and sulcular epi thelium C. C. Following are functions of pe ri odontium: A. All of the above 53A 548 550 56A 510 580 Printable Copy to DrEzaby . N utr ition and mechanorecep tion C.R Meas for PGs In Prosthodontics 53. Attachment and support for the tooth B. The junction of ma rginal gingiva and free marginal g roove D . G ing ivoden tal li gamt!'nt co nsists of: A. Gi ngiva a nd al veolar mu cosa B. Free marginal gingiva and free gi ngiva l groove D. Alveologingival fibers B. All of the ab-ove 58. That occupies a rea b<! tween adjacent teeth D. Ma rginal gingiva and allached gingiva D. The biological width 55.

Synthetic cell in collagen is: A. DcntogingivalJunction (OGH D. Mucogi ngival Junelion (MGn B. Nerves and blood vesscls supplying the tooth 60.FiltH Partial DanttJre Prostnodonti« m 59. Alveola r crest fibers C. Apical fibers C. The junctI on between bast of the gingiu and the tooth is called: A. Epithelial rest 64. Coronal fibers D. Cementum C. Sharpey's fibers 8. Cementogingival Junction (CGJ) C. Cementoblast C. Most numerou s fibers in periodontal ligament are: A. Periosteum D. ' A' and '8' are true 62. AlveologingivalJunction (AGJ) 500 SOC 610 aze 638 64C Printable Copy to DrEzaby . Apical fibers 61. Apical to epi thelial attachment B. Fibroblast D. Alveolar crest fibers lie: A. Following structures are part of the periodontium exupt: A. Oblique fibers D. Megaloblast periodont~ 1 ]jgamentlh~1 produces B. Horizontal fibers B. Tra ns-scptal fibers B. Trans-septal fibers 63. Following is part of thl'" periodontal ligament uupt one: A. Between cementum and alveolar crest D. Coronal to epithelial attachment C.

Cram-positive microbes B. Basa l cells of junctional epi thelium begin to proliferate &5D Me 67D ~D "A 708 Printable Copy to DrEzaby . Gingivitis gets transformed into pHiodontitis when: A.3 mm 67. Aerobic plaque gets transformed to anaerobic B. 1. De ntogingival Junction is mid e up of: A. Calcium and phospha te ions D . Microorganisms B. Loss of conne<:tive tissue occurs C. 'A' and 'C' 66.M Meas forPG. Hemidesmosomes C. 65. Avuage depth of gingiva l sulcus in hulthy individUil I is: A.8 mm D. Leucocytes D. Basal Lamina B. E:dracellu l ~r matrix in plaque is made up of following I'XUpt: A. Filamentous organisms 70. 3mm B. All of the above 68. Mituia ilbi consis ts Clf: A. Attumulation of inflammatory cells occurs O . Cram-negative mic. AnnTob ic popul~tion of plaque consists mostly of follo win g except: A. Spirochetes D. Protein C. 5 mm C. Macrophages 69.ln Prosthodontlc.robes C. 1. Chromosomes D. Carbohydrates B. Dead epithelial cells C.

If the tooth is hopeless and e>. Following nn ca us~ gingiul irritation except: A. Splinting with etched cast r('storation C. Disclosing ~g~nt for A . All of th(' above 75. Absence of inflammation C.traction C. E>. Cobal t dye D. As it flattens.traction D. Overhanging restoration 8. Alizarin-S B. The squeaking noiSe it makes can be used as guide C. Accurate loca tio n of mucogingival junction in relation 10 tooth D . All of the abov(' 76. Minimum probing depth of sulcus B. 'So unding' th~ periodontium dftfrmin~s: n~ds A. Ferrous sulfate plaqu~ con t~ins : 73. all the fibers are utilized for flossing D. If the tooth can serv(' as abutm('nt D. If the periodontium is sound B. Soft tissu~ r~sponses to i nili~1 p~rjodonlal therapy are: A . Heavy occlus"l force on restora tion D. Some periodontally in volved A .:"t C. Erythrosin dye C.Fixed Partial Denture prO'thodontiC ' @ 71. It is smaller in diameter 8. All of thE' above 72. AU of th(' above 110 n8 13C 740 150 TtO Printable Copy to DrEzaby . Unw<lX~d floss is b rU~r th~n w<lX~d flo ss bec~use: A. Splinting with provisionals t~dh m~y require: B. Open proximal cont. FQOd impaction 74.

A. 1 mm B. 5mm C. Keratinized gingiva B. 3 mm C. Fib rous gingiva D. Ca rranza 78. l. An abutmen t mu s t have at teas t _ _ _ of attached gingiva: A. I mm 0 . Fo it owing are types of mucosal reparative therapy e. " • Printable Copy to DrEzaby . Ele<:trosurgery B. Removal of bone by surgery D. Tooth modification by root resection n . positioned pedicle graft C. Is a surgical grafting procedure C. ..oe and Silne5s C. " . Includes all of thE' above 80.2 mm 83. Dr ev Black B. PrOCfd u rf of gingivfctomy was introducfd by: A." . 3 mm D. Induc tion of bone form3tion C. Free au togenous gra ft B."""pt : A. Coronally positioned pedide graft D . Amount of keratinized mu cou present shou ld be approximatel y: A.m Meas for PGs In Prosthodontics 77. Ramfjord and Ash D. Suprabony pockets C.1te ra ll ). Mucosal reparative therapy: A. Gingivectomy can be done fo r foll owing except: A . 2 mm 82. Infrabony poeke t 79. 5mm B. L. Gingivectomy 8>. Root furcation therilpy in cludes foll owing except. Is done to increaSl' width of thE' keratinized gingiva B. Indudes free autogenous gingival gr~ft D . '" '" .

Elimination of excessive s u kular depth D. 2·3 months 89. Ceramic 85. :> 1. Osseous recontouring is aimed at: A. Normal position of oss eous cres t is apical to cementoenamel junctioll by: A. Cartilage C.5mm C. Ramping criller d efects D. Determining width of lesion C. Leveling interp roximal lesions B. Materials used to fill osseous defects include: m A. 5mm 90.Fixed Partial Denture Prosthodontles 84. :> 3 mm B. Prior to surgery. All o f the above Osseous recontouring CiUl be accomplished by: A. Sound osseous base for gingiva B. 4mm 0. 3mm H. Sclera D.igning the incision O. in class 1 fUr(alion. <3mm O. <lmm 84D ~o 860 8TO ue 8iB ~e Printable Copy to DrEzaby . vertical loss of pC'riodontal support apical to cementOf!namel junction is: A. [)(os. All of the above 87.I . 4--6 weeks B. Elimination of pocket C. 4--6 months C. Thinning bony ledges C. All of the above 88. All of the above 86. Final tissue maturation and s ulcus reformation dter s urgery. takn about: A. Determining depth of lesion B. 6--12 months D . B.3 mm C. 'So unding' of bone helps In: A .

Following roots li e in th e same plane. Decreased general loss of osseous support 9t D 92B 93 A MD 9S A M e Printable Copy to DrEzaby . Distobuccal and the ex tra root when present 94. Furca is ~netrable > 1 mm horizonta lly C. Distal furcation A. lor PG. in a maxillary molar: A. Inc reased crown / root ratio B. All of the above are true 92. Done in class II and class UI furcation involvements D. Following cond iti o ns ar e contraindicated for root amputatio n except: A. Done on tooth with long divergent roots B. In ~ maxillary molar. Mesiobuccal and palatal C. Furca docs not e><lend through and through D. Creating a through a nd through defe<:t C. Intern a l resorption C. Lingua l (urcation D . 91 . All of the above 95. Tunneling is: A. Inability to treat endodontically C. Bucca l furca tion 93. Distobuccal and palatal B. Ind ication s for root ampublion include following except one: A.m Mea. Mes iobuccal and distobucca l D . Osseous loss is ev iden t on radiograph B.ln PrO$lhodonlic. the following {un:ation is more apical th~n the other: B. External resorption D. Mesial furca tion C. Severe caries D. Closely approximated or fused roots B. Furcation involvement not treatable 96. In class II furcalion involvement: A.

ment C. Residual alveolar bone B.Fixed Partial Denture Prolt. Prognosis in Filted Partial Dentures depends on: A. D. Occlusion . Tooth mobility C. Regaining lost at tach. Resto ring roolS as ind ividual tooth B. Allows cells from gingival connective tissue to contact root s urface D. Covering the en ti re rool su rface D . Increase of vestibular depth C. Selective repopulation B. Eltt raction 99. Below cementoenamel junction C. Restoration of thc premolar B. Amalgam placed in roots and occlusion adjusted D. The G uid ed T iss ue Regeneralion membrane is us ually placed: A. At cementoenamel junction B. Rem Ovi ng soft tissue distal to molars D. Restora tion of each half of molar after hemisection C. Alteration of muscle at tachment B. 'A' and 'C' are correct 102. Guided Tissue Regeneratio n ~ims at following except: A. Creating space over root surface 100. Any o r all of the above 17 B M 0 "C 100 0 101 A 102 D Printable Copy to DrEzaby .h odontici [17'] 97. All of the above 101. Electi ve solt ti ss ue s urge ry includes following: A.Hf' following nap t: A. Sepa ration of roots orthodon ticall y 98. Cutting and removal of onc root from mo lar D . Tooth usetl for abu tment C. Common typf'S of 'rutmf'n t for toolh with rf'Sf'ctf'd rools . Bicuspidiution reff'fS to: A.

'Itorati on: A. Limit the ex tent of outline form 108. 'A' and 'C' are correct 104. Following art! trut! for cort! rt!storations exupt: A. Mate rial of choice for cort! when crown prt!paratio n will not ntend more thin 1 mm bt!yond core-tooth junction is: A. An extensively damage d tooth should b e ruto re d with: A. Composite C. Composite core C. Extent of tooth destruction B. Glass iono me r core 107. Availability C. Pin retained cast metal core D. Overall treatment p lan O . Helps resisting conde nsa tion fo r<:es o f amalgam B. Founda tion restoration D . Partial veneer A. Glass ionomer B. Amalgam D .m Meas for PGsin Prosthodontics 103. Acu te cavosurface ma rgins are acceptable C. Zinc polycarboxyIate 106. All of the above 103 D 1~ B 105 C 106 C 107 '" loa 0 Printable Copy to DrEzaby . Ope rator prefe rence 105. Core C. Rt!. Amalgam core B. Preserv ing un s u pported t!namel for cort! rt!. Facili tates amalgam condensation D .'I toration us ed to b ui ld up a damagt!d tooth to idul anatomi c fonn prior to p uparin g for crown is known u: B. Series o f s tep s perpend icular to occlusal fo rces increase resis tance form D . Selection of core materia l depends o n following except: A. Unsupported ename l has to be eliminated B. Hetps placement of ma trix C.

It is not subj~ted to high stress D.1 mm C. In pin-retained-cast. Orthodon tic bands C.. Placement of pins for core resto ration is different from co nventional amalgam res toration.core. Prevent pin fracture C. It will conse rve the toot h struc ture B. 'S' and 'C' are co rrect 112. Cop per bands B. Pilot holes for pin restorations are: A. 11 0 0 111 0 112 C tt3 C tt4 C Printable Copy to DrEzaby . All of the above 111 . 0..5mm 109 .Fixed Partial Denture Prosthodont~ DO 109. Preferred matrix retainer for core build up is followillg except: A. Automatrix 113. For bet ter fin ish margin 114. Acut e cavosurface margin for (ore rnlou tion is acce ptable because: A. 1 nun B. Tofflemire D. They should be placed further pulpally C. Cavosurface margin for core restoralion (a n be: A. They should be posi tioned at a sligh t angle to the long Jxis of tooth D. 2mm D. 90° C. a countersink is created al the gingival floor nea r the pinhole to: A. Aid both 'A' and '6' D. 45-135 0 B. 180-190" 110. It will help in condensation of amalgam C. 9Q. They should be placed more supe rficially B.1OO" D. in thai: A. Fadlitate d efed-free die B.

3 mm C. Obtaini ng some leeway in paralleling the holes B. Heated needle D . Tunnelling kit D . Us ually maximum th ic kness of free autogenous g ingival grdt us ed for increas ing width of attached g ingiva is: A. following kit be used: A. When the buccal cusps a rc fractu red D . 3 mm C. 2 nun B. 5 mm A. <1 mm 115 0 116 C 117 8 118 A ' " C 120 e Printable Copy to DrEzaby . 1 nun 119. Retention D . Pulp tester 117. Ice pencil B. To remove the broken post. Following are indications for elective endodontics can except: A. Tapered pins are beller for: A.G MCQs for PGs In Prosthodontics 115. Gutta-percha C. P~raposl kit 118. Masserann ki t C. Following tests c~n be used to uamine vitality of a tooth except: A. In difficulty ob taining s ame p a th of inse rtion in multiple abutmen ts B. When additiona l preparation is likely to jeopardize longevi ty of tooth 120. Automatrix B. Api cal s e~l that must be ret~in e d for post and core res toration mu s t be at leut: B. 1 mm D. Strength C. Badl y d~m~ged tooth C. 7 mm D. 'A' and 'B' 11 6.

Improves axial alignment 126.' taken prior 10 extruding anterior too th except: A. When restoration may impinge on biologic width 124. Following are usual cons idl. Orthodontic'p('riodontics D . Restores biologic w id th B. A diagnostic waxing procedure t2t A 122 0 123 C t24 D t25 A 126 B Printable Copy to DrEzaby . Amount of labial bone B. Hard palat(' B. Retains its vas.'ning ca n bl. P('riodonlics B.'ngthl.'s except: A.cularity B. To improve appearance in anterior tooth C. Endodon tics 125.'d ufl.'fations to bl. E5thetics D . C rown lengthening procedur e is indicated in following sit ua tions ~xcept: A. Minor orthod on t ic movemen t ha s following adunt. Occlusion C. Clinical crown too short B. Directs occl usal forces along long a xis C. Vestibular depth 123. Favorable pon tic spaces D .' us in g followin g procl. Iktromolar pad D .ges except: A. Surgical C. Edentulous ridg(' C.' don I. C rown ll. In limited osseous support D . Attachment of graft with root is usually epithelial D.Fixed Partial Denture Prosthodontics rn--] 121. Som('limes donor sit(' uncovers bony fenestrations 122. Recession at donor site C. L im it~tions of laterally pos it ioned pedicle grafts are following uupt: A. Usual donor situ for free autogenou s gnft are following except: A.

Chronic bruxer C. Mesial inclines of ma~illary teeth B.. following inclines are adjusted: A. In a la terall y displacing prema turit y. An terior open bi te D. Elimination of group function in terference 130. protrusive interference is seen on: A. Makin g iCP = CR C. Late rally to the left 132. Lingual facing inclines of mandibular teeth B. 'A' and 'C' aTe adj us ted 127 D 128 A 129 D 130 D 131 C 132 D Printable Copy to DrEzaby . Posteriorly B. Both 'A ' and 'B' 131. Palatal facing inclines of maxillary teeth C. Anteri orly D . Laterally to the right C. ps except: A. Removal of e<:centric interferences B.. Elimination of occlusal dysfunction D .m Meal lor PGs In Prosthodontics 127. Reorganizing occlus ion prior 10 proslhodont ic management relales to: A. Angles class III 129. Mesial inclines of mandibu la r teeth D. Occl usal adjuslm . During a s lide in cen tri c. Tooth malalignme nt B. nt is done in following sl. During a protrusive interference at the teeth. Following are contraindications to oc:clusal adjustment txupt: A. Elimination of protrusive in terference B. condyle gets d isp laced: A. Elimination of la teral in terference C. Elimination of centric relalion interference D. Distal inclines of mandibular teeth C. Buccal facing inclines of maXilla ry teeth D . All of the above 128.

Eliminating cen tric con tacts C.Fixed Partial Denture Prosthodontics [2i] 133. Second phase of occl usal adju stment concentrates on follow ing except: A . Eli minate interference on non-working side D. A ll of the above 138. Mediotrusion C. Poor bone support for canine C. Laterotrusion B. Eli minate inte rferen ce on working side C. Second phase occlusal "djus-Im enl consis ts of: A. Eliminating la\{'ral an d protrusive interference D . If th e lalerally di s placing prematuril y o ccurs on ia terotru si ve sid e (lilteral slide). Bucral indine of maxillary buccal cusps B. Both ' A ' and 'B' D. adjus t: A. d o th e follow ing adjus tment: A. Eliminate protrusive contacts on posterior tee th B. Mobili ty of canine is presen t B. Lingual inclines of maxillary lingual cusps 134. Centric rela tion D. Buccal incline of mandibular buccal cusps C. Lingual incline of maxillary lingual cusps D. Wear of the ca nine D . Lingua l indi nes of mandibular bucral cusp C. Bucral inclines of ma xillary lingual cusp B. Protrusion 136. If laterally di s placing prematu rity occ urs on m ediotrusive s id e of mandibl e. All of the above 137. Both 'A' and 'C' 133 C 134 8 135 C 138 0 131 D 138 0 Printable Copy to DrEzaby . Goals of second phase occlusal adju s tment are: A . G roup Function occlus ion is consid ered whe n: A. Creating a groove for centrk (USp B. Lingual indine of mandibular lingual cusps 135.

2-3 mm 144. 4-5 nun B. 2-3 mm 143 B 144 A Printable Copy to DrEzaby . Use of metal matrix band C. Irrfversible pulpitis c~n occur due to: A. Whilf a tooth is being redu ced to receive a full veneer crown. Mouth mirror B. Del(>rmines Ihecuspshapc and angle of hinge rotation 140. AI! of the above 141. AI! of the above 142. uave a slight fin of enamel o n proximal B. Has two condylar tables D. the soft ti ss ues can be protected by us in g: A . Microorgan isms D. Aspi rator lip D. 3-4 mm 0 . Chemical irritation C.M Meas lor PGs in Prosthodontics 139. While prepari ng the tooth . the adja cent tooth can be prese rved in the following method s: A. Using a thin tapered diamond D. Following are true for Twill-T~ble t~hnique use d for occlusal rehabilitation. 3-4 mm 13g C 140 D 141 D 142 D B. 6-6. 6-7 mm D. Flanged saliva ejec tor C. Extre me temperature B.5 mm C. Average distance of pulp horns in a maxillary central incisor of a 10-20 rurs old patient is in the range of: A. Has two incisal tables C. except: A. 4-5 nun C. One or all of Ihe above 143. AVfrage di stallce of pulp horns in a maxillary ce ntral incisor of a 50-60 yurs old patient is in the range of: A. Is used for developing molar di sdusion B.

B. One of the above or all 146. One o r all of the above 147. Removing debris C. Cervical ca ries B. re reuo ns for subgingiul preparation rxc:ept: A. Preventing desic.. B.sting fit to within: A. Advantage of supragingival finish margin is: Easy to prepare and easy to finish Can be kept clean and maintenance is easy Impressions are easy All of the above 149.::ation of dentin D. IS" C.. 50 microns D. D. During tooth preparation. Esthetics C.Fixed Partial Denture Pr015thodontlcs ~ 145. 25-40 microns Printable Copy to DrEzaby .3" 148. Reducing temperature B. A skilled technician can make a c. lly by: A. Condition of cutting instrument D. C. Following . Excessive pressure B. Long axis of the mandibular premolu is indined lingu. Higher rotJlional speeds C. During tooth prepuation. water spr. In the presence of root sensitivity ISO.. 10 microns C. When sufficient retention is available D. 9" A. y is useful for: A. 25" D. temperature ma y rise due to following ruson: A. 20 microns B.

Stepped c. Maryland bridges 156.!rid lingual m. Chisel edge B. Disad vantilge of feather edge fin is h margin includes: A.elilin fused metal mugins fit to within: A. Lingual margin of all-<:e ramic restorations C. Less conservative tooth structu re D. 20 microns B. Fnt he r-ed ge mugin is otherwise cilled as: A. A. Chamfe r finish margin is indicated in: A.iln milke a por. Lingual margin of porcelain-fused -to-metal restoration D. Shoulder with bevel 154.ln Prosthodontics 1S1. Smooth B. Even D .m Mea. lor PG. 0 1~5 C 158 D Printable Copy to DrEzaby . 10 microns C. Shoulder edge C.co nfiguration: A. Lead 10 over contour in restoration C. Shoulder less D. No bulk at margin B. Partial veneer crowns B. Smooth and even 153. 30 microns 152. Laminates D. Long Chamhr finish marg in is usuall y give n for. A well designed finish mugin s hou ld have c-~--cc-. A s killed te. All-metal crowns B. Full veneer crowns C. hnidan .1rgin of porcelainfused-la-metal crowns 151 C 15~ 0 153 C 15. SO microns D. Both 'A' and 'B' 155. All-metal crowns .

Removes unsupported enamel D. Full veneer crown 151 0 158 0 1St B no c 18 1 D 182 B Printable Copy to DrEzaby . Among the cas t restoration s. Minimizes marginal discrepancy C. Caries occurring on margin B. Previous restoration leading to a led ge at ma rgin D. met~1 nown with shoulder prep~ration di storts Ius co mpared to a nown with chamfer margins bec~ u se' A. Of butt joint at the cervical margin D. 180 degrees B. 150 degrees 0 . A heavy chamfer 161. Sloped shouldu is: A. Of sharp corner at the ce rvical margin 160. Partial veneer crown D. During porcelain firing . 110 degrees C. A shoulder finish margin B. Does all of the above 159. One o r all of the above may be p rescnt ISS. A bevel margin is indicated when: A. Gives beller metal fin ish B.120 degrees "In be 162.Fixed Partial Denture Prosthodontles tv'] 157. Onlay B. A sloped shoulder margin D. Inlay C. Amount o f un s upported en~mtl at mugins redu ced by: A. Of additional bul k at the shoulder C. A chamfer margin C. th e following hn greatH potenti~1 to cause too th fraclure: A. Of rounded nature of the finish line B. Beveling: A. Cervical e roSion at margin C.

for PG. 100 microns D. Co mpressive stress to offer retention: B. ISO microns 163 8 164 8 165 0 1&6 C 167 B Printable Copy to DrEzaby . Increasing frictional resistance C. Following ar~ faclors that aid in direct retention of a complete ciI$t crown I'xc«pt: A. Ferrule effecl offered by the tooth D . the putide size of alumina used is: A. Th e ce ments used for cementation of crown s should be und e r A. In analytical mechanics. Flexural 167. Mesial and distal grooves C. Lu ting cement D . Shear D . 2SO microns B. in Prosthodontics 163. Z inc phos phale cements act by: A. Relation be twce n two cylindrical sur faces with single path of movemen t be tween them 166.m Mea. Ad hesion B. Con tacting the tooth D. Increasing the fi lm thic kness 165. Taper of thc prcpara tion B. For in crusing roughness of fitting surface of casting. Nea r parallel prepara tion 164. Tensile C. 50 mic rons C. Retention by an und (>rcu t C. closed lowe r pair of kinematic e lements refe rs to: A. Lever of III order B.

Zinc polyca rbOl(ylate 170. Rtsis ting area in . Resin cements D .. it is us ually s t tn: A. Shear s tress B. Lingual axial wall B. Buccal axial wall D. Tens ion C. Proxima! half 171. Areas on tooth resi s ting late ral forces ut us ually under: A.Fixed Par1lal Denture Prosthodontics Ci9""] 168. Glass ionamer B. Ductile st ress In. Occlusal third B. full veneer crown tooth preparation is: A. Magnitudt of forces B. Compression D. lateral forcts on il ( rown havt dis placing tfftct with a fulcrum of rota tion o n : A. Within metal casting 169. Cusp tip C. Between cement and tooth surface B. Din'dion of fo'rees C. Distal a xial w all In C In C 110 C 111 II 17t 0 173 C Printable Copy to DrEzaby . Zinc phosphate C. Following ( ement hu th e mal(imum adh u ion to tht tooth: A. All of the above 173. Ptoperties of luting agent D. Between cemtnt and cas ting D. Whtn ctmtntation failurt occ urs. Within ceme nt itsdf C. Mesia l axia l wall C. Gingival ma rgin D. R esist~ne e de pe nds on fo llowing: A.

B. Rounding of axial angles C. resis tan ce is increased by givi ng: A. Strength d«:reases by 500/. All of the above 175. Strength decreases by 8O'YG D. Flared bOlles D. 10 MPa at 24 hours C. Strength increases by 80% 174 0 175 0 178 0 177 C 178 C Printable Copy to DrEzaby . Axis of rotation in a partia l veneer c rown is loca ted at: A. Following is ty pe of tooth prepH<1 tion which . C.M Meal for PGlln Proithodontlci 174. One or all of the above 176. D.. C. Taper B. Bucrogingival margin Bucca-occlusal margin Linguogingiva l margin Ungua-occlusal margin 178. 35 MPa at 24 hours B. U-shap<'<i grooves C. Short tooth preparation D . St rength increases by 50% B. line phosphate mu s t have compressive s tre ng th mOR than: A. I cove rage res to ration.. An incruse in te mpt:rature from room te mpt:ratuR to 50·Ce lsius afh cts the compressive s trength in the fo ll owing wa y: A. 75 MPa at 24 hours 177. 90 MPa at 24 hours D. To res is t defo rma tion. Boxes or grooves B. In a pHtl . fteds resis ta nce form in full veneer crowns: A.

. Low modu lus of elasticity C. At the occlusal surface itself 183. Intra coronal restora tions D. Crowns B.. to s tabilize: A. Root surface is not discolored B. At ocdusafacial line angle B.. Lo .Fixed Partial Denture Prosthodontics [it'"] 179. Beyond the ocdusofacial line angle D . im pact s trength 180.12 weeks C . Lo . Patients have high lip line C.. After periodo ntal surgeI)'...::~. Intraradicular r(>sto rations 182. fatigue strength B. All of the above 181. lIoys COl n be used !Hltisfactorily for: A.. Within ocdusafacial line angle C. Uniform occlusal reduction D . 3 weeks B. Rigidity for a cro wn ca n be ob tained by: A. 20 weeks 179 II 110 Dill C 11. Type I or Type II gold . ' A' and '8' are true D. A Collarless design is indicated when: A.. 1 week D . Bridges C. Corruga ted effed of all planes C. 1.. gingiva usually takes ilbout :-"""'-.. Retentiv e ability of zinc po lyu rbox ylate cement depends more on taper of preparation as compared to Zinc Phos phate beca use i t has: A. Root surface is discolored 184. Fad .5 mm alloy thickness B. H igh modulus of elastici ty D. l ma rgi n of a maxillal)' partial crown should end: A.2 C 113 C 114 C Printable Copy to DrEzaby .

l e~st: Recommend~d ocd uu l reduction for non-centric cusps for . st: A. Intact buccal or lingual wall D . Gross decay B.5mm 190. Skyfurcation B. Tunneli ng 186. I mm C. 1. 45 degrees D .0.8 mm D . following proc~d ur~ i s urri~d o u t during pr~p~ution o f ~butment: A. 30 degrees 115 C 186 C 187 a 1" C 189 C 180 C Printable Copy to DrEzaby . 3 degrees B..5 mm 189. 1. 0. 60 degrees B. 1~5 mm B. Followin g ar~ indi c~tjons for complel~ cast crown except: A. Met~llhickness ~t the margin for i complete cut crown B. co mplete cast crown is ~ t I. In a molar.. 0.M Meas lor PGs In Prosthodontics 185.. 2 mm C..6 degrees D. Flu ting D . Endodontically treated tooth 187. Short crown C.5 mm s hould be i t A.. 1mm D. Idul axi~l t~p~r for c~s t cro wn tooth su rfaces is: pr~p~ration b~tween A. Bicuspidization C. fo r brlter ~ccess to furr~tion are~. Functional cusp bevel is placed at abo ut _ _ _ __ to the lo ng u is: A. 90 degrees C. 6 degrees C. 60 degrees 188.

3 mm 8. Connects the proximal grooves C. 1 mm C.6mm B. It prevents over-conlo ured crown 8. Bolh ' A' and ' 8 ' D.8 mm D. RemOVing unsupported enamel C. O. II p rov ides more strength C . Amounl of non-functional cusp reduction is: A. Ad va ntagu of non-centric bevel incl ud es: A. Slight additional redllCtion in palatal CUlipS 8.1 s houlder s ho uld utend alleasl lingual to proximal co ntact: A. In a po rcelain fused to metal ru toralio n. All or the above 196. Occluul offset: A. Slight additional reduction on IT\4\xiilary buccal cusps D .. Connecting mesial and distal nares D . the l"bi. More reduction on the distal cusp of mandibular molar 192. 8ucco-occiusai conlrabevel in putial venter crown is ""P' helpful in: A. Slight add itional reduction in mandibular buccal C. Is a V-shaped groove 8. High esthetics 194.6mm D.2.6mm 193. Ail of the above are true III C 112 II It) C 1114 8 illS 0 1M D Printable Copy to DrEzaby .6mm C. 0. 0. Offers bu lk and rigidity to restoration D .5 mm 195. 0. 1. Protecting buccal cusp tip B. Non-centric cusp bevel refers to: [ii] A.Filed Par11a1Denture Prosthodontics 191 .

5-5.5 mm B.th irds of lingual su rface of teeth D .I mm 199.0. I. Tissue response D. 2-2..5 mm C.. Hig hly carious tooth Low caries index Bulbous teeth In tact tl'l!th undamaged 198. 0..th irds of labia l surface of teeth C. Ltdgu shou ld b~ madt parall tl to: A. 4 mm D. B.5mm A. Dtpt h of tht p inh olu un bt: A ..aration is dont about -'--070 ct rviul to incisal ~d gt: A.ugin. Indications fo r pin ~xupt: ut following A. 0.1 ridgts about lnsidt th t utunal tooth contour: B.M Meas lor PGs in Prosthodonllcs I~d g~ pr~pua ti ons 197. e . 4-5 mm B. C. Tra nslucency B. Ce rvical tw o..5 mm 0 . Strength 1'7. D.2 mm 0 .5mm 202.0. Min imum width rtcommud t d fo r It dgt is: B. 0. 200 e 20.7 mm 0 . 1-1. InC"isal two-thlrds of lingual surface of teeth B. 0. . Ce rvical two-thirds of labial s urface of tt'l!th 201 .5 .3mm C.5-1 mm 203. e 202 e 203 D Printable Copy to DrEzaby . Indsa lltdgt fo r a pin Itdgt prtp.2 mm A. 2-3 mm C. 1-0.. Es thetics C.".3 mm C. Advantag n of a ll -ct ramic ru toratiOM ind udt following tXCtpt: A. .0. Ind tn tatio ns fo r pinholn u~ gtnually within th l! n.1 mm 200. Incisa l two.

Incisal third B. Middle third C . < 90 degrees C. Shoulder B. Etching with hydrochloric acid D . Amount of redu ction nee d ed fo r laminates is usuall y: A. Combined usage of 'A' and '6' 207.lmm B. Shoulder or heavy cha mfer D . Following are the fini sh m ngins recommended for all ceramic res torations: A. Knife edge D .Filed Partial Denture Prosthodontics liD 204. Shoulder or chisel edge C. Proximal ha lf 205. Usage of sila ne couplin g agents C.0. 0.d ions. Recommended margin design for ceramic onla y is: A. Mugin des ign for ceramic inlay is: A. 90 degrees D. Bonding btlween too th and ceramic is achieved b y: A. it is beller to place ce ntric contac ts i t: A. > 110 degrees 208. Chamfer C. Cha mfer or heavy chamfer 206. 0. Shoulder or cha mfer B.5 mm 21M B 205 C 206 D 207 C 201 D 20t D Printable Copy to DrEzaby .9 mm 0 .7 mm C. Etching wi th hydroflu o ric acid B. Cervical third D . > 90 degrees B. Heavy chamfer 209. In all ce ramic ante rior ru to r.

proximally lam inates A. Helps achieve all of the above mentioned 214. During res toring endodontically trrated tooth. No local anesthesia required C. L. parallel post. Preparation geome try B. Helps in differential etching O. threaded post. C.M MCQslor pas In Prosthodontics 210. tapered post 21D 0 211 C 212 C 213 D 214 0 215 A Printable Copy to DrEzaby . Exposes ends of the enamel p risms B. Minimally invasive B. th~ order (d~sc~nding) of amou nt of re t~nti on obta in~d is: A. No rmall y. parallel pos t D . Post length and diameter C. Among various pos ts. Luting agen t O. threaded post C. Highly esthetic D. r~t~ntion is aff~ct~d by following: A. Middle third at: 213. tapered post. All of the above 211 . O. tapered post B. Long chamfer u s~ d for lamina tes: A. At contact area C. Threaded post. By all above factors 215. Gives obtuse cavosurface angle C. Deep chamfer Heavy chamfer Long chamfer Chamfer ~nd 212. Parallel post. B. Advantage of lami nates is: A. tapered post. Parallel post. Ungual to con tact area B. Finish margin recommended for laminates is: A.bial to contact area O . Threaded post.

half in root D . Palatal 218. 1·2 mm C. 3 nun D . Distoou(cal B.. Printable Copy to DrEzaby . Gutta-percha can be removed using: A. Any or all of the ab()\'c 220. Aux iliary pin on the root C. gru test stress concentntion occurs at: A.5·) mm 215 0 217 1. Lingual wall D . 4-5 mm B. Mesiobuccal C. Warm broach D .1 ~ 1'''' ~1' 0 :l2O 1. Rolation of the post nn be pre vented by following: A. Widest canal in maxilla ry mo lar is: A.Fixed Partial Denture Prosthodontics m 216. Mesioli ngual D . Shoulder B.lmm D.3mm C. Warm endo-p lugg<'r C. Amount of apical gulla-pereha to be retained for post is: A. Mesial of root canal C. > 4mm 217.. Gates-Glidden drill B. On the distal side of root canal 219. Either 'A' or ' B' 221. In a post and carr restoration. A small cavity and w ith amalgam condensed· half in post.1 221 .2mm B. The cri tical amou nt of toolh s tru cture that remains to decid e ~bout usage of re te ntion from ca nals is: A. An \iro taUo n groove in the ca nol! B. 0.

Unders ized (as tin g fo r a pos t can be achieved by: A.3 ± 0. lvlesial wall of mesia l root C. Nickel-Ch romium .5 mm 223. Ha lf the diameter of the (oot B. Dis tal wall of dist a l root O. In the maxilla ry molars. 8..1 root 225. Omitting ring line r C. Avuage mniodistal diamet e r of root for max ill ary ce ntral incisor at the CEJ is: A. Cas ting at a lower mold tempe ra ture O.5 mm C. One· third the diame ter of the roo t O.111oy D.3 ± 05 mm D. Same as diameter o f the root 224.3 ± 0. 5. Can be both ' A .3 ± 0. Mesial or distal of distohuccal root B. Restricting expansion of investment B. 6. Type IV gold C. Utilizing any or a ll of the a bove mentioned 227. 7. Ma terial s uita ble fo r pos t is: A . In mand ibu lar molars. One-fourth the diameter of the root C. or 'C' 222 B 223 C 224 A 225 C 2211 0 :t27 D Printable Copy to DrEzaby . Apex of the palatal root 226. Mesial wall o f d ist. Mesial or dista l of mesiobuccal root O. Distal w a li of mesial root B. Type II gold B.5 mm B. th e most susceptible uea (or pe rfora tion in the root is: A. Recommended diamet e r of the post is: A. Mesial or distal of pala ta l rool C.m Mea s for PGs in Prosthodontics 222. th e most s usce ptible area for perforation in the root is: A.

A gtoov. u>wer sintering temperature C. Following are true for Debasing Ag.. Embedded fractured post ca n be retrieved by using: B. pla.ramics except: A. They are antifluxing agents D . .nt in c. Fundions as all of the above M 229. Reduces hydrosta tic pressure D. Lentulo spiral D. following instrument is un d ideally: A. ClOSing the gap between two fragments of metal units during soldering D . They either fo rm li quid phase o r go into solid solution 232. Usually used in the p~rallel-s ided post C. To fill th. anal with cement. Kurer kit C. Process of blending. They are fluxing agents B. Endo plugger 230. Three different particle sizes of ceramics are used to obtain high densi t y B. Gap-grading syste m reft'fS 10: A. Allows excess . Closing the gap during post-soldering system C. Masscrann kit A. Tenn " Vitreous muns: A. Development of crys talline phase W 233.ement to esc~pe B.Fixed Partial Denture Prosthodontics 228.. All of the above 22ID nee 230B 231C 2328 233 A Printable Copy to DrEzaby ... Peeso reamer C. Developmen t of cloudiness in ceramics B. Endopost kit 231. TMS pin D . Gates Glidden B. melting and quenching glass component D . Developme nt of liquid phase turni ng into glassy phase on cooling C.ed alongside of the post: A.

Ad dition of dry porce lain powder to we t porcelain B. be applied befo l"(' the porcelain enters hot zone of furn'}ce C. Process of developing Crack propagation D. except: A. Using s. Whipping 8 . Brus h is touched with a paper tissue during condensa tion D .M Meas lor PGs In Prosthodontics 2301. It is caused by uneven heating and cooling C. mdhod of condens. Brus h·additive technique refers to: A. fter maturation of ceramic D . mics: A. Should not be prolonged .l\ura tion tempera ture should no! be achieved D . except: A.. Full m. up to naif hour is re.:omme nd ed 237.. Crown su rface e~ pands more quic kly than interior 234 0 235 B 236 B 231 A 238 C Printable Copy to DrEzaby . not .. Fo llow ing . Matu ra tion pe riod should be quic ker to elimina te entrapped air C. Vibration C.ue troe fo r va cuum firing ceramics. A slow ma tura tion period is ideal 8. One of the following i. Compaction 235.. It is a process of st ressing ceramic crown B. A hea t-soa k. mic procedure. <'Xrtpt: A. Following are tru e for Air-Firing cer. Vacuum mus. Gravitation D.lble hair brush 10 Iransfer wei porcelain 10 pla tinum ma tr ix C. Using surface tension principle while condensing ce ramic 236. Vacuum removes all the entra pped air ! 8.. Vacuum should end while the ceramic is still in hoi lone of furnace 238. tion of cer. Follo win g are true for process of N rmal Shock" in The ceramics.

They are occlusal errors in ce ramic restoration B. Is re lated to wavelength o f tight emitted by fluo rescent substance D . Following are tru e for Griffith Flaws. txupt: A. Sto kes' Law: A. Bulk d iffusion refers 1 0: A.0-1. They condition the surface color of metal D . 5.tmies. 0.1ys that surface flaws st rengthen the ceramic B. Diffusion of air entrapped in ceramic to the surfare B.5-0. 0. Crystill!ine phase in glass malri)!.53 D . Diffusion of gases to the surface during sintering 240.mel Veneer Ihi ~kntss required to crnte depth of translu cency in ceramic ~storation Is abo ut: A.8 mm C. t. Refers to components of color in ceramics 244. En.idcs on the surface of alloy D. They may increase potential oxide sur face area {or bonding C.8-1 mm D .Fixed Partlat Denture Prosthodontics M 239. They are Colloidal Gold B. 1. 1.51-1 . Smaller the flaws. 1.52 B.5 mm mc 2~A 241 A 242B U3C a«c Printable Copy to DrEzaby . reduces them C.51-4. 2. They mas k the surface color of the metal 243. better the s trength o f ceramics 2·11.51-2.5·2 mm B.ltUp t: A. Refracti ve indu of denLtI pon:dain is: A. States that glazing reduces the s urface flaws C.52-3. Flaw size is governed by distance between particles d ispersed D .l e for Bonding Age nts for (er.52 C. 4. Following art tl1. Process of formation of o)!. 3. Diffusion of air to a condensed form due to vacuum C.52 242.

SO mg bd 249. 2 mg B. Formaldehyde based liquids D .lmic particies. Alcohol C. Plain C. Propylene glycol B. Atropine is strictly contraindica ted in the A. 0.' A 250 0 251 0 252 0 Printable Copy to DrEzaby . Following are trut for 'Th~ Adams Co-ordin ate System'. Clonidine when used to control saliva. Warm water 247. Epile psy D . SO mg once D. 251. except: A. SO mg Ids A. Aluminum ch. Knitted B. Braided D .2 mg Displacem~nt cords ma y b~ : A. Any of the above C. 'Lab' sys tem C. 200 mg D.m Meal for PGI In PrOllhodontlcs 245. Glaucoma B. except: A. Mtthantheline when used. Di. Dicyclomine C. 100 mg tds C. Ca rcinoma pr~sen ce of: 2". 20 mg C. Ferric s ulfat e 245 A 246 D 247 0 248 C 2. the dosage is: A. Otherwise known as Munsell Color System 8 . Atropine B. Amoxycillin 248.lbetes C. Used for ceramic s had e gUide D. Any type mentioned 252. Made of three c<rordinates 246. Following mtdications can be ustd to control saliva except: A .loride D . Clonidi ne D . Fo llowing are the binders used for binding cer. Epinephrine B. G in g iva l re traction cords may be dipped in: A. the dosage is: B.

Fully rectified.000 Hz to 9.7 C.5% B. Freq uency of current used in electros urgery unit is: A.4 secs B. l)XlO. Minimizes deeper tissue damage D.000. 4. Breaks down the cdls B. 5. Trauma to tooth structuT (. Intermittent C.000. CauS<!s all o f the above 258. Dentin etching occurs around p H value: A.000.500. D .OOO Hz B. 8% C. lO% 254. Contact of ti ss ue with e lectrode shouJd not uceed: A.2 sees 253 C 154 A 255 B 2S11 B 2Jj1 D 2S11 0 259 A Printable Copy to DrEzaby .000. 2.7 256.Fixed Partial Denture Prosthodontics m 253. Continuous B. CUlling with e lectrode s hould be: A.OOO Hz to l.7 D . 8.000 Hz to 9. Trauma to smear la yer 255.000 Hz C. R('traction of th(' marginal gingiva B.4 sees 0 .000 Hz D.l B. 15. 3. 4 sees C. Fo!lowed intermittently with 5 seconds between each attempt 259.000. 1. filtered current is us ed because it: A. Trauma to gingiva C. 1. 0. Causes localized polarity change C. Polential dangers of us ing displacement cords are following except: A.000 Hz to 4.000. Repeated with 5 seconds interval in-between D.000 Hz 257. 1. Percentage of aluminum chloride when used is: A. 20-25% D .

2-0. Preformed celluloseacetale crowns have ______ thickness: A. 40·C. 100·C. All are advantages of Indirect-direct procedure of fabricating provi s ion~ l s except: A. Thickness of 2 I ~yers of modeling wax would B. 15 mm 261. 65·C. 0. 4 nun D. Thickness of spacer for elutornedc impression for denlulous mouth is: A.3 mm C. 0_ mm 25 C. 4-5 mm B. Thickness of lin foi l 10 be placed for special IrdY for eldstomers used for dentulous impressions is: A.lmm C. The ESF is lined wi th resin C. IOO·C. 2.8-0_ m m 9 D.5 mm D . 40·C. 5-6 nun 262. 3-4 mm 266. 0. 3. 4 nun approximately be: A. Con tact b-e tween resin monomer a nd soft tiss ue is minimized 260 A 251 B 252 D 253 B 28-4 A 25S B 256 B Printable Copy to DrEzaby . 1-2 mm B. 2-3 mm C.d tTdy for dentu lous mouth s hould extend apical to cresl of free gingival: B. 40·C B. Less hea t generatt'd D. l OO·C.5 mm D. Temperature of thermoslatically controlled water bath in conditioning unit of agar is: A.5 mm 263. 40·C C. Reduced chair side ti me B.M Meal lor PGs in Prosthodontics 260. 0_ 025 mm B.5 mm C.5-1 m m D . IOO·C. 1. 65°C.5 mm 264. 2 mm A. 0. 65·C D. 2. 65·C 265. Border of speci.

2 mm C. Contact angle of the die ma terial with impression D . Maximum intl. the Irue hinge axis is usu ally A.ell II aTOll VIC anD 27311 Printable Copy to DrEzaby . Following material is easiest to pour "mong elaslomen. 0.5mm 213. Hardness of impression material B. While us ing arbitrary hin ge axi s.2 mm D ." ~T C ~'C . 15 mm B. 25 mm C."TCuspai position 271. Surface contamination 268.Fixed Partial Denture Prosthodontics M 261. Polysulfide 269. Cl. 2 mm B. 10 mm 270. 4mm away: B. 2. Occlusion of restoration at inlercuspal position C. Ease with which an impres~ion can be poured without bubble formation is related to: A.2mm D. a 3 mm centric relalion record can create acdusal discrepancy at fin. Occlusion of restOTJtion at Cent ric relation B."nlric relation c."rcuspal position D . Inll.l mm C. 30 mm D . Centric occlusion B." abovl. Length of the individual dies is approximately: A .3 mm 272. Occlusion at Centric slidl.: A. Resiliency o( the impression material C. When using arbitrary face bow.. All of Ihl." D. Addition silicones B. Polyether D. Condensation silicones C. 1. Co nformitive occlusion re fers 10: A. Diagnostic casts for natural dentition are but mounted in: A.1 molar region: A.

-. 40-80 mkrons C. tnmmpJete scating of <:TOwns D. Oplimum dimen sion fDr th e ceme nt for each wall of the CTOwn is: A.. Fins in the <:rown C. Burnisher for refining occlusal anatomy D .large r than prepilred tooth: A. 20-40 microns C. C. D. All of the above 280. 20-40 microns D . One quadrant of Ihe mouth D .--. Carving D. no. 1-3 mi(tons 278. No. 40-80 minons B. A small resloration C. intem. Bo th 'B' and 'C' 274 8 275 C 276 8 277 A 271 C 279 C 280 A Printable Copy to DrEzaby . least ina deq u~t e expansion of in ves tm e nt matt'fia l ma y cause: A. 3 is for: A. MeQs for PGs In Prosthodonllcs occlusion is u su ~lI y givt'n for: A.. Porosities in the crown 279. Burnishing C.. At the marg in. Wax addition B.7 spatula is used for: A.li diameter of the cut crown should be -. Carving C. tht' cas ting s hould clost'ly adapt: 276. Larger crowns B.m 274. In a se t of PKT ins truments. Full mouth restorations B. Both 'A' and 'C' are (orrect A. 10-20 microns B. For a good fit To prevent dislodgement To prevent dissolution of luting agent To get good retention s p~ ce Co nform~tive 275. 10-20 mi(rQfls D.O. Adding large amount of wax B.. B.S·\ minons ~t 277.

Used for amal gam core C.'<i for trimming acrylic 282. None of the above 284. 0. None of the above 286. A wax burnisher C. C ut-back is us ually done to a depth of: A. Cusp to both marginal ridges C. Cusp to developmen tal groove D. Cusp to single ma rginal ridge B. D. Hollenback (no. Sodium stea rate c.Fixed Partial Denture Prosthodontics [4!J 281. 2) A. Zinc stearate D. C. None of the above 285. A metal trimmer B. Darby-Perry Trimmer no. Typ<! of occlusal schtm<! usually prt'Sent in nonnal natural dentition b: A. J ) and Ward carv<!l'$ (no.5 mm 2 rum J rum None of the above are correct 21 1 B Z82 0 253 D "28-4 C 215 C 216 0 Printable Copy to DrEzaby . Used for compaction of gold foil D . 6 is: A. Potassium s tea rate B. Cusp to single marginal ridge B. R<!commend<!d occlusal scli<!me for r<!storation is: A. None of the above ar~ : 283. Cusp to fossa C. Used for ca rving composite core B. Cusp to marginal ridges D . B. USt. Used for cu tting sp rues D . Occlusal contacts can be evaluated using: A.

Low elonga ti on D. 10% by weight D . Grain refin{!rs D. SO"IQ by weight B. 2 mm 288. 60"10 by weight C. = 90 degr~s D. 80th ' A' and 'C' are correct 287 82118 2UD 2108291 D 292 A 2938 Printable Copy to DrEzaby . Low yield strength 8. Surface hardeners C. A. Passivators 291. Minimum amount of gold content in hi gh-noble alloy that should be present is. < 90 degrees 289. A. A. Denial alloys prefened for fiud prosthodontics must have. 0. Cent ric stops should be away from metal-ceramic junction by at lus t. A. 1. Achi{! ve hardening of me tal D. Tin and Indium in alloys. Hard{'ning of metal D. In noble metals. None of the above 290. A. Rutheum and Iridium are add ed as.M Measlor pas I" ProsthodOl'ltles 287. Oxidiz{! during porcelain application 8. > 90 degr~s 8.5 mm D. Give s treng th C. Oxidizing during porcelain application B. Angle at porcelain-metal interface is. lmm 8 . None of the above C. Stwngth{!ners 8.5 mm C. 40"10 by weight 292. Castability C. Both 'B' and 'C' are tru{! 293. Silver helps in: A. Low modulus of elastici ty C. A.

:. Lowers castability D .:onomic treatment C. HOC Printable Copy to DrEzaby . Periodic decontamination of porcelain furnace B. Lowers fluidity C. Jaundice D . Contact dermatitis C. 'A' and '8' 296. H YO 211. All a re symptoms of Be rylliOS iS ~Xctp t: A.I. Lowers melting range B. Weakness B. d iscolo ration of Au-Pd -Ag a ll oy du r in g porcelain firing is due 10 lh e prese nce of: A. Using carbon block to decontaminate porcelain furnace C.:. High calcium D. High sodium B. Gold-Platinum D . Platinum-Palladium B. Restorations will be lighter B. Respiratory symptoms 214. Pu rgi ng refers to: A. Does all of the a bove 299.:t 297. None of the above 298. H!i D 2M. th ~t: A. Silver-Platinum ' C. Removal of green discoloration from restoration D . Both ' B' and 'C' G r~~ n 295. lower d ~nsity o f metal mnn.1.1.Fixed Partial Denture Prosthodontics m 294. Two pe f( e nt Be ryllium: A. High potassium C. Less restorations per unit material D . LeSli e. Sem iprecious ~lIoys contain mo re of: A. Both 'B' and 'C' are corre.

AI thl' crest of Ihl' ridgl' C. Gallium B. Weight loss C. < 25% by weight C. In posterior mel~l .tp t~ width ~~ prde rrtd for following cases A. < 25% by volume D .61 8 306.eramic restorations. Stightly buccally D. Skin sensitization D. Following are thl:' alloys of Titanium uap t: A. Acule dfects of txposure to nick el include: A. When ch~k s upport is required Knife l'dgl' ridgl' Whl're good abu lml'nts are preserved Both 'A' and'S' 305. Pontic! with normal buccolingu~l u:C. Fatigue B. junction s hou ld bt placed: A. The established rati o for Golden proportion is: A. Beryllium D. Ti·AI·V D . To . 2: 1. D. < 10% by weight B.618 D.1 : 1. I : 1.618 C. 'A' and 'B' 304. Ti·Cu·Nickel B. B.4 B lOS A 306 0 Printable Copy to DrEzaby . Lingually 300 C 301 B 302 C 303 0 3(). Ti-Callium C.6 18 B. Base mtlal all oys may have noble metals by: A.o nt.M Meas for PGs In Prosthodontics ba ~t 300. 1. < 10"/" by volume 302. 0. Copper C. C.ol thi ekntss of oxidt laytr in during firin g of poretlain following is A. Silver mttals ~ddtd : 301. All of the above 303.8 : 1. More buccally B.

Bucral C.. ble partial denture reta iners can have: A . Micropores 301 C 30$ 8 309 D 310 0 B. A C<lSt retaiJ1u used for removable partial denture abutment has in addition: A. Distal guide planC5 C. Lingual path of wi thdrawa l C. Distal 309. Both ' A ' and 'C' 310. Lingual B. Retention thro ugh intra coronal preds io n attachment is by: A. Ca rb ide burs wi tho ut cross cu ts 311. Exlracorona l attachments a re retained on tooth through: A .Fixed Partial Denture Prosthodontics rsa 307.s iono mcr c eme nt C. The rotary instrument used for milling purposts in wax is: A . Tapered carbide burs C. Mes ial D. Zinc phosphate ce me nt D . Remo . Cylind rical d ia mond burs B. Different paths of withdrawal D . All of the above 311 0 312 A Printable Copy to DrEzaby . G la :. Frictio nal fit C. None of the above 308. Cements D . Buccal line of w ithdrawal B... Non e of the above 312. Path of withdrawal in an abutment pre paration for removable parli~1 denhlTt rtlainu is: A.. Single casting B. Lingual guide planes D . Mesial guide planC5 B. Cylindrical carbide burs with cross cuts D .

Angu lati on of the placed sprue should be to axial wall: A.'zing the liner Placing the mold in water aftl'r set ting Both ' A' and 'C' 318.5 mm 319. : A. 2 nun D. for PG.t lust _ _ aw. Chamfer margin D. 1-2 mm B. 1 mm 316. D. 45 degrees C. Attuhmenls .ln Pro. 2-3 mm 311. 5 nun D. Tinker's diamond points give . 145 degrees 313 B 3U C 315 C 311 0 317" 311 C 31t C Printable Copy to DrEzaby . C. nd occ1us . 10 mm B. pru" for mobn . 12 mm D. 313. u:pansion of th" mold ca n bt obtained by: Wetting the liner SquC{. chments requl«>: A. Ocdusal rest D. Knife edge in tilled molars 315.am Mea. Buccal retentive arm B. Long cha mfer margin C. 90 degr~s B. Rtcommtndtd diamtt". Majority of the semi-precision att. 3 mm B. 15 nun C..thodontlc.s: A. 135 degr~s D . 1 nun C. B.y from metal-ceramic interface: A. Av"rag" length of the sprue is about: A. Should er margin B. of th" . Cingul um rest 314. Lingual retentive ar m C. S mm C. M or~ A. 1 res t s uts must be .

liloy. Both 'A' and ' B' O. 5-6 gm B. Back pressu re 320 A 321 B 322 C 323 C 32.. 2-3 gm C. Excessive slag forma tion during casting C. When metal in the sprue solidifies prior to in the mold -..ed C. Generalized C. It w ill look dark C. 10-12 gm O . None of the above 325. Gas-air torch C.c porosity occurs: A.-. Improper poros ity in the investment ma y cause -:--. In nickel-chromium . Subsurf.rtllil Denture Prosthodontics 320. It will have a shiny surface B.porosity: A .--. Preheating crucible avoid s: A. Bue m etal alloys melt with: A. Approximate quantity of high de nsity noble melal alloy for a molar pontic may be: A. All of the above rsa 322. Sharp edge of ingot rounds over D.Fixed P..c--. D 325 a Printable Copy to DrEzaby . Porosities O . Back pressure B. ce D . Suckback B. indin tion for readiness for casting is that: A. Gas-oxyacetylene torch B... All of the above 324. Genera li7. Single orifice gas-air torch 321. Fins and cracks B. Subsurface O . 15-20 gm 323.

Functions as primary source of color D. Trichromatism D. Gives tunslucense to resto rations C. Base metal thickness recommended for framework of an ceramometallic restoration is: A. It gives shine to the tooth B. Blue paint on the wall of the operatory is advised becaus e: A. Achromatism B. 20 minu tes C. 20 seconds B.2 mm 328 0 327 B 328 0 32t A 3lD 0 331 D Printable Copy to DrEzaby .5 mm B. 0. Acts as 'A' and 'C' 331. 1 mm C. The opaque layer of cenmic: A . 40 minutes 321. Dark adaptation C. None of the above 329.1 mm D. It is complementary to yellow C. Metamerism can be of following type: A . Masks the dark metal oxid e B. Achromatism B. Photopic vision 330. 0. Dich romatism C. Conversion from Photopic to Scotopic vision tak es about: A. It illuminates the area D . 0. 40 seconds D . Co mple te la ck of se n s itivity to hue is referred to as: A. Scotopic vision D. All of the above 328.M MeQs lor PGs in Prosthodontics 326.

Cont"c' angle developed between high gold alloy and ceramic is "bout: A .3 mm C. 332 II B. mperature D . 40-60 degrees B.1 mm 0 . Ultrason ic d u ning of th e cas tin g is done for: A.. Tin C. Indium be: A . Such that ceramic is under tension B. All of the above 335.Fixed Partial Denture Prosthodontics R 332. 50 minutes 0 . 0. Less than metal B. Magnesium D . Thickness of opil qu e porcel" in should no t exceed: A. 80-100 degrct"S C. Zinc 334. C. 70-80 degrees 336. Particle s ize of a fine-g rain po rce lain ranges from : A.25 minu tes 333. 300-400 microns 337. Coefficie nt of th ermal u :pan sion of porcelai n s ho uld C. 0. 80-100 microns D.5 mm A. 0. Above its glass transi tion t. D. B. 5 minutes C. 15 minutes B. Following a re ele me nts that fo nn oxides in gold alloy except: A. Vacuum "ltained in porcelain furnace is between: 20-30 em Hg 80-100 cm Hg 60-80 cm Hg None of the above 333 II :t34 A 335 A 33& A 137 II 338 C Printable Copy to DrEzaby .. 1 mm 338. 20-30 degrees D. 5-110 microns B. 110-200 microns C.

Proximal ma rgin in porcelai n D. 6 : 3 by we ight B.try purpos.. Prim. Collarleu crowns have: A. Lubricant C. d by: A.. Taggart D. Create good bonding C. C H Land C. Give sha pe to the restora tion D.. First ceramic nown was made by: A.M Meas for PGsin Prosthodontics 339. Hugh('s 344. Li ngual margin in porcela in C. 'A' and 'C' a re true 340. In Dir.. ct Lift Tf-Chnique of porcelain firing ____ is applied onto the die prior to firing: A. 6: 1 by volume D. C H Land C. Ta gga rt B. Die ha rdene r 342. the ratio betw . 6: 1 by w(' ight C. Mclean D. In porcelain wax technique. of platinum foil during firing is to: A. P K Thomas UO D Ul C U2 B U3 B 339 A :wi A Printable Copy to DrEzaby ... n porcelain and wax is approximately: A. Die spacer B. None of the above 341. Mc lean a nd Hughes B. Facial ma rgin in po rcel ain B. 6 : 3 by volume 343. Create oxide layer B. High·strength ceramic WillS introduc. Cyanoacryla te resin D.

40 percent 0 . Leucite: A. May be 'A' or '8' letS C :J<I6 B 347 B 34& C Printable Copy to DrEzaby . In A. C. IPS empress C. Static fatigue C . Increases CTE of porcelain C. Cerinate 349. St~nglh of ceramics reduces in mois t environment. Increases polishability 348. 20 percent C.80 percenl 351. Optec HSP B. improve strength: Silica was added Magnesium was removed Aluminum oxide was fused None of the above mentioned was done CS!] 346. 10 percent B. Could be any of the above 347. Stress corrosion O. B. Magnesium-aluminum·silicate B. Decreases CTE of porcelain B. C. Ion exchange me thod incrns es stre ngth by: A. D. Dicor D. Shear thinning 34g A 350 C 351 C 10: A. Decreases strength D. Following systems contain ieucit e except: A. ion exchange method of s trengthening ceramics: Molten nitrate salts are used Molten citrate salts are used Potassium and zinc ions are used All of the above may be true 350. Zinc-aluminum-silicate D. 8.Fixed Partial Denture Prosthodontics 345. Potassium-aluminum-silicate C . D. Le ucite is: A. To A. due B.

In-ceram uses: A. 900· tempe rature O. Platinum foil used for Porce lain Ja cket C rown is A. lOOO·C D. Ceramming technique C.M MCQs for PGs In Prosthodontics 352. Mesially C. technique O. 0 355 C 356 C 357 C Printable Copy to DrEzaby .'s joint is: A.1 inch thick 0.. SOO· F C. llOO· temperature D. Preui ng proced ure of ceramic rt!storation fabri ca tion utilizes: A. Buccally B. SOO· C O. Preferred si te for TiOller's joint placeme nt is: A. Other name for TM joint B.01 inch thick 0. D. Tinne. Distally D . 9OO·C 356. 1500· temperature C.001 inch thick 0. 920· tem perature $2 A 353 0 35. Machining technique 357. The Platinum matri x is degassed at: A. Where Tin joins Platinum D. When Tin joins aluminum C. C. Lost wax. Slip cast technique D. ling ually 355. None of the above 354. 0..2 inch thick 353. B.

10 minu tes A. All pla nes 364. Muilluy molus for Res in Bonded Pros thesis u". Etching ge l for cUlm ic is applied for. All planes C. To re tain the res to ra tion B. magnesl um-siJica te 359.l... Mandibular molar for Ru in Bonded Pros thu is is prepared in: B. Grow th of te tra alu m in um mi ca D. Bot h ' 8 ' and 'C' a re co rre<:t 35e IS lSI 0 :JIG C 361 C 3112 C :tel II .5 pe rcen t 360.Fixed Partial Denture PTo. One plane A. is: 8. One pla ne only 8.9. 5 minutes D. 15. B.inly: A. Puce nlilge of hydrofluori c add used for e tching ce ramic laminat". glu5 is co nvu led to crys lals through: A.l.5 perce nt A.thodontlcs M 358.mmin g. G row th of tetrasilicic mica C. Glass lono mer cement C. 5 seconds 361. During g U.5 percent 0 . To s u pport the restorati on C. Chemlul-bonding in Resin Bonded Pros thesis Is also achlevt!d by: A.. Any of ' A ' o r ' 8 ' D . Tin plati ng 8. 10 seconds C. G rowth of leuci te crystals 8. Tw o planes C. 1. Any of the above 363. To d o all of the above 362. prepared in: A. Two planes D . A Printable Copy to DrEzaby . Sand blasting D. Pro1Cima l wrap in an Resin Bonded Prosthesis helps m. 10. To resis t torq uing forces D.5 perce nt C. Grow th of al uminum .

Chrmical Etching grl of Cisting consists of: A. Both' A' and ' B' O. Etching can be done 369. D.ta! Ruin Bond". Tinner's joint can be formed B. Sulfuric acid and citric acid 367. 4-META B. Nitric acid and sulfuric acid O. fill". B.M Measlor pas ]n Prosthodontles 365. To improv'" bonding of nobl". Both 'A' and 'C' 368. Sulfuric acid and hydrochloric acid B. Etch ing ca n be done for: A. Hydrochloric acid 370. Gold alloys D . th". Nickel-chromium alloys B. In A. Polyethylene glycol gel C. 30% hydrochloric acid C. brazing.d Pros thesi s to to oth: A. m". Hydrochloric acid and nitric acid C. C. May be 'A' or 'B' O.r mat e rial has temperature as: Same as parent metal Less than 450°C More than 450°C More than 550"C 365 0 368 8 3$1 A 361 8 3$11 C 370 C Printable Copy to DrEzaby . 18% hydrochloric acid 366. Adhuive resins may employ: A. Electrolytic etching utilizes approl(imatdy: A. Platinum fOil can be used D. Tin plating can be done C. 25% sulfuric acid B. Nickel-a luminum alloys C.

25 mm C. 70-80 psi for 3 ~onds C. 18 carat D. 250 microns alumina B. 70-80 psi for 5 se<:onds 377. sandblasting is done u$ing: A. To ilChieve matte finish on occlusal s urface of casting. Large crystills 8 . 90-100 psi for 1 min u te B. 500 microns alumina C. None of the above 374. High corrosion C. 2. laser welding procedure has: A. 70-80 psi for 1 second D. Mylar strip D.22 carat 373. Both' A' and '8' D . Chlo roform and rouge C. 0. Titanium componen t D .Fixed Partial Denture ProsIl10d0nlles C¥] 311. 1. Solder to be used for Type IV gold alloy is: A. None of the above 376. Rearranged microcrystalline surface layer 371 D 372 C 373 C 374 II 375 D 378 C "Sr7 D Printable Copy to DrEzaby .025 mm B. Recommended Soldering gap is: A. 10 carat C. 24 carat B. For matte finish on metal. Beilby layer consists of: A. Internal nodules in casting can be detected with the help of: A. DisclOSing wax B. None of the above 372. Reduced strength 8 . sandblasting should be done at for ~--.25 mm D. All of the above 375. 75 microns alwnina D .-_ A. Unpolished metal surface C.

5 minutes A. Shim stoc k C. Rem. 2 to 2. 25 microns to 30 microns C. Air-water spray 380. 10 microns to 15 microns D . Articulating tape 382. Among luting cements.-::c than the tooth: A. Both 'A' and 'B' are good ind icators D . Wa ter-Pu mice. Ar ticulating ribbon B. 10 microns nar rowe r C.ining luting . None of the above 383.. 25 microns w id e r 379. 100 microns to 110 microns B.mixt ure C. A stone die from polysulfide impression is usually :---. Explore r B. If careful te c hnique is followed . I to 1. Slow speed rotating ins trumen t D .M MCQs lor PGs In Prosthodontics 378. Zinc phospha te C.gent on tooth after removal of te mporary restoration can be removed through fo llowing except: A. C.5 minutes D . iO microns w ider B. Zinc oxide eugenol D. 25 microns narrower D . 5 to 5. 3 to 3. More reliable indicator of occlusal contact is: A. Working time of pol ycarboxylat e is about: B. 2 microns to 5 mic rons 381. the marginal adaptation of a casting can be kept to: A.. Calcium hydroxide B.5 minutes 378 0 379 C 380 B 311 B 312 0 383 II Printable Copy to DrEzaby . shear thinning is a property exhibited by: A.5 minutes .

Fixed Partiat Denture Prosthodontics @ ]
384, Prior to cementatio n w ith zin c phos phate, loolh can

be prepared by: A. Air ab rasion B, Applying a coating of varnish C. Both' A' and' S' D. Applying citrate
385. Prior 10 us in g polycarboxylate cement, the tooth should be prepare d by: A. Applying varnish B. Oxalate treatmen t C. Both 'A' and 'B' D. Applying citrate

386. Ther;{peulic occlus ion for fixed parlial denture was first dtscrib ed by: A . DAmico B. Stallard and Stuart C. McCollum D. Gysi
387. W.tX·~ddfd (add-on) tfchniquf of devtloping occlus ion in wu is credit ed 10: A . PK Thomas B. Meyerson C. E Payne D . Stua rt 388. Centric cusps are othe rwise known as: A, Functional cusp B. Stamp cusp C. Shear cusp D . Both 'A' and 'B' arc correct 389. laterosurlrusion is: A. La teral and downw ard B. Lateral and upward C. La teral and pos terior 0, La teral a nd a nterior

3M8

38511

3M8

381e

188D

3898

Printable Copy to DrEzaby

M

Measlor pas tn Prosthodontics

390. Latuosurtrusion demands: A. ~per grooves B. Steeper ridge a ngles C. Both 'A' and ' B' are correct D. Shallow groovt>S 391. GuateT immediate side shift tails for: A. Lon ger cusp height B. Mesial positioning of oblique grooves in the mandible C. Both ' A' and 'B' D. Mesial positioning of oblique groove in maxilla 392. In laten.J movements, dEed of mediotrusion is seen in: A. Ipsilateral canine B. Contralateral canine C. Both canines D.lncisors 393. Non-working condyle is otherwise ta iled as: A. Translating condyle B. Rota ting condyle C. Orbiti ng cond yle D . ' A' and 'C' are correct 394. Proximal box preparation for precis ion attachment use d mu st have following dimensions: A. 2 mm facio lingua J, 4 mm occlusocervical, 4 mm mesiod istal B. 4 mm occlusocetvical. 2 mm mesiodistal, 3 mm faciolingua l C. 4 mm occlusocervical, 2 mm mesiodistal, 4 mm buccolingual D. 3 mm occlusocervical, 2 mm mesiodistal, :; mm buccolingual 395. For a s mall cas ting, the casting pressure required is: A. 50 to 60 psi B. 100 to 120 psi C. 15 to 20 psi D .5 to 10 psi
390 0 391 B 392 B 393 0 39. C
:tH C

Printable Copy to DrEzaby

Fixed Partial Denture ProslhodonlJes

M

396. Pickling refl'rs 10: A. Using 70% hydrochloric acid B. It is done for base me l~l alloys C. Both 'A' and 'B' D. 50% hydrochloric acid for gol d alloys
397. Borax;lS flux during mdting mdal does following

uc:ept: A. Prevents oxidation B. Increases fluidity C. Increases strength of the metal D . Minimizes porosity
398. Holtl'st zone in a flame of gu· .. !r torch is the: A. Inner most zone

B. Reducing zone C. Oxidizing zone D . Combustion zone

399, Asbestos liner hn following advantages txcept:
A. Prevents contaminating metal from crucible B. It bums du ring casting C. Insulates metal from crucible D. Facilitates melting of al loy
400. Transfer of cnting ring from burnout furnacl' to thl'

casting ma chinl' should bl' donI' in: A. < 0. 1 minutes B. < 1 minutes C. < 1.5 minutes D . < O.S minutes
401. Agl' hardening of thl' gold alloy casting can bl' donI'

by A. B. C.
3"D

following txcept: Bench cooling Immediate quenching Quenching after 15 minu tes D . Heat soak' at 200°C

me

3M II

39111

4008

40111

Printable Copy to DrEzaby

Orien tati on of wax palle rn in the cas ting rin g helps A. Developed during occlusal adjustments C. Frankfurt Horizontal Plane is: A. Natural dentition B. Has an teroposterio r and lateral component 401. 10: 402. Is rarely found in natural dentition B. is more relaled 10: A.5 to 1 mm long anteropos teriorly D . D. B. Is 0. Porion to orbitale Lower borde r of porion to o rbi tale Lower border of porion to upper border of orbitale Upper border of porion to lower border of orbi tale 406. Occurs in everyone B.A Measlor PGsin Prosthodontics A. Comple te denture-s C. Thielemann's fo rmula. Helps in all adults C. Formed in complete dentures D. Freed om in ce ntric: A. B. D. D. C. B. Place the casting rin g in the machine Decrease the heat Achieve changes in expansion of inves tment Allow gases to escape easily 404. C. Both 'N and 'C' 405. Freedom in ce ntri c: A. Occlusion in articula tors D . C. Is in all of the above 402 0 403 C 404 0 405 0 408 0 401 0 Printable Copy to DrEzaby . Fo ll owing are ty pes of ring liners ucept: CellulOS(' A ccramic material Asbestos Polyethylene sheet 403.

Fixed Partial Denture Prosthodontics

M

408. For less Bennett movement: A. Cusps should be longer B. Ridge and groove direction should be distal C. Ma)(iIlary anterior lingual concavity should be more D. 'A' and ' B' and 'C' are correct
409. Following (.:actor will affect cusp h .. ight, ridg .. and groov .. dir..ction and lingual concavity of maxillary ant .. rior t ..eth, all thr .... : A. Rotating condyle direction B, Inter condyle distance C. Bennett movemen t D. All of the above
410. Uses of incisal pin and tabl .. is aU except: A. Setting incisal guidance

B. To Wa)( up anterior res torations

C. Maintain centric relation
D . Maintain vertical relation
411 . If incisal guidance of the patient is too s teep, in th ..

cast: A. It has to be changed B. Incisal table must be customized C. Incisal table must be changed D. All of the above can be done
412. Schuyler incisal tabl .. has following except: A. Long centric pin

B. Centric pin C. Center pin D . Off-set Pi n
413. Long c.. ntric pin of S<.:huyler table can b .. raised upto: A. 3 mm
B. 4 mm C. 2 mm

D.1 mm
401 A 41H1 C 410 0 411 B 412 B 413 C

Printable Copy to DrEzaby

M

Measlor PGsin Prosthodontics

414. In full mouth re(onstru(tion: A. The clinician determines amount of freedom in centric B. Occlusal adjustments requ ired de termines freedom in centric C. Bo th ' A' and 'B' are corred D. Amount of discrepancy betw~n centric occlusion and centric relation determines the amount of freedom in cenlric 415. Curved indsal pin: A. Is p resen t in dentatus articula tor B. Helps k~p the (onstant radius for a short distance C. Helps maintain centric relation D . 'A' and'S' are true 416. Co mpensation for changes in ce ntri( relation can be done using: A. Curved incisal pin

B. Changing offset incisal pin
C. Changing central pin D . None of the above 417. A simple face bow is used 10: A. Mount the maxilla to a transverse axis of the Temporomandibular joint B. Mount the maxillary dentition 10 infraorbital notch C. Mount mandibular cast in relation to maxillary cast D . Mount maxilla ry cast in relation to hinge axis 418. The error of usi ng simple fa ce bow: A. Is great when face bow is not self.cen tering B. May not be clinically significant if centric relation check bi te is less than 0.5 mm thick C. Is about 0.2 mm anterop,osteriorly if centric relation check bite is 5-10 mm D. All of the above
414 A 41 5 0 418 0 417 A 411 8

Printable Copy to DrEzaby

Fixed P• ..u.1 OerIture Prosthodontics

M

419.

Tru~ hing~

uis is oblain",d by: B. Kinematic face bow A. Twirl bow D . All of the above C. Slidematic face bow

420. Following."", limitation. of simpl~ articulators ucept: A. Ecrentric movements a re unrelated to the patient B. No provision for movement into centric relation position C. It holds the casts in vertica l dimension D . Centric Occlusion in not accurately defined 421. Arbitrary Hing~ Axis is loc at ~d tragu s: B. 10 mm an te rior A. 13 mm posterior D. 13 mm anterior C. 20 mm anwrior

to

422. Condylar path of a simple articulator musl be sel al: B. 30 degree A. Zero degree C. 70 degree D. None of the above

423. Ear pie~e f;l.(e bow localn. hinge axis 10 an enor of: B. .r 5 mm A. :t 0.5 mm C. :t 1.5 mm D. :t 2.5 mm 424.
using arbitrary face bow for simple articulator, intinl 'l'dge of ma ~ ittary anterior 1'I''I' th should be .,--;,-C":c abov~ low~r m~mb~r of Ihe arti culator: A. 32 mm B. 50 mm C.54mm D .60mm
Whil~

425.

'" build-up Ditching from shoulder <lrea afte r ini tial A. Porcelain is removed
B. The die is ditched lill the base around the cervical

C~rvical

T~c hniqu~:

margin for better c xposure of finish marg in C. It is done around thc base of a working casl for Pindex Syslem D. The groovcs are made on the base of Ihe cast for retention

Printable Copy to DrEzaby

11 uses two coats of die space r B. 15 mm in mediolateral "d 20 posteriorly C. Uses soft Removable Par tial Denture Framewor k Wax on occlusal two-thirds and blue inlay wa)( on cervical one-thirds D _ This technique helps in equal expansion o f investment in all di rections 428. excep t: A. Foll owing ar~ tm~ for Dual Wax Tec hnique. Uses hard inlay Wa)( on cervical two-thirds and soft inlay wa)( on occlusal one-thirds C. except: A.ru 426. Mandibular condyl~ measures upto: A.od 10 posteriorly 430. Me a s lor PGs In Prosth odontics Gu~n Porc~lain ref~rs A. Following a re tme for Eamu T~c hniq u e. Associa ted with styloid complex D . 10 mm in mediola!eral and 20 post{'riorly B. The C. Material is supplied in two colo rs D . mm In anteroantero- mm mm mm '0 '0 antero'0 antero· Eagl~'s syndrom~ consists of following. The D . Fracture of calcified ligaments C. Tinnitus 428 B 427 B 428 A 429 C 4:tO 0 Printable Copy to DrEzaby . Spacer must not be applied to ce rvical margin 429. Produces approxima tely 25 microns die spacer C. The B. Disturbance of s ty lomandibular process B. 20 mm in mediohteral "d 10 posteriorly D. 30 mm in mediolateral . Uti lizes two types of waxes for fabricati on of patterns B. except: A. The to: green discoloration that occurs after firing freshly built-up ceramic dark e{(eet at the margin of ceramic restoration type of staining porcelain for cha racterization 421.

Overs ized posts 435. I mm B. Prdabricaled pon tic 437. (). 1000 m illiseconds 434. 5<J. Advocated by D'Amico C. Each chewing cyde has ol duution of olbQUt: A. In over·denture!. 60-100 microns 433. the preferred height of covered portion of retolined tooth is: A.Fixed Partial Denture Prolthodontie. 100-200 microns S. Range of threshold for detecting objects between ocdu5al surfaces of teeth is: A. 500 milliseconds C . long centric applies to all but one: A.70 microns die space r B. 10-12 mm S. in over-dentures require: A. CiI5t'pi»1 coping:. 0-7 mm C. 2 mm C.4 mm 0 .5-7 mm 431 B 432 C 433 C 434 C 435 B 438 C 431 C Printable Copy to DrEzaby . Retainer D .. 200 milliseconds S...4mm 436. Freedom in cen tric m S. 8-60 microns D. Amount of lateral shift of condyle during lateral movement of mandible Is: A. Me ta l frame wo rJr. low temperature burnout C. 431. Pontic S . C. Both 'A' and 'B' D. 1-6 microns C. May be ei ther anteroposte rior or la te ral 432. Used mostly in full mouth r(' hab ili ta tion D. Pontip is a: A. 700 m illisecond s D . 3mm D .

Centric rela tion position B. Both 'A' and ' 8 ' D. Maximum intercuspa tion C. 438.S degrees 440. Curvature of condylilr path is in mediotrusive rathu than protrusive. Thickness of shim s tock is about: A.5 inch C. except: A.1 mm B. 0. Mo re.075 mm C. 0. 0. 0. Average latual shift of condyle during lateral move· ment of milndible is: A. 10 deg rees C. A se nsor un it B. 10 deg rees B. 0. 0.S degrees O .0. 0. More. Tek·Scan Sys tem hilS following. Vertical dimension 442.0005 inch 441. by about _ _ .75 mm 0 . Chewing pa tte rn of pat ie nt B. A built-in printe r w ith compute r D . Less. Fo llowing ilre close· packed position of mandible except: A.M MCOI for PG. Provides immedia te information m C U8 0 «0 D 441 II 442 8 443 8 Printable Copy to DrEzaby .ln Pro. Functionally genuated path technique records: A. A. A milling unit C.5 mm 439. Lateral move ment of mandible C.05 inch B. Maximum protrusi o n D.005 inch O . Ma ximum righ t lateral 443. Less.thodontlc.

. For making castings for three unit fixed partial dentures B. Preimpregnattd Fiber following txapt: A. Long span B. Polyethylene C. Types of casting techniques . Vect ris Reinforced Composites are B. Carbon D. A. OVA system a nd Zfiser systems are: A.. Glass B. Thf most co mmo nly uSfd fibfl15 in dfntill applin. Nt'ed for excellent appearance O. Can be used for 'A' and 'B' D ... Counter-bevel 448. Occlusal isthmus D. Linguoproximal step C. Are similar to hydrocolloid duplicating materials 449. Fluible die material is used: A. Contraindications for Fibe r Reinforced Compositf Prosthesis ilre following exapt: A. A. Pa rafunctional hab its C. Ribbond 446. Is used for making P rovisional Restorations C.Fixed Partial OentUI1I Prosthodontics m 444. FiberKor C. Porcelain 445.. Tooth preparation for Fiber Reinforced Compo!iite FrD indudes following u" pt. Types of cast-and-die systems C. Types of c rawn remover systems D . Patients with unglazed po rcelain restoration 447. Types of articulator systems B. Deep chamfer finish line B. Splint-It D.tions for Rfinforcfd Composites ilrt following txctpt. D 445D 44SC 447D «IB 449B Printable Copy to DrEzaby .

10 to 15 microns D . Graphite C.ey They of OVA system is th~t: allow for expansion of stone are very esth. 453. Following are true for Milling procedure except: A. Dicor MCC D . Meas for PGsin Prosthodontics Adv~nt~gu A. Uses cylindrical carbide burs C. Sanidine B. Manganese spinell 455. In-Cuam Spinell co ntains fo llowin g as major crystalline phase: A. The si ze of Mica crys tals prestont in Dieor MCC is: A. Followin g materials can be used with Cerec system except: A. Procad 454. Uses fine diamond points D . B. light pressure is used 452. They They Th. C. I to 2 mic rons C. Vi ta Mark II C. Consists of using conventional straight hand pie<:e B. In-Ceram Spinell B. Red or green pigments B. 25 to 32 microns Printable Copy to DrEzaby .etic for ceramic work delive r gentle vibrations on crown can withstand high temperature 451. D.M 450. While snibing survey linf"S on fo ll owing s hould be used: A. 10 to 50 microns B. All of the above can be used b~ked porcel~in. Zirconium oxide D. lead pencil D. Magnesium spinel! C.

3 to 10 microns C. 100 to 120 microns B. Crack bonding C. Loops and adhesive damp 461 . O ne of th e following is wrong for Richwil crown remover.Sanidine 458. A. Leads B. Multiflex cou pler C. 1 to 2 microns B. Ta ngential s tresses D . Involves using an adhes ive resin tablet C. Leucile strengthens ce ram ic due to: A. A flexing device to flex the c row n D . Consists of making a perforati on in crown and lifting it up B. Coronafl u crow n remover cons ists of following tXCtpt : A. Leads D. Zirconium Oxide is: A.Fixed Partial Denture Prosthodontics 456. Leads m~lhod: to to to to multip le crac k deflections s tress concentrat ion at the ends breaking of crdc k forma ti ons Ion Exchange mechanism 457. Using sharp o pening action to remove crown D. Air-driven device B. Tying a floss to the res in 456 A (57 B (5' B 4Si C 460 C (61 A Printable Copy to DrEzaby . Mica structures increas~ m by s trength of th e c~ ramic following A. Crack deflections B. Leads C. 40 to 50 micron s D. When Leucite is a cryst"lline phase. Heat Pressed Ceramics contain mainly _____ " crystalline phase: A. Magnesium Spinel! C. the size of particles 459. Leu cites D. Thermal tempering 460.

Masseter 464. Buhnergraph or Veri Check analysis C. ViScu la r knee refers 10: A. Varicose veins under the tongue B. Integrity of Mticular surfaces 467. Vascular rl'turn to the heart from knee 465. Alignment of the condyle-dis k assembly D . Leaf gage used by Long D. The Merritt EZ CiSt Pos t System consis ts of following except: A. Right latera l pterygoid B. To show that Bimanual technique is most consistently repu tabt~. In Pro. Dawson used: A. Plastic rod C. The proper functioning of the ligaments B. A stick of thl'rmoplastic resi n B. V('rticuiator method B. Following are positioner muscles of ma ndible excep t: A. The pterygoid plexus behind external auditory meatus D . A metal rod of canal size D. Downward 466. Correc tness of condylar position C. lor PG. C. Left latl' ral pterygoid C. Bilateral manipulation of mandible during recording ce ntric re lat io n helps verily the following tx<:rp t : A. Tl'mporal muscles D.th o<Ion1lc. Anteriorly Distally D. 462. Can be used for direct technique 463. An the A. Dcprogramming device by Lucia 462 C 463 D 464 B 465 C 466 A 487 B Printable Copy to DrEzaby . imp roperl y made anterior Jig for deprogramming mandible will disp la ce the condyle: Mesially B.S Mea. A shunting s ystem for blood behind the condyle C.

Used for fixing Pantographs D . Aqualin r d~ vic~: A. Is meant for Functionally Generated Path technique B. If disks can maintain their alignment with condyles during function C. Used for muscle deprogramming C. D. s plints: Also referred to as muscle deprogrammers Are designed to p osition mandible in a specific relationship to maxilla Thcy align the condyle-disk assemblies Used when a centric re-Iation should be corrected 470. Both 'A' and 'D' 4n. Postcrior bite plane C. D. C.Fixed Partial Denture Prosthodontles m 468. A Dir~ctiv~ Splint is contraindicated in followin g conditioll$ txcept: A . Chu A. D. Used along w it h c a sting rings for hyd roscopic eKpa nsion 469. Full occlusal splints D. If condyle and disk can be aligned correctly D. C. Anterior bite plane 471 . B. Fo llowing are diffuent types of pe rmi ss ive s plin ts except: • A . If it unlocks occlusal incline contacts D . k bit~ art iculato rs: Have check bites on the incisal gUide table Condylar pa thways are limi ted to straight lines Condylar pathways are customizable Condylar pathways are curvilinear and are adjustable _B 4eg A 470C 471 C 472 B Printable Copy to DrEzaby . Splints with occluS<11 fossae D . P~rmi ~s iv~ A.

Use of broadric]. 90 degrees c. It is ~ fully adjustable articulator C. 20 degrees C.. 30 degrees B.!\IS. Set P. Condylar path is interchangeab le D. Fabrication of customized condylar path "'quires: A..rn Meas for PGs In Prosthodontics 473. 135 d('gr('es Printable Copy to DrEzaby . Hinge Axi s Angle refers to: A. Following sl.lIh Arti culators ha ve horizontal condy lar path sd at: A. 45 degrei. Cannot accept stereog raphiC clu tches 474.'r incisor to a line d rawn from incisal edge to center of the condyle D .arch tracing C. Use of gothic . Is a specialized oct. Use of simple stereograph. Inclination of true hinge axis to condylar pa th C.illary incisor to cen ter of the condyle 478. plane "analyzer D .. Both 'A' and 'B' 476.c recording B. Inclination of rna". 110 degrees D.'s 0 . Is a type of device to measure condy lar angle 477. It is a type of gothic arch tracer 0 . Inclina tion of hinge axis to condylar path B. Average Hinge Axis Angle is: A. teme nls for Denar Combi articu la tor are tru e ucept: A.I1 plane devke S_ [t is a type of face bow C.15 degrees 475. Inclination of low!. Pankey-Mann ins trument: A. 45 degrees B. It is a set path articulator B..

Cuspid prote<: teG occlusion 481. Using fo)!. Us ing face bow moun ted casts with corre<:1 condylar pa ths D .1 group function D . Tripod contact m B. Envelope of function C. Ante ri or group function B.Fixed Partial Denture Prosthodontics 479.to-foss" contact D. Late ral group function D . Group function B. Posterior disclusion are methods to accomplish posterior disdus ion except: A. Ana lysis on natural teeth through selective grindig C. Cusp lip· to-marginal ridge contact ' 80. Cusp tip to fossa con tact C. plane B. Periodon tal support B. Most practical method for discludin g posterior teeth is: A. Cusp to fossa occlusion 483. Cani ne guided occlusion C. H armo ni:wd an lerior guidance with bo rd e r movements B. Following are choi ces for workin g sid!! ocdusion in natural dentition except: A. exupt: A.Mann instrument Printable Copy to DrEzaby . Cusp tip. Mashed·potato occlusion refers to: A. A. Anterior group function C. Phonetics 484. Use of Pan key. Following 482. Surface-Io-surf"ce cont"cl C. Parti. Lateral group function D. Altering Anterior Guidance depends on following main factors except. following are common methodti of utablishing an acc!!pbbl!! occlusal plane in natural dentition.. Esthetics D.

A plastic flag cOrulisb of 486. Consists of C'x lra hard base plate wax B. Following art' true fo r Occlusal Plane Culling Guide rxupt: A. Is used on tower p osterior teeth D. An art icula tor C.M MeQs for PGs In Prosthodontics Analy~er 485. Shape of occlusal surfaces can be carvC'd by this method D. A survey centC'r B. It is used if only upper teeth arc to be restored B. Following are true for Fossa Contour Guide exupt: A. Can be easily modifit-od to accommodate Bennett Shift 488. Is prepared on the articulator and is scribed by the caliper 487. A mouth temperature wax reinforced with base plate WH C. Is kept on the tooth to be corrected to established occlusal plane D. It is a Mush-bite C. They record the border pathways B. Occlus ion is generated by the patient while functioning Printable Copy to DrEzaby . Ensures non. The assembly of Broadrick Plane following exupt: A. Caliper set at 8 inch radius D. Advantages of Functi onally Ge nerated Path ate following napt: A.interfering accommodation of upper palatal (usPS C.

Can hold casts for single tooth re~ loralions using Functionally Generated Path B. Qualitative analysis by measurement of the strains induced in a photoplastic wafer B. Involves frequency analYSis through phototelemetry during occlusion D . Interferences C. Interferences B. Photocdusion refers to: A.Oglesby spring Articulator ~xcept: A. An anterior slide in natural dentition can be produced due 10: A. BULL C. Study of temporomandibular joint during occlusion by photoclastic measures 419 C 4110 0 491 II 4n II 493 II Printable Copy to DrEzaby . Does nol require bite record C. DUDL to the line of closure to the arc of closure in protrusion 'C' are correc t B. Interferences D. MUDL D . Can hold casts for extensi\'e tooth restorations using Functi onally Generat{'d Path D. Following <lire true for Johnson. Both 'B' and A. BUBL 492. Yerticulator B. Twin-Stage Occluder C. Quantitative analysis by IT\{'asurement of the s trains induced in II photoplastic wafe r C.Fixed Parllllli Denture Prosthodontics em 489. The basic Selective Grinding rule for anlerior slide is: 493. Each incline of the tooth can come in contacl when Articulat or is closed 490. A Jectron yig 491. Following are instruments that can be used to mount cuts for Functionally Gener~ted Path Technique except: A. Johnson-oglesby Ar ticulator D.

It improvcsocclusion by increasing vertical dimension 4948 495C 4960 497B 4HA 4990 Printable Copy to DrEzaby . 10 mm C. 15 mm B.iv(' analysis of occlusion B.'v('s s tr(. Distal Displacement Theory fefeB to: A. Limited mouth opening due to tonic contraction of muscles due to infection B.20mm about MORA art true but one: Ta kes the condyle to re truded position Brings mandible forward and dow n wilrd It is a repositioning device for mandible It recaptures disc in in ternal derangements of TMJ 499. Pivots ate created on the mandibular 2nd molar areas C. Following are true for Pivot Appliance. All A. C. D. Smm 498. Pivots are created on the maX ary 2nd molar areas ill B. Protedive muscle splinting refeB to. Chronic resistance of a muscle to passive st retch C. Costen's a rgu ment that mandibular overc\osure can \XC V! if vertical dimension is more D . It reli(. Sudden involuntary contraction of muscles 496. RcduU'd jaw motion to avoid pain due 10 movement D. Uses ul trasonic methods D. D. A. B. Both '8' and 'C' are true 49 5. T ek·Sn n S)'lIlem: A. Used for q uanti tative analysis of occlusion C. Distal migration of premola rs in the long abse~ of molars B.M Meal for PGlin Proithodonlici 494.'ss on TM] D. Lateral mandibular monments have a mun valu e of: A. Monson's theory that distall y displaU'd condyle can causc deafness due to mandibular overcl osu re 497. Is used for qUil Iit at. Monson's theo ry th a t the articular disk gels displaced during ma ndibulM closure C. except: A.

Bio logic width rders t. A change in hue with change in luminance C. Is a mandibular orthopaedic repositioning device 504. Unsupported bridge D. Molecular disorganized surface layer of a polished metal C. Cantile ve r find partial den tu re is othelWis e called as: A. Essig Splint: A.. Combined w idth of connective tissue and epithelial attachment inferior to crestal bone D.. Extension bridge C.tyer except: A. Molecular organized surface layer of a unpolished metal SOl. [s used to correct TM] problems C. Molecular disorganized surface layer of a unpolished metal B. Change in brilliance whe n translucent ceramic is applied D. Combined w idth of epithelial attachment and wid th of connective tissue C. It used to stabilized fractured or repositioned t('{' tn . Width of epithelial attachment B. Following an' not true for Beilby l. Metamerism effe<:t B. 500l II Printable Copy to DrEzaby ..Fixed Partial Denture Prosthodonttcs Cii] 500. Removab le bridge 500 B 501 B 502 D 503. Bezold-Bruck e effect refers to: A. and alvffilar bont' B. Sectional bridge B. Is used to correct occlusal discrepancies D.: A. Formation of in ternal opacity in ceramic during firing S02. Combined width of connective tissue and epithelial attachment superior to crestal bone S03. Mo lecular organized surface layer of it polished metal D.

Red c. 2-0. 0. Swing loc k denture B. Triple tray bite of natural dentition D. Spring fixt. Modified chamfer at labial or buccal s urface D .3 B.6 mm mm mm mm thickness thickness thic kness thickness buccaUy in o the r axia l surfaces on occlusal surfaces buccaUy 510. Finis h margin for Sleeve Coping is: A. 0. Ave rage dimensions of a Sleeve Coping are following. Primary colors of subtractive color s ys tem following. 0. Magenta D. Proteo.:t B. except: A. Made of Type IV gold casting B. 0. Knife edge all around 505 II SOlI C 507 II 501 A ~ a StO C Printable Copy to DrEzaby . t xap t: A.3·0. Mus h bite refers to: A.5-0. Spring loc k Bridge is a lso called as: A. except: A. Sl~ve Coping has a conical taper 509. Inter-occlusal record made in impll"Ssion paste B. Chamfer at buccal and lingual aspect C. Inter-occlusal reco rd made in beeswax without record base C. Shoulder at buccal and lingual aspeo. Foll owing m are true for Sleeve Coping of CSC Prosthesis. Cyan SOS.:ts abutmt'nt tooth from caries C. Yell ow B. Spring cantilever bridge 507.4-0. It furnishes support for gingival tissues D .5 D. Inter·occlusal record made in protrusion of mandible 506.>d partia l d enture Co Spring p la te denture D.4 C.G M for PGI In Proi th odontici eal S05.

002-0. Sleeve Coping ap ical third B.001-0.000 inch D . Amount of milling to be don e at cervica l third of CSC Pl'05thl!'sis is d d l!'rminl!'d by follo wing. Amount of yield of mucoperiosteum B. Anteroinferior rela tion B.003-0. Sleeve Coping occlusal third C. 0. Posterosupe rior D.010 inch 512. It p rotects the other teeth B. Angle of the milling device provided 513. Number of abutments C. The main di ffe re nce bd wee n CSC Prosthesis and Hybri d Tel l'scopic Prosthes is is in: A. Poeleroinferior C. 0.010-0. It is a mutually protected occlusion 515. It is a type of balance-d oa::Jusion given for romplete dentures C.015 inch C. AVl!"age fi5(hu angl e is about: D. exupt: A. The amounl of s pace Ihal mu s t be prese nl bet ween Slel'vl' Co ping and Seco nda ry Crown at thl!' gingi val third of a CSC pl'05the5is is: A.l. 5 degrees A. 10 degrees C.Fixed Partial Denture Prosthodontics M 511 . All of the above 514. Fo llowing arl!' trul' for Caninl!' G uidl'd O(clusion. 45 degrees 8 11 C 8 12 0 5 13 C 8 14 a 51 5 D 5 1& 8 Printable Copy to DrEzaby . tXCf'pt : A. Occlusal forces D. th l!' ( ondyll!' is in with the glenoid fossa: A. 0.ndibl l!'. It is a type of occlusion D. Design of the secondary crown D.002 inch B. 15 degrees D . In cenlric relation position of th e m. Anterosuperior 516. 0.

red axial wall of looth 10 rece iv e a full ve neer crown is: A.M Measlor PGs In Prosthodontics 517. 18% D. 28 microns ot teeth is: B. Teeth lilil.'s loration rl. IOcm D. PI. 5 degrees D.should bl. 1 mm C.'r(l. Nasion gu ide C. 6 degrees B.40em C.'r. Un ila teral.5 mm C. :> 5 degrees D.'Xlracll.' B. Ml. 3 degrees C.mic rl. None o f Ihi:! above 518.'d . 1.5 10 I mm B.5 mm reduclion 524. 10 microns 520.'d: A.. >20 degrees C. I 10 1. 20 microns D. :> 10 degrees B.'ntage of epinephrine present in gingival retra cti on cord is: B. 2t03mm D .25 em 523.' I. excep t on e: A.5 to 2 mm D . 3 to 3. 12 degrees 522. Average intrusion A.3mm B.nce of: A. 80% C. 0. OrbitalI.30 cm B.'quires on fundional cusps: A. Average discrepancy between ce nlric occlusion and Cl..'nlric relation in complete dentures is: A. Path of insertion for fixed prosthesis can be e valuated from a dist. 43 mm superior to incisal edge of the maxillary centrals_ 519. 28% 517 0 51' B 51' C 521) 0 521 B 522 A 523 C 52' e Printable Copy to DrEzaby . Following are differenlthird-poinls of reference.'tal-cl. 56 microns C. optimum taper of the p rep. 8% A. > 25 degrees 521.

Hydroxyapati te D . D . < 5 perce nt D . All of the above 527. Setting lime of addition silicone impression material is: A . Calcium carbonate C. > 1 pe rcent C. 6O-6S pe rcent C. The gingiva l bevel serves the following pu.Fixed Partial Denture Prosthodontics raa 525. Calcium phosphate B. I percent B. 6-8 mts. < 10 pe rcent 530. 4-5 pe rcent C. 40-45 percent 528. Watn content of enamel amounts to: A. 5 percen t 0. The main minnal of enamel is: A. Not pe rmeable to ionic materials in pul p D .-85 percent B. Not pl'rml'abll' to ionic ma terial in saliva B. %-97 pe rcent D. 15-20 mts. Me tal on bevell"<l ma rgi n is burnishable e. The min e ral content of enamel on a weight buis is: A.rposn: A. < 1 perce nt B. 9-10 mts. A lap sliding fi t is prod uced at the gingiv a D. 81). Sodium (Juoride 531.3-4 mts. B. Pe rmeable to ionic materials e. Only occasionally permeable to ion ic materia ls 525 C 52e D 527 C 521 D 529 A 530 C 53\ B Printable Copy to DrEzaby . Enamel i~ : A. e. 526. Wea k enamel is re m oved B. The amount of organic malin in enamel amounts to: A. 2-3 pew mt 529.

Iraction of g ingiv. Fluoride. ~ . only O. Use 01 8 perc .droclion.. Calcium. 534.' content O..lliM"~ i. 8'1' zinc chloride .-come spher<>i da l in shape D. Use <>1 ek"clric~1 instwments OT chemical agents D. ~<)dium and phosphate Th~ u. With a low si lica content 533. m 536.n.c~ eI~menl!i: A.. pos. With a high 511ic. following tr.. 1Rcy b<. Meas forPGsln ProsthodonUcs Enlm~l contain. zinc.et.. They torn d lCHy red C. sodium and magnesium B.~ of vacuum invuting i.cent Epinephrine B.. Single <Ollon strand D.. sodium.M 532. ! into ~ bUllon B.ible otages: A . Removal of gingival B.. the casting gold pas.. Removal of gingiva l C.. Fluoride. Gingilage of the marginal gingival can by eleclrical iflSlrumenlS Ii ."al tl . zill<:. Con5<'rvltive . 8% epinephrine 0. a nd magn". COllon stra nd dipped in Al .40% zi"" chloride 532 A uac U4D 53SC SHC 537C Printable Copy to DrEzaby .H through the following vi . Use 0/ 1 pt'. O n M ing hut~d.. With no silica con t~"I1t B.1 method for . nl Epinephrine C. Fluoride. All 0/ the above 535. Wi th an a" erage silica con tent C. B.um only C.ibl~ only wilh an invutment: A. 20% ta nnic acid C. They ronge."" by chemical agents dipped in alum crystals 537.action be achieved by: A. : A. ~nd 7. e>:upt: A. The radic. Followi ng dru gs can be used u che m ica l agen l$ 1m gi ng..

that it is stable erupt: A.ul indine on the upper and the mo. Pr<nthodontlcs M 538.-d by the a mou nt of overjet C.ide il pivoting and if th ~ re A. Guides the ma ndible into centric positiQn as the mandible retrud.. Th e Protrusive and Bennen Shift r« ordings: A .al indine on the IQwcr k". D. It . no «n lcr of rotation of a be H j ng~ 540.nl\lr.os. Guid. of the lower molars 5SI C 5H C 540" 54t C 54~ B Printable Copy to DrEzaby . th en: There is nQ condyla r pa th There is nO hinge ""is There i ~ no Benne tt movement There i. A. l ocator all' following. It should D. no side s hift. "educe a cusp tip D.. I cu.p incline: A. hQuld h e~vy .. the ma nd ible into cen tric positiQn as the m andible protrudes 8. Vary ve ry lightly 541. Re 'lul". Deepen the fQSS. i. D. C. Is not influenc. When interceptive contact involve. If th condyle on the working .rtJel o.'h B. It should 8 .... Indn l Gu i danc ~. Reduce thedi.. 8. Reduce ~ial incline on upper and distal incline of lower C. ~ i s-orbital plane C. It should c. Always rema in romt"nl to the true a>:i. Are not constant to the true .. Is not influe nced by the amount <>I ove rbite 539.-orbital plane D . Are c~ trcmely variable 8 .0 be stab le be read ily ad justable be light in weight 541 .Fb:ed P.m~nl5 Axi..l.

Locked bite due to deep vertical overlap C. The buccal slopes of the lingual low er cusps D . working and balancing posi tions C.. When tee th do not occlude in cen tric relation D . Long centric contacts 543 B 544 B 545 D 546 B 547 D Printable Copy to DrEzaby . When one arch is la r ger than the other B. When the mesial incline on the upper tooth is reduced B.. Dual quadrant restoration with TMJ disturbances C. When the fossa is deepened D . Contraindicalions fo r occlusal t'quilibration art' following. Premature contacts o n the non-wor king side D . Occlusion re la ted TMJ problems D. Tt'm poromandibular joint disturbances du e to occlusal imbalanct' art' followin g. When reducing th e non-working sidt' contacts. When the distal ind ine of the lower is reduced 544. Ind ica tions for occlusal t'quilibration are: A. The lingual slopes of the upper buccal c usps 545. except: A. A tip of the cusp is reduced: A. Its opponent C. When funclional occlusion is being restored in its enti rety 547. Severe occlusal wear B. When it is an interfe ring contact in rentric. Its adjacent tooth in the same affh B. dt'cide which s upporting cusp mainlains bellt'r ct'nlric ocdusion and then reduce: A. Periodontal problems C. All of the above 546. Disharmony be tween centric occlusion and protruSion B.M Meas lor PGsin Prosthodontics 543. except: A.

Long span bridge B. All the above 551. Good crown length for the abutment 549. Mutilated tooth B. Triangular shaped central incisors B. Young person with large pulp D. An surface related to the cranium B. except: A. A fixed faclor D. A steep curvature 548 A 548B 5~C 551 A 552B 553C Printable Copy to DrEzaby . Firm pressure on the tooth can be applied B. fill 548. Mutilated tooth D. except: A. Variable factor C. ?ingle tooth replacement C. Contraindications for Inlay abutment are following. Minimal occlusal forces D. the plane of occlusion is: A.Fixed Partial Denture Prosthodontie.tions for Inlay abutment are following. An imaginary surface that is related to the cranium C. Less time to prepare the abutment C. Short span bridge C. Poor alignment of abutments 550. Dowel pin retainers ue contraindicated in: A. Caries frl"(' dentition C. Minimized vibration 552. The anatomic curvat ure of the occlusal alignment B. A fixed (actor D . Less annoyance to the patien t D . In fixed partial denture prosthodontics. except: A. Most of the cases of fixed partial dentures have incisal guidance as: A. Indic. Advantages of ultra·high speed hand pieces are following. The oppasing functional occlusion 553.

M Meas for PGs In Prosthodonllcs 554.l\ plant will product : short cusps of poste riors long cusps of posteriors short ante riors long anteriors 555. When a knift t dgt ridgt is enco untertd in tht ma nd ibula r a nterior rt gio n.lSps 559. 551 C 559 C Printable Copy to DrEzaby . Too occlu5. which is reverse in nature products: A. 557 . Adapted labial to the ridge in positive contact C. Adap ted lingual to the ridge in positive contact B. $$$ 0 sse . Appt'ar in disdusion 558.. A nat Curvt of Sptt will product: A. Short cusps for molars and short cusps for premolars D. Too short molar cusps and too short premolar C\. Too B. Short cusps for molars C. Adaptt'd labial to the ridge in a negative contac t D . A Curvt of Spee.. Long cusps for molars B. Short an terior teeth 557. Appt'ar norrn. Appear too shor t C. Long cusps for molars and long cusps for premolars C.l\ D. Too D. Too C. Long cusps for molars and short cusps for premolars B. Long anterior teeth D . us ually tht pontic is: A. A short radiu s Cu rve of Spte will produce: A. Too long mola r cusps and too short premolar cusps D .. A hi gh A. Appear too long B. Short cusps for molars and long cusps for premolars 556. Adapted lingual to the ridge in a nega tive contact 5:>4. Too long mola r cusps and too long premola r cusps B. Too short molar cusps and too long premolar cusps C. Too low pl~n t of occl usio n will ca use poste rio r cusps to: A.

onnt'. Indsal-mesial thickness C. Causes fracture of the casting 565. C. D. D. Supply mechanical strength to the prosthesis C. 560 A Fracture of the casting Turbulence and porosity in the casting No changes in the casting Shrinkage porosity 561 C 562 D 563 C 564 B 565 B Printable Copy to DrEzaby . Shrinkage porosity C. txupt: Contact areas Centric occlusion Centric relatiot:\ Functional stability 564. connedor ue following. Mesio-dislal thickness 562. B. Following ue the factors fo r incomplt'tt' su ting of the mt'tal framt'work.. d in 01 ' oIsling during its A. e. Their dose adaptation to the crest of the ridge B. Correct occlusal function 561.. txupt: A. Too small sprut rtsullll in: A. ck . B.to r thai is importolnt for jill strength is: A. Sprue that is improperly positioned Coluses: A. A. Rt'quirt'mt' nts of . Provide convenient embrasures D. Buccolingual width B. Tht' dimt'nsion of tht' ."'pt. Over trimmed pro)(imal contacts of the retainer 563. No alteration in casting D ..Filed Partial Denture Prosthodontics M 560. Following factol"!'l should b . Distortion of casting B. No parallelism between abutmenlll C. C. try-in.. Undercuts present in abutmenlll D. ch . Occlusal-cervical thickness D .. Nodules present within the retainer B.

S Mea. A solder joinl must have: A. Facilitates use of copper bands while making lube impression D. Richmond Crown: A. Presence of undercuts D .'Sists occl uS<l1 forces better S66 D 567 C 568 B 569 C 570 C 571 C Printable Copy to DrEzaby . 76 deg ree/minute D. A non· rigid connector is selected: A. except: A. For long span bridges D . Is a least conserva tive finish ma rgin C. The accepted rate of increase in firing tempe rilture for po rcelain is: A. A triangular periphe ry S68. A partial and convex periphery B. Is an intracoronal ret. 120 degree/minute 5069. Is an in traradicula r retainer D. A bridge may become loose because of following. Gives a well -defined finish margin B. Mobility of the abutmen t 570. A complete and concave periphery D.liner C. A partial an d concave periphery C. 25 degree/minute B. lor PGs In Prosthodontlc. 566. When the alveolar bone is receding C. Is an ext racoronaJ retainer 571. Rt. When the alveolar bone is excessively reduced B. 100 degree/minute C. As a bro ken·stress joint 567. A shoulde rleu preparation: A. Solubility of cement C. Torque B. Cannot be used as an intraradicu]ar crown B.

Benne\! movement C. txupt: A. All the above 574. 1 min ute B. An arrangement of teeth for functiona l and esthetic goals B. 15 minutes 575. 2 minu tes C. Angular s lo pe of the condyla r pa th D. Melting the meta l D. An idul occlusion rtfen to: A. ri dge and groove direction. for a fi n d partioll dtntu".gis troltions olre required to olccur. A face bow tra nsfer C. Terminal Hinge Axis position B. 5 minutes D . Intercondy lar distance D. Following". Good w ax pattern B. is: A. Angle Class I 576. Arrangement of teeth that is conducive to ocdusal sta bil ity C. Direction of the rotating condyle B. it has to be coo led for: A. All o f the above 5120 5710 514C 575e 578 8 Printable Copy to DrEzaby .lttly mo unt the casts on th e olrticuloltor to reprod uce Ih~ man dibulolr movements. Th e critical ttchniqut in cas tin g procedu".572. a nd lingual conuvlty of uppe r olnl rrior teelh: A. Befon: qut nch ing a gold cas ting. Investing the pattern C. Follo wing fador will a fft<:1 all Ihe three bcton: cus p h tlgh t. Both ' A' and 'B' D . Beyron a nd Bergstrom points 573.

and greater intercondylar distance: A. Gr('at('r th(' lingual concavity of the maxillary anl('riot tC<'th B. Occurs in everyone C. All of the above S77B 571 A 5nD 5SOA SliD 5UA Printable Copy to DrEzaby . Thickness of cement film D. Gruter oUlwud-upwud direction of the rotating cond yle in vertical plane. Following are reasons for a cemented full casl crown that requires occluul g rinding. Is rarely found in natural dentition B. Long('r the cusps C. Poor temporization 58t.!nd groove direction on maxillary teeth 579. Freedom in cent ric: A. Both 'B' and 'C' ar(' corr('ct 578. Swallowing B. Has anterior-posterior and [ateral components B. ucepl One: A. Dewlop<. The small e r the Bennett Movement: A. Case moun ted in centric rela tion B.><! in comple te d('nturcs D. Form('d in restorations C. Freedom in ce ntri c: A. Centric occlusion function D. Occlusal interferences will interfere with: A.5 mm long D . gru ler Bennett movement. Speaking C. All the above 580. Shorter the cusps B. Longer the cusps C. All of th(' abov(' 582.M MeQs lor PGs In Prosthodontics 577. Greater the maxillary anterior lingua l concavity D . Is best when about 1. Both ' A' and 'B' D. Case moun ted in centric occlusion C. Mor e dis tal the ridge .

when the casts art' mo unted and later the spacer is removed and th e centrk s top is moved anteriorly. Physiological rest position in natural dentition: A. The condylar elemen t should bind o n the shaft housing D. Centric occlusion re mains the same C. Incisal pin will be centered on th{' table (ante roposteriorly) 8. A Hanau H2 PR articulator: A. Both 'A' and 'B' are correct D . Is zeroed with the incisal tab le set to ze ro B.ue correct 584. Is zeroed with the condylar ele ment centric stop set to 30 degrees 585.erocd wi th the condylar elemen t «'ntric stop set to zero C. except: A.u1iculator. The most re lative retrusiv{' position of the mandibular cast would be 3 mm D . Should be ta ken in considera tion only in multiple res to rations D . Inc isal pin wil! not be centered on the tab le (anteroposteriorly) 586. The cond ylar ele ment seats in di rect contact with the (entri( s top wi th the incisal pin centered B. except: A. The maxillary cast wil! usually have adequate room to move in a protrusive direction C. The housing for the condylar shaft res ts lightly agai ns t the surface of the condylar eleme nt 513 B 584 C 515 A SI6 C Printable Copy to DrEzaby . On a uroed Hanau H2 PR . Should be used to rela te the mandibula r (ast to the maxillary ( ast B. All the above .Fixed Partial Denture Prosthodontics CW] 583. when an Hanau H2 PR articul ator is adjus ted correctly. Is 7. Us ually. Should be co nside red in a single res tora tion C. following events take place. all of the following <lTe correct.

Maxillary poste rior teeth B. The Whip-mix and the Hanau H2 PR articulators are similar in fo llowing manner: A. If the condylar indin. A is the correct answ er 589. the incisal gu ide table is se t using: A.tion is moved from 0 to 70 degrees following events would take place: A. All of the abov(' 588. Not related to vertical over lap B. Maxillary cast woul d move backwards C. Slide in cen tric D . Cuspid guidance if they are pn. Non(' of the above a re correc t 590. following may affect the latrral pos itioning of the incisal pin: A. When the maxillary incisors lire mi ssing. Maxillary cast would move upwards B.'S('n l 587 A 588 0 589 0 590 8 59' 0 Printable Copy to DrEzaby . In Hanau H2 PR articulator. All of the above a re true 591. Centric re lation record D . Indina tion of the condylar gUidance C. Both have provisions for adjustm('nt of intercondylar distance C. Cen tric stop adjustment B. Both 'A' and ' 8 ' a re correct D. A steep in cisal guidance is: A.M Meas for PGs in Prosthodontics 587. Anterior gllidance C. Not import"nt for neuromuscular harmony C. lnterocdusal record is used to S('t condylar guidance B. Simulated on the articula tor by the late ral wings of incisal table D . Both ' A' and 'B' arc true D .

entric on the casts.inematic face bow C. To help in fabrkation of wax patterns for a restoration 593. The FC pin should be below the surfare of the indsal table C. To fadlitate an increased vertical dimension D. Both '8' and 'C' are true 596. Single restoration 594. The k. If the vertical dimension is not to be changed. Can be adjusted in length B. Full mouth re<:onstruction C. Both'S' and 'C' are wrong 595. To prevent wearing down of stone cast C. When there is no freedom in .Fixed Partial Denture Prosthodontics Ci9"] 592.tn inciul pin that: A. Vertic. Splinting procedures D.tion of an adjustable anterior pin . Has an off~set pin related to the arc of closure of the articulator • D . Is curved with radius related to the axis of the articulator C. A 5<:huyler pin and table is used for following. . An ear piece face bow D .tl dimension may be maint. relation D.entri. except: A . To maintain .. One of the following is not a fun. one of the following is wrong: A.. Complete dentures D. nd table. All of the above 592 A 593 C 5114 A 595 0 598 B Printable Copy to DrEzaby . A. True hinge axis is obtained by: A. A Schuyler pin and table should be used B.tined by . a straigh t indsal pin ca n be used D. CR registration bite B.

May be ' A' or ·B' D . Is not centered on the articulator C. Both ' A' and ·C' 600. Th e O rb ital po int~r ilnd the damp on a si mple fa ce bow are used to r~l a le foll owing. Is centered on the articulator B. To locate the third point of reference for mounting the maxillary cas t D . May be ' B' and 'C' are true 601. Is related to the motion of the TMJ 8. C. Maxillary cast to an infraorbital point B. Is always indicated C. A th ick c~ ntric occl us io n int trocclus al record may resu lt in follo wing. May permit both vertiCil! and horizontal movement D. Is not centered to the axis of an articulator 599. A s imple articul a tor: A . Is always practical D. Both 'A· and 'C' are correc t ~91C 593 A 5"8 $(lOA &0 1 0 &02 A Printable Copy to DrEzaby . Absence of contac t of teeth during function 602. Premature con tact in centric occl usion B.R 597. Ma y permit face bow record C. exupt: A. f. Often gives better r('sults B. except: A. c~ bow: Loca tes the centric relation Locates the terminal hinge ax is Is a nonear piece device Re lates the mandible to maxilla 598.. Use of a la rge-size articu lil tor: A. interfert'nces in eccentric movements D. D. A s imple fac~ bow: A. B. Absence 01 cen tdc stops C. With an ear piece face bow c. MeQs for PGSln Prosthodontics Th ~ s im pl~ A.

20 B. 40 D . a simple articulator. Removing wax mesially from contact areas for maxillary supporting cusps D . Absencl!' of centric stops in thl!' mouth signifil!'s following. tXCI'pt: Moving the oblique ridge distally Reducing the axial contours of maxillary lingual cusps C. J2 mm D. 10 mm B. 11 nun C.lbility for lateral mo vements: A. Temporomandibular joint dysfunction B. Excessive occlusal adjustment D.ed by following. B. The condylar indination to use the simple face bow must be about: A. In be A. Infraocclusion in restoration C. 30 C. Balanced occlusion C. txCl'p t : A . Molar group (unc tion B. Moving the oblique ridge mesially 605. Anterior open bite 604. 70 607. the occlusal interferences un minimiz. Usage of following will lead to lus t errors in a simple articulator that hu np.Filed Partlal Denture Prosthodontics A 603. 13 nun 603 C 504 0 &05 B 606 0 1107 C Printable Copy to DrEzaby . Shifting of teeth has occurred 606. Cuspid guidance only D. The distance betwee n the articulator axle and the ur piece pin when the cond ylar inclination is set to ri ght position is about: A.

Maximize lateral condylar guidance C. To mount it in ~ntric occlusion with a shim inserted between condy lar elements and condylar stops C. Use of arbi trary hinge axis C.[W21 Mcaslor PGs in Prosthodontics 60S. 62 mm 609.f' bow. The most common nror that O(c urs during mounting casts in cen tric relati on occurs due to: A.ubilrary mounting of thf' muillary whf'n " face bow is not uSf'd. To mount it in centric occlusion with PR adjustment moved cloc kwise B.-". thf' inciui f'dgf's of th f' muillary anlf'rior tu lh should be. Maximize horizontal condylar guidance B. Wh f'n a ce ntric rela tion rf'cord is not utilized to mount Ih f' mandibular cas t on a arliculator. f ollowi ng cli nical informa tion is necessary when a protrusive check bite is not ava ilable to set th e condylar in clina ti on: A. Incorrect third point of refere nce &08 C 609 C 810 B 611 0 812 C Printable Copy to DrEzaby . To mount the cas t in c('ntric occlusion with PR adjust('d to minus zero D. Balancing cont3(!S 612. Maximize tooth gui d ance O . 58 mm 0. 50 mm B.--_ abovf' the surface of the lower rof'mbe r of the articulator: A. Balancing interfe rences D . To mount the cas t in centric occlusion with PR adjusted to zero 611. Angle of eminentia B. Both ' B' and 'C' C. Both 'B' and 'C' are co rr~ t 610. the mf'thod uSf'd to mount the cast is: A. Incorrect centric relat ion check bite D . Whiif' using an fOar pif"f' fa. the most important principle to follow is: A. 54 mm C. In .--. Curved articubtor condyla r guide B.

The ear pit"Ce face bow is more accurate 616. Patient not trained properly D. Third point refer~nce is more important for a ear·piece face bow than for the nonur·piece face bow. Failure to use thoroughly softened wax for recording B. Protrusive bite that is s traight 617. Face bow positioned incorrectly C. Muscle hypertonicity C. Use of PR adjustment C. The ear pit"Ce does not rest on the transverse axis of the articulator D . Protrusion not straight while taking the re<:ord D . PXCl'pt: A. beca us e: A. One of th e following is most accurate in taking a centric relation to mount lower cut: A. Use of shim between condylar element and rondylar s top D. lncorre<:t centric relation record 615. Facets of wear do not o ccl ud~ on the articulator. Muscle hypotonicity 614. The most common cause for the d ifference in condylar indination of about 7 degrees between sides. txupt: A. but they do in the mouth. Inadequate articulat o r design C.etting B. Use of centric relation chec k bite B. Not enough protrusion in taking the ret:ord B. Incorrect condylar s. The probable causes may be following. The nonear'piece face bow is not related to the hinge axis C. is: A. Protrusive record obtained too far forward Printable Copy to DrEzaby . The third point of reference for the nonear·piere face bow can be set at any point B.Fixed Partial Denture Prosthodontics Goo] 613. Inco rrect vertical relation D. The most common cilluses for an in correct centric relation record are following.

Grinding of Ihe working side results in s moolh gliding movements C. To grind tow~rd thl' intl'rfer{'nc{' B.S MCa. B. Grind in g of the balancing sid e results in smooth gliding movements B.'or PG. If required to be removed. Balancin g sidl' adjustment is completed wht'n: A. the casts. All of the above 620. BULL rule should be followed C. Teeth are no longer mobile D . Grind away from function 622.'n Prosthodontics 618. Adjust 10 c{'nlric rebllon C. On A. Following is trul' for cl'nlrk stops: A. Among ~ II the m ~ ndibular s upporting cusps and opposing f05sae.cu rsions D. C. When it ma kes premature contact in centric and not in lateral e:w. Only when it makes a prematull' contact in cent ric and lateral e:w. Should ne ver be re moved B. Dentin is smooth IIIB Ilec &20 A UIC '~ A Printable Copy to DrEzaby . Not to g rind o n mandibula r molar buccal cusp tips D . D.cursions B. centric oo:lusion and prot rusive relat ions C. When it is ~ prema ture con t~ct in «. In all thl' above cases 619. thl' cus p is ground: A. A rull' fo r adjustme nt of suppo rting buccal cusps a nd cusp ridges of mandibular molar tee th is: A.n tric rcl~tion. under very spt'Cific rules O. the fi rs t s tep in occlusal adjustment is: Mark centric stops and supporting cusps Ma rk balancing in te rferences and prematull' contacts Adjus t working side contacts Adjus t balancing side in t{'rferences 621 . May be rcq uirt'(\ to be removcG.

Lingual concavities of the maxillary anterior teeth are detennined by: A. Shank of the blade D. Molar guidance B.Fixed Partial Denture Prosthodontics CWS] 623. Triang ular ridges 624. During fabrication of wax pattern. The tip of the bla de B. th e first wax 10 be added should be: A. Su p po rting cusp tips B. the part of the waxing instrument that is huted to pick up wax is: A. In wn·added method of fabrintion of a wax pattern. Centric stops in fossa D. To protect the tee th from wea ring d own C. To isola te the occlusal contacts from mas tica tory sys tem B. Main aim of occlusal bile plane s plint therapy is: A. The dusting powder that is used for checking occlusal relation in wax patterns is: A. Zi nc stea rate D. only C. Condylar inclination. Mandibu lar moveme nt. Toot h guida nce. Zinc carbonate B. Nonsupporting cusp tips C. Midd le of the blade C. Diatomaceous earth C. mainly 625.md Ihe shan k 626. !TIJinly D . Non e of the a bove 623 '" 62~ 0 625 B 626 C 627 '" Printable Copy to DrEzaby . Calcium ca rbonate 627. To pre vent p ressure on the joints D . Full blade .

Belie ves in Ihat condylar path affects the incisal guidance D. Has a simplified condylar guide ml'Chanism B.S Meas for PGs in Prosthodontics 628. Complete mouth re<:onslruction D. Twin-Stage procedure for producing precise eccentric occlusal relations ca n be used for following treatment procedures. The anterior guidance c['('atN controls the condylar path 629. except: A. Single crown fa brica tion C. Tra ining flange pr05 theS<!S 621 C 629 D Printable Copy to DrEzaby . Has a prcrise anterior guide ml'Chanism C. Following is not true for the Twin-Ho by articulator: A. Occlusal diagnosis B.

Both 'A' and '8' D. Kennedy's class IV B. Both 'A' and '8' D . Printable Copy to DrEzaby .. Ke nned y's class I D . All tooth-suppo rted B. Ma ~ imum bulge area of the tooth C. A rl'monble partial denture may be: A. Functional forces C. All of the above . Following condition(s ) is/are also called as distal extens ion partial denture: A. Horizo ntal forces B. All tissue supported 2. De termined by surveyor D.Removable Partial Denture Prosthodontics 1. He ight of contou r is: A. Both 'A' and 'C' 3. Tooth and tissue supported C. A line encircling the tooth B. Forces against remov a l of p rosthesis 4 . Applegates class VI C. Stability is mainly against: A.

Both 'B' and 'C- 7. Assists direct retainer B. Rest: A. 'A' and 'B' Retention in •• A. Or precision attachmen t B.5 a lways: A. Inte rnal attachment: A.8 mm in width 10. Usu~lIy multiple C. On ocdusal surface •• Guiding plants are: A. Both ' A' and 'B' D. An undercut in re lation to tooth lies: A. Prevents displacement of RPD D. " " . <: 8 mm in width B.~ 108 j Meas tor PGs in Prosthodontics 5. Frictional ~ttachment C. Both 'A' ~nd 'B' D. Below the survey line B. Need not ha ve rest seat C. Above the survey line also C. 1. Palatal bar . • • Printable Copy to DrEzaby . > 8 mm width C. Contains internal rests D. Usually p~rallel D. Mainly offers stability D. Indirect reta in er: A. > 8. Usu~Uy single B. Both ' A' and 'C' are true •. . Frictional a edracorona t resistance retainer is through: B. Tight contact of retention arm with tooth 9.. M~intai ns all of the above n.8 nun width D. " '" " . Is placed on rest scat always B. Resists lever J ction C. Resistance of metal to deformation C.

Keeping minimum of 4 mm distance for major conne<. health of gingivallissue is ensu red by: A. Both' A' and 'B' are true D. Lingual Bar major (onnetlo r is filbricated using _ __ plastic pattern: A. Registers dynamic relation of opposing dentition B. Method 10 delem. Anatomical replica of teeth C. All of the above arC' correc t 16. Use of periodon tal probC' B. 6 gauge D. Keeping minimum of 6 mm distance fo r major connedor B.ine height of floor of the mouth is: A. Supporting tissues of the edentulous area D. Both 'A' and 'C' are correct 14. In removable partial denture. Minor conne<:tors joining major (onnC'(tor at < 90 degrC'C's E. D.:tor C.:tor 15. Functional impression refers to: A. IS gauge C. Records border movC'ments D. PI~nned A. Both ' A ' and 'C' 13. B. US<' of individu. Registers s tatic relation of opposing dentition C.alized D.Removable Partial Denture Prosthodontics [ 109 ~ 12. Both 'A' and 'C' 12D 134 144 ISC impre~sion tray leC 170 Printable Copy to DrEzaby . Functional ridge form B. Mandibular major conne<:tor Nonmovable soft ti ssues Both' A' and 'B' aTe true Maxillary major conne<. C.8 gauge 17. 12 gauge B. Functjonal occlusal registration: A. relief is required under. Use of straight probe C.

C. When the abutment tee th are canine in class I situa tion B. <0. Complrtt' palatr major connt'ctor is indkatrd: A.5 mm D. major connt'clor should: Provide vertical sta bilizati on Horizo ntal support Both 'A' and ' B' D. Anterior~posterior palatal bar 32. Orthodontic movement of tooth B. A A. Palatal strap C. Depth and width of beading of Maxillary cas t is: A. To ensure intimate con ta ct with palatal tissues B. Single palatal bar B. When there is less resorption of the ridges C.5 mm ~o l'C 32C 33 C ~C 35 0 Printable Copy to DrEzaby . To incorpo rate the valleys of ruga e in casting D. ::>0. Lust rigid palatal major connt'ctor is: A. Not be flexible 31. Bo th 'A' and 'B' Jre right D. When resistance has to be accomplished 34. ~xc. • • . Breakage of the res t 33. U s haped palatal connector D. 1.ij 112 ] Measlor PGsin prosthodontics 30."pt: A. To provide visible finishing line fo r cas ting C.5 mm C. Slippage of the denture C. B.5 mm B. Purpose of buding maxillary cast art' following. ::>1. Both 'A' and 'B' D. Rt'sts without suts can cauSt': A. To transfl'r major connec tor dl'Sign to investment cast 35.

Be sharply angled C. All of the a bove are true 40.10 Printable Copy to DrEzaby . Lingua l B..Removable Partial Denture Prosthodontics [ 113 ~ 36. 80th 'A' and '8' D . Tapering away from contact area C. Following are functions of minor connectors. Vertical arm of an bar clasp D .. Transfe r functiona l stress to abu tment teeth 37. except: A. The only minor connec tor that is fl exible is: A. That which connects dir ect retain e r to majo r connector C. Joining denture parts B. T hat which connects embrasure hook to ma jor connector 38. . <'" 90 degrees 368370 laD 3110 40C . Angl e Oil junction bt'lwt'(Jl ma jor connector il nd denture base minor connector should be: A. Abruptly e nd at the tooth B. Thickest toward lingual surface 39. 90 deg rees D. A minor connector located al e mbras urt' s hould bt': A. When a minor connector contacts tooth surface on either side of t'mbruu"" it should: A. > 11 0 degrees C. Centre D. Bulkit'st portion of a proximal minor connt'ctor is towards its: A . Join parts from one side of the prosthesis to o ther side C. Abu tment to prosthesis function D . Thinnes t toward lingual surface B. Buccal side C. Not have space between it and the toot h D . 90 degrees B. That which connects major connector to den ture base B. Inferior 41 .

chment of acrylic trays to the latticl' minor Conneetor can bl' I'stablishl'd by: A. Minor con nector for mnill . Two-thi rd the length of the edentulous ridge C. <= 90 degrees C. Sm . Att . > 90 degrees 47. Nail head retention Printable Copy to DrEzaby . ry dist . Two.thodontic. lor PG"n Pro. Tissul' stops ...ij 114 ] Mea. One-third the len gth of the edentulous ridge B.. 80th 'A' and 'B' D... x distal to termi nal . 80th 'A' and 'B' D. Engaging buccal slope of the residual ridge 46.tee u51'ful in: A.. Nail head minor connector C. 1 I'xtl'nsion dl'ntu~ base will ntend unto: A. One-third the length of edentulous ridge B. U window in rl'lief w . Entire length of edentulous ridge D.third the length of the edentulous ridge C. Tray adhesives B. Finishing Inde" Tissue stop D. Tissue SlOp B. Half Ihe len/ol th of the edentulous rid/ole 45. Minor connector for mandibular distal extension will e"ten d unto: A. = 90 degrees B.. Stabilizing framework during processing B. >= 90 degrees D . Entire length of edentulous ridge D.1 ntension denture base ~movabll' puti . Half the length of the edentulous ridge 43. Stops the tissue impingement by tray C..1 denture acts as: A. 42. Nail heads on the framework 44. Finishing line C. butment in dist . Finishing lin e junction with major connector should have angle: A.

5 nun D . Base of the rest sut should be . 1.""11 Printable Copy to DrEzaby . When it is not pouible to make the angle between rest and its minor connector < 90 degrees: A. 2mm C. Giving canine rest seat D.Removable Partial Denture Prosthodontics [ . Convex C.:al line angle B. 2 mm 0. Orthodontic correction of the abutment 54. Settling 01 a removable putial denture may occur due to one of the following renons.. More support for prosthesis C. rds: A. except: A. An angle > 90 degrees bdween rest and its minor connector may result in: A.2. Mola rs and Premolars: A. t lust _ _ _ _ fo. 5 ~ 48. Marginal ridge for a rest sut should be reduced by at least: A. .. Distolingual line angle D. Central fossa SO.lmm B. Give embrasure hook 4aC 41C 500 StC 5211 53. Marginal ridge C. Slippage of prosthesis B. Intrusion of abutment 49.5 mm B. Both 'A' and'S' D. Give a rest -less denture B. Distobua. 'A' or'S' B. Floor of the rest sut s hould be: A. 1 mm C. Either ' A' or'S' D.5 mm 51. Row of amalgam underneath restorations C. Use secondary rest on opposing side C.3 mm 52. Dee pest part of a rest seat is tow. Spoon·shaped D. Flat 53. 1. Improper rest design B.

also provides reten tion C.. . Tooth supported class III designs O. Internal occlusal res ts ire indicat ~d in: A. djaCfnt tffth: A. internal at tach ment al so provides ret"ntion 60. Occlusal rest B. Tooth-tissue supported class I designs B. Whfn intern"] occlusal rests are used.. 1 occlusal rt'st seats: A. Buccal reCiprocal arm B. Indirect retain er 59. Oifferencf b~tween internal occlusal rest and int~mal attachment is thai: A. Both 'A' and 'B' are true D. Interproxim. following st ructur~ of nmov. . Interproxim. All distal extension denture baS(' designs 58. Internal attachment 1150 provides support D. Wf .. Lingual reciprocal arm D. n use: A .1t OCduSlt rest C. Lingual retentive arm 550 sia S7C sse !i~D 60 0 Printable Copy to DrEzaby . Internal occlusal res. Do not avoid wedging effect by framework 57.oblf p. They avoid wedging by the framework C. Internal occl usal res! D . internal occluSJI rest also provides stabilization D.ortial dfntUff giv" both occlusal s upport and horizontal slabHiution: A. Both 'A' and '8' are true 56. Extend rar lingually C. Tooth-tissue supported class 11 designs C.~ 116 1 MeQs lor PGs In Prosthodontics 55 . Violate contact points B. It should extend far lingually B.Wh~n r~st s nts are pr~pa~d at intHproximal aru on two . Proximal retentive a rm C. They do not shunt food D .

Either 'A' or 'B' D. Rotation along a longitudinal axis 68. Both 'A' and 'C' are true 70. Away from the ridge C. txupt: A. of removabl~ partial denture longitlldinal nis: A. Is resistL'(\ by di rect retainer C. Rotation of . Horizontal shifting of denture base D. Occlusal side I58A 57C HA "D 700 718 Printable Copy to DrEzaby . Stabilizing minor connector D. Towards the ridge B. Movement around longitudinal nis if not resis ted. Vertical occlusal forces B. Occurs a round residual alveolar ridge B. Sinking in denture C. Indirect re tainer of Mov~m~nt r~movabl~ 67. Stlbili:r. Tissues of residual ridge B. Rotation s occurring about an nis through most post~rior abutm~nts aK: A. Both 'A' and 'B' are true D. Both 'A' and 'B' are true D. Diagonal and horizontal occlusal forces 71 . UnQue st ress to sides of ridge B. Ipsilate ral side B. Action of re tentive clasp C. Diagonal forces C.emovable partial denture in vertical axis O(curs due to: A. Contralateral side C. may cause: A. PlIrtilll d~ntur~ away from tissue is l'Hist~d by following. Both 'N and 'B' D. Is resisted by stress breaker Mov~ment about 69.ing components of ~movable paTtial denture act against forces "ting from: A.~ 118 1 Meas for PGs In Prosthodontics 66.

C. It is done on thicker tooth labiolingually nA 73B 74C 750 7e B TT A Printable Copy to DrEzaby . Horizontal C. Magnitude of lateral fo rtes may prese nce of following. Following are lrue for cingulum Test. In a tooth-s upported d~ntur~ the signifi cant that has to M considered is: A. D. B. by Ih~: Ocdusal rests·floor Internal ocdusal rest·floor Internal occlusal rest-walls Occlusal rests-walls 15. D. looth-s upport~ d~ntu"" th~ horizontilll forces ar~ re5ist~d C. It is mostly done on maxillary anteriors D. A lingual re5t: A. Frontal 14.R. It can be prepared just incisal to cingulum also C. On the mandibular canines Just incisal to cingulum Both 'A' and 'D' are true On steep lingual surface 11. Is nearer to axis of rotation D. Ungual ci ngulum rest sut may b~ prepared: A. D. fiXapt: intreilS~ ~ in th~ A.ntureProlthodontlcs [119 72. D. In a A. B. Vertital B. All of the above are true 16. Sagittal D.mov. Mostly done on mandibular anterior B. rxupt: A. • • . Is more esthetic D. Has less tendency to tip the tooth C. Ocdusion without lateral interference Abnormal jaw relation Malpositioned teeth in the arth Improper ocdusal plane mov~m~nl 73.ble Partial o. C..

ttd . Cervical end D . Mtsio-Dislal Jt·ngth of cingulum rest is minimum: A.5 mm B. Dentin D. Roor of tht cingulum rest St. Enamel C.lmm B.ical to lingual slope 81. 2 mm B.5 to 3 mm C.5 to 4 mm 83.t is plactd towards: A.lxial wall C.4mm 84. Labiolingual width of tht cingulum rtst is minimum: A. Distal corner C. Mesial corner B. 4~5 mm 82. The junction of enamtl and dentin B.. Usually rtst seats art loc. 1. Apex of the preparation D. Cep.5 mm e. except: A. 2.2mm D. Parallel to lingual slope D . 3. A lingual rest can bt plactd on following. 0. Perpendicular to lingual slope B. Laminate veneer B. 1 mm D.. Incisal·apical dtpth of cingulum rest is minimum: A. cingulum rest is: A. Floor of the preparation 85. Horizontal to lingual slope e. At cemento-enamel junction 79. Ml'Sial axial wall B. Composite restoration D.~ 120 MeaS for PGs in Prosthodontics I 7S.3mm C. Most apical portion of a cingulum rtst is: A. Approach for. 13C . Incisal end SO. 0 IS C Printable Copy to DrEzaby • • . Mandibular canine 788 nc &oC 818 82".t: A. Distal . Etched metal restoration C.l to2mm D.

except: A. Mostly preferred for maxillary Jnteriors 88. Where overly sufficient enamel is present C. 3 mm deep 90. Rest and denture base D. To provide stabilization 91. except: A. On compacted gold restoration 87. Ban ty~ rests are indicated in following. Unfavo rable leverage on teeth C. 2.5 mm deep B. Mostly used as auxiliary rests B.5 mm deep D. Less esthetic B. Where thin enamel is present B. On amalgam restoration placed on the teeth D. 1.Removable Partial Denture ProsthodonUcs [ 121 ij 66.5 mm wide. except: A.. To provide retention D. 1. Dimensions of an incisal res t seat is: A. Incisal rests: A. Full incisal rests are indicated in following. Causes ortho movement of the teeth 89. Rest and reciprocal Jrrn B. Both 'A' and 'B' D. Mostly used as indirect retainer C. Rest and retentive Jrm C. To provide anterior gUidance B. 2 mm wide. Parts that offer support for removable partial denture are following: A. Causes intrusion of anterior teeth D. 2. 2 mm deep C. In abraded anatomy of tooth C.5 mm wide. Disadvantages of incisal rest are following. Rest and minor connector MA UC MC S9C ~c 91C Printable Copy to DrEzaby . 3 mm wide.

thodontics 92. Both 'A' and 'B' a re true D . for PG. Any of the above 97. 1 reliiner mech. chieved through: A. Both 'A' and 'B' are true D... niCil retention in removible parti. A.. Either 'A ' or '8' D . Engaging an undercut cervically D. By t>ngJging a depression on tooth C. Primary retention B. y be . Retaining elements and denture bases B. in Pro. Denture bases of removible putiil denture offer. Retention for removable partial denh1re is obtained by: A. Mechanical retention C. l surface of the crown C. nism is: A. Secondary retention 95. Exlricorona) retainers may be: A. Primary retention B.. Secondary retention 94. Frictional resistance C. Both 'A' and 'B' D. Attached to the extem. A. Precision attachments HA 93C ~D MD ~B 97C Printable Copy to DrEzaby . Anyone of the above 96. Dimpling D. Mech.. Denture bases and minor connectors C.ij 122 JMea. Engaging the undercut intracoronally B. ) denture m . Rests and rest seats 93. Direct Retainers offer. Mechanical retention C. Placed on the extemal surface of crown B. Inlricoron.. Frictional means B..

" otherwise known . To prevent tran smission of horizontal forces to abutment 8.IComnal retaine rs may be of following types. txcrp t: A. Clasp type retainers C. Internal attachment B. Limitatio ns to un of Interna l attachment are following. A stress-breaker i ii a mus t in dis tal extension denture base when using intemal a ttachment. txcrpt: A. Eliminates visible utentive component 8 . lntracomnal attachment: A. Availability C. Kennedy 100. Has both 'A' and '3' 102. Extr. Size of the pulp B. Gives betler vertical support through a rest seat C.Removable Partlll Denture Prosthodontics [ 123 ~ 98. Chayes attachment 99. Chayes C. Attachment w ith f1~xible dips or rings D. Cost of the prosthesis 103. exc:rpt: A. Ney D. Dalbo B. To preve nt vertical forces to abutment C. Clinical crown-short D . 101. In tlacolonal attachments . Precision a ttachmen ts following. Internal rest seats C. Offers less vertical support D . Dalbo attachment B. for following reason: A. Any one of 'A' or'C' M D " II 100 II 101 D 10: II 103 D Printable Copy to DrEzaby . Intracoronal retainers D. Internal albchm~nt is first formulated by: A . To prevent rotational forces to abutment D .

All of the above are true 16<1 C 105 C 106 0 107 C 108 B 109 0 Printable Copy to DrEzaby .. Craddock 109. Thoe .. Help maintain pOSition path of placem'mt B." .'rge nce is present. clasp terminus s hould be pl.i'HlS is p la c ed C. Angle of cervical divergence l OS. Are prepared tooth . Cummer C. nd Ih oe tooth surf. pic. If grutl. Nearer D. How far into angle of cervical conve rgence clasp Ic rm. Angl{' of occlusal divergence C. Guiding pl~n n: A.. Dc Van A. Flexibility of dasp aIm D . At 106. Term Hei ght of Contour is coined b y: A. Kennedy D. Size of angle of cervical convergt'nct' B.d l. Term Suprabul ge is coined by: B... Craddoc k 108. Tilt of the cast 107.5: A. ~ height of clasp may be generating depe nd s on following. The amoun t of retention. Dc Van C.. the bette r D .ced contour: A. Far away C. Angle of cervical convergenc{' O.tl ~ngloe formoed boetwoeoen survoeyor bl . Away B..'rv ical co nvl.' . coe is known . Angle of ocdusal convergence B. More the number. Kenned y D .. ngll. Cummer B. except: A.u t faces C.' of cl.~ 124 1 MeQs lor PGs In PrOSlhodonlics 104.

Both 'A' an d 'C' are corre<:t 114. Its terminal retentive lip D. Retentive clasp /Inns in a tooth supported ". In rela tion to a ngle of ce rvical convlO'rge nre C.xupt: A. Functional movement C. Midway between origin and term inal end c. retention obtained is less because: A.. Advantage of wrought wire clasp are following. Flexibili ty is not proportiona te to its length B. Nonnally. Both 'A' and ' B' D . . In relation to gUi d ing plane 111. Ha lf round fle xion B. Universal flexion of round clasp D. All rotatio ns of removable part ia l denture 115. diameter ot a clas p ann is detennined at: A. Eve n though the le ngth of the retentive . Both ' A' and ' B' are true D. Gre ate r bul k D . Gre a te r tensile s trength C. Greate r flexib ili ty 110 B 111 D 112 B 113 C 114 A 115 C Printable Copy to DrEzaby . Its poin t of origin B. Edgewise flexing means: A.movable partial denture flex during: A. In relation to height ot contour B. Higher toughness B. It lies in several p lanes C. Unifonnity of "'tention between 2 clasps depends on Location ot retentive tip: A. Placement and remov.1 B.re of a bar clasp is longer tha n that of the circumferential clasp ann. A point of flexure 113. It li es in several planes thereby preventing its flexibility 112.Removable Partial Denture Prosthodontics 125 r ~ 110. It s tarts from gi ngiva l side D . That offered by cast clas ps C.

Removable PartJal Denture Pfolthodonta 127

r

~

122. In A. B. C. D.

a Ring Clup, th~ rdentiv~ ann ext~nd, from: Principal ocdusal rest to the tip Strut to the tip of the clasp Secondary occlusal rest to the tip Entire length of the clasp arm

123. Supporting ,trut for Ring Clup s hould be pla(ed on the: A. Retentive side of the clasp B. Near the retentive te rminal C. Both ' A' and ' 8' are true D . On the non·retentive side of the abutment 124. Redproution in a Ring Clnp originates from: A. Portion between secondary rest to tip of clasp 8. Portion between principal occlusal rest and se<:oridary rest C. Portion between principal occlusal rest and supporting' s trut D. Portion between set:ondary occlusal rest and strut 125. In dist.ti ~)(tension denture bUe, when there is no modifiution area exists on opposite side of the arch, dasp Is s uilabll.. at that side: a A. Ring clasp B. Reverse ring clasp C. Back action clasp D. Embrasure clasp 126. Undercut at th e point of origin of a clasp un be approa(hed by: A. Emb rasure clasp 8 . Back adion clasp C. Hair pin clasp D. Half and Half clasp 127. Following ue part of squeala of not providing double occluul rest for embrasure clasp, exupt: A. Separation of abutment B. InterprO)(imal wedging C. Food impaction D . Insufficient support for prosthesis
122 8 123 0 12-4 C 125 0 128 C 127 0

Printable Copy to DrEzaby

Removable PilttYlOenturti Pro,ttMKlonUes 131

r

~

143. While using T bac clasp, the mesial ulension serves to: A. Give retention B. Encompass more th~n 1800 contact C. Both' A' and'S' D . Offer all the stability
144. Bar type configuration of clas~ can al!lO be used for: A. Stabilization S. Reciprocation C. Both 'A' and'S' D . Retention

145. When a survey line is high: A. A bar clasp can be given B. A circumferential clasp can be given C. Circumferential clasp cannot be designed D. Bar clasp cannot be given 146. Infrabulge clasp is a type of: A. Akers clasp B. Circumferentially approaching clasp C. Sar clasp D . Ring clasp 147. lnfrabulge clasp is advocated by: A. Kenned y B. De Van D . Wills C. Applegate 148. In an infrabulge clasp, the clas p ,urn ari ses either hom: A. Denture framewor k S. A metal base or framework C. Border of metal base or cast against metal shim D. Lingual flange of acrylic or border of melal base 149. Following are features of infnbulge clasp, txupt: A. Split clasp arm B. Plated lingual aspect C. Ckdusally approaching retentive arm D . Absence of p roximal plate

Printable Copy to DrEzaby

Removable Partial Denture ProsthodonUcl [ 133

~

156. Composite supporl for remov,Ible partial denture can be found in following.. except: A. Class IV cond itio ns B. Extensive Class (If C. Class I conditions D. Class II conditions 157. Tissueward movem~nt Df the removable denture depends on following. except: A. Oa.:lusal lOild B. Quality of tissues C. Extent of denture base D. Material used for den ture base partial

158. Fukrum line is an imaginary line through which: A. Removable partial denture can rotate anteropos· teriorly B. Removable partial denture ca n rotale away from ridge C. Remova ble partial den ture can get displaced D. May ~e anyone of the above
159. Most common fulcrum line on dass I removable partial

denlure is: A. One passing through ri gid component of direct retainer occlusal to he ight of contour B. One passing through flexible component of direct retainer C. One passing through minor connectors of direct retainer below heigl'll of contour D . One through crest of the edentulous ridge 160. FOKes that try to lift the dfnture away from bual Stat
an! counter~cted

by:

A. Activation of dired retainer B. Part of removable partial dentu re framework located on basal scat area on opposite side o f fulcrum side C. Both 'A ' and 'S' D . Th e activation of both occlusal cest that acts as a indirl'Ct reta iner and a ~so the direo::t cetainer
'Sf!.a 111 D 1Sf! 0 ISi.a 1110 0

Printable Copy to DrEzaby

Fusing ceramic to metal D. Applying a thin film of acrylic layer on mc tal fo r chemical bonding 176 0 171 A 17' II 17' C 180 C 1'1 C Printable Copy to DrEzaby .l bilses in cl ude following. Whcn space is too limited C. Loops and Mesh D.~sin over the me lal 181 . Chemical bonding of resin to metal involvH following. Unaesthetic display of metal at margin 179. Resin bonding agent application C. Unsatisfactory ocdusi(Jn B. exupt: A. Metal teeth in removab le putial d e nture is indin ted when: A. All of the above 177. Required grinding of teeth C. Th in layer of "crylic .o rcelain fused to mela l 178. Nail heads B. Fusing acrylic to metal B. Fusing metal to metal C. Cast mctal C. Tube teeth are mad e up of: A. Abutmcnt tccth arc tilted 180. AUa. P. Can be both 'A' and 'B' D . Retention loops C.Removable Partial Denture Prosthodontics 137 r ij 176. except: A. Triboche mical co~ting refel'5 to a proced ure of: A. Prevention of extruSion of opposing tooth is needed B. Resins B. Lack of adequate functional con tours D . DisadvanlagH of tube teeth attached direc tly to met. Diagonal spurs D. Silica coa ting B.hment between aCl)'lk resin and metal base may be achieved by followin&: A. Both 'A' and'S' D .

Myla r strips D . except: A. Applyine alternate pressure over the artificial teeth C.~ 138 JMeal for PGlin Proithodontici 182. Lifting of the denture C. except: A. Denture base resin with 4-META D. Loss of occlusion B.lrtial denture is: A. Lifting of Indirect reta iner from seats D.ll extension denlun base removable partial denture. Metal denture bases can be used when the tissues are displaceable D. Using free flowing irreversible hydrocolloid under denture base B. Tribocheminl pllJoCedun involv" following.lIy 10 U5ess relining of remov. Rota tion of prosthesis around fulcrum line 184. 186. Me tal denture bases can be used B. except: A. Manife51atioM of loss of s upport for dist. Following are lrue for dist. Green casting wax C. except: A.ll exteMion denture base nn be following. Evidence fo r heavy occlusal contacts of natural dentition . More resorption occurs at the distal mos t end of edentulous area 112 0 1&3 B 114 B 1&5 C III C Printable Copy to DrEzaby . Acrylic-self cure 185. Pressing on tube teeth chemically 183.llble p. Besl method to check occlusion inlraon. metal denture base Ciln be replaced C. Articulating ri bbon B. Allowing tissue rest by removing the removable partial denture D . If relining is required. Silane C.11 ulension denture base include following. Methods 10 check loss of s upport for di5t. Sandblasting B.

Stress-brnkfT a bility of wrought wire clasp is due to following. Minor connector used for denture base and the denture base C. Cast clasp retentive arm C. Major connector from denture base B. Both 'A' and 'B' D. Action of stress·bruktr se parates: A. Split major connector 189. Methods to minimizt' stress on abutment tooth in distal extensio n dt'ntull' bast' are following. txcrp t: A. f'XUpt: A. Correct choice of direct retainer D. Effect of stabilizing components B. Harmonious ocdusion C. Wrought-wire clasp arm B. stress on abutment is minlmiud by following: A. Less coverage denture base C. txcrpt: A. Functional basing B. In a distal extension denture bue. Its taper D. Retention of the removable partial denture C. Broad distribution of stress D. Less coverage denture base B. Its round form 190. Rigidity of the connec tors in removable partial denture accomplishu following effects. Indirect retainer from direct retainer 117 e '" e 110 '" 100 e '" e "2 C Printable Copy to DrEzaby . Its flexibility C. Structural durability 188. uup l : A. Following are forms of stress-breakers. Anatomic basing 191. Its half round form B. Use of stress-breakers 192. Articulated prosthes:s D.Removable Partial Denture Prosthodontics 139 r ~ 181. Retaining elements (direct retainer) and distal extension base D.

Sleeves and cylinders B. B. Both 'A' and 'B' D . Wrought wire conn&tor B. Those with hinge a ction B. except: A. Movable joint s tress-breaker pennits: A . Hinge ac tion as well as vertical movement 196. Both ' A' and '0' D . Divided major connector C. Following designs of stress-b reakers have movable joint. Those w ith frictional movemen t D .~ 140 JMeal for PGlin Prosthodontici 193. Hinges C. except: A. Oaca design C. Horizontal movemen t of den ture base C. Double ba r major connedor 195. Lateral movement C. . Those allowing vt rtical movements 194. Vertica l mo vement of the denture base B. Stress-brea ker des igns with n exib te co nnection are following. Vertical and hinge movement 197. Hinge movement O. ""up t: A. Spl it majo r connector D. except: A. d u ign of s tress·breaker usn: A. Those with flexible connection C.. Split bars 193 C 194 D 19 5 D 11'" 0 1117 C l iS C Printable Copy to DrEzaby .. ASC-52 attachment 198. Ticonium-Hidden·Lock D . Ball and soc ket devices D .. Dalbo attachment O. Stress-breakers are of following types. Dnigns of strus-breahrs whkh pe nni! limited vertical and hinge movements are follo wing.

Removable Partial Denlure Proathodontlet: 149 r ~ 245. The reduced thicknl!:S5 of minor connl!:ctor contact guiding planl!: bu C(ally: A. Guiding planl!:s which are not in thl!: saml!: paraHl!:l plane horizontOlIly: A. D.xu"t: Body of extracoronal direct retainer Stabilizing arm of direct retainer Minor connector of indirect retainer D. Enhance cross-arch resistance to horizontal rotation C. To s upport the retainer arm and reciprocal arm C. C. Helps in stability 245 0 248 B 247 B 248 C 24g C Printable Copy to DrEzaby . Pl'('ven ts food trap more efficiently C. C. Guiding plilnn mily be contacted by following puts of A. pilrtial denture. Provide one path of placement B. Ensure intended aclion of retainer D. De<:rease cross-arch resistance to horizOntal rotation D. Helps to abut the artificial tooth more dosely to natural tooth D. Thl!: minor (onnl!:ctor that contacts thl!: guiding plant': A.. Has the same contour as gUiding plane Is thicker lingually than buccaUy Has both' A' and '8' qualities No change in thickness buccolingually 249. B. Eliminate food trap 248. ". Increase the food tnp 241. Minor connector of denture base 246. De<:rease the stabili2ation 8. Following ut' tht' inlendl!:d functions of guiding plann. exupt: A. Helps in more resistance to forces B. B.

Swiveling of the horizontal arm C. Can be used to placement of intracoronal restorations 2111 C 2aI B 26 C 210 B 211 0 112 B Printable Copy to DrEzaby . The platform in which base is moved B. Mai n advantage of jointed ho rizontal ann is: A. Best Surveyor for placement of internal attachment is: A. Both'S' and 'C' are true 272. Both 'A' a nd'S' a rc true D . Williams D . Wills B. It permits the horizontal a rm to be moved B. Best suited for analyzing cast B. Gimbal Stage table is advantageous in that: A. To design intracoronal retainers 268. To determine internal rests B. Tilt that can be given to the cast 269. To plan modifications of tooth surfaces D. Williams Surveyor: A. It permits the vertical arm to be moved to scribe the survey lines without moving the cast C. To locate undercuts C. following is the primary purpose of us ing Surveyor: A. Center of rotation 01 any tilt remains constant C. Degree of inclination can be recorded D . Ney C. In the undercut gauges D . Main difleffnce bttwefn Ney and Jelenko Surveyor is in: A. Jelenko 270. It cannot be tilted in any direction B. Has immovable horizontal arm 271 . Has jointed and sp ring-supported survey rod C.Remevebole Partial Denture Prosltiodontlcs [ 153 ~ 267. It filles the relation of the cast to the Surveyor D .

1 tilt of the cas t has to be considered for: A.80.79. To dete rmine retention 283. the bes t path o f placemenl Ihat can be selected is! A. Horizonta l D .m anl. To determine s tabilizing component of the direct relainer C. Vertical C.ior teeth are to be replaced. nt uo. Res istance of metal to deformation C.p<>s t". Wh. Between middle and gingival third O ..!. later. Gingival third of the tooth B. main aim of .l Denture Prosthodontics [ 155 2...Removable Parti. TI. Anlero-posterior 2 82. Clasp retenlion is! A.. Perpendicular to of placement B. To local" resl s"ab D ..rior tilt of th". EllSuring defin ite path of placement Ensure predictable clasp retention Both 'A' and 'B' They ma ke all the teeth parallel to each other p~ th 2. To avoid interferences D .. D. c . Both 'A' and '8' D . Righ t la te ral B. C. Tighl holding of tooth by the clasps 2. Non-retentive clas p arm is bes t placed at the: A. t during s urveying is to establish: A.. To provide pa rallel proximal surfaces C. Good esthetics 8 .81. Creating guiding planes on the axial surfaces 8.. Both 'A' and '8' 2S4. B. FunctiollS of guiding planes are! ~ A. On the occlusal third 2N C 210 C 28 1 II 282 II 213 D 2&4 C Printable Copy to DrEzaby . Between occlusal and midd le third C..

Same as of gold ~lloy: 323. Ch rome·cob. B. O~gru for chrome-cobalt should b~ A. Lesser rigidi ty o f minor connectors C. High modulus of elGsticity B. More than B. High density C. Less than D.cobalt alJoy D. Same as B. >= same as 324. Modulus of ~I~sticity of gold ~lIoy is: A. Ha lf of tha t o f chrome. D.~ 1621Meas for PGsin Prosthodontics 319. 'A' and 'C' 0 320 C 321 0 322 C 323 B 324 0 is 3 1' Printable Copy to DrEzaby . Lower than C. Higher than O.llloy has proportional limit _ _ __ gold alloy: A.l lt . C. has: High modulus of elasticity Low yield s trength High yie ld streng th 'A' and '8 ' of d~fonnation th~t exp~ded 322. Grea ter rigidity of major connec tors B.ostidty of chrome-cobalt advantag~ous for: A. Can be used when undercut is minimum D . Half of C. Lower than chrome.cobalt alloy C. Higher than chrome. High modulus of ~l. Chromium·cobalt has: A. 'A ' and 'C' 320.cobal t alloy B. One·third that of chrome·cobalt alloy 321. Low flexibility D. Ch rom ~·cobalt • A.

Rapid localization of heat a t site C. When gold alloy is soldered to chrome-alloy D . Soldered to den ture base D. Since oxidation occurs it prevents wetli ng of the wi re C. Electric solde ring is best for iltlilching wrought-wire to metal framtwork for: A. When gold allo)'s are soldered C. it un be: A. Fluoride typt flux can be used: A. Wrought wire hH to be embedded in framework 10 lie in two planes: A. Wrought wire retenti ve clas p arm when s tiected.~ 164 ] Mea. When chrome-cobalt alloys are soldered B. Ei ther ' A' o r 'D' D . for PG. Medium precious . For mechanical retention B. Mechanically retained in denture base D. To allow grain grow th quickly D. Electric soldering D. Cast 10 d.~ 334. Wrought ilnd gold wire un be of following type': A. 332. For both 'A' and 'C' U tc 3320 3330 3:W C 3S5 B 338 0 Printable Copy to DrEzaby . To allow surface oxidation for better bonding 336. Low precious meta l alloy C. Torc h solde ring B. Gas-oxygen soldering 335.ln Prosthodontics 331.mlure base C. High precious metal all oy D.1110). Oven soldering C. 'A' and '8' are true 333. For che mical retention D . High recrystalliza tion of molc<:ules B. Solde ring method prt:ferred for aUaching wrought wire to framework is: A. Ei the r cast or soldered or e mbedding in denture b.

in left lateral D . Coordina tion of occlusion. Explorer D . Coordination of occlusion in righ t lateral C. Cus p point is redu ced only when: A. It is in prema ture contact B. Michigan-O probe C. Anterior teeth are in prema ture contact only in ('(centriC relation C. Coordina tion of occlusion in ce ntri c relation 346.~ 1661 Mea. lor PGs in Prosthodontics 343. Commonly used probes for examination of periodontium for removabl e partial denture: A. Feel crest of the bone 345. Chec k for pocket depth B. It is in premature con tact in centric C. It is in premature contac t in eccen tric D . Fi rs t objective in selective grinding is: A. All of the above Printable Copy to DrEzaby . Coordina tion of occlusion in protrusive B. Chec k for bleeding on probing C. It is in p rema ture contac t bo th in cent ric and ecrentric relation 347. lin gual inclines of muillary anterior are conecled wh e n: A. Anterior teeth are in premature contact only in centric relation B. Ei ther' A' or'S' 344. Nabers probe is used to: A. Anterior tee th are in premature co n tact both in cen tric and ecce nt ric relation D. Check the furcation involveme nt D . Is Nabers probe B.

A parallellome ter can be devised D. A drill is used for precise milling C. Crown ledge or s houlder is contacled by. Prepared at the junction of gingival and middle third B. Prollima! plate minor connector C.thodontlc. Retentive arm N. True reciprocation. Is obtained when redprocal arm contacts tooth prior to the retentive arm D. Usuall y placed on the lingual aspect B. A hand piece altached to Surveyor is used 8. A. Faro hand piece can be used on Surveyor 370 C 371 D 372 C 373 C 374 D 375 B Printable Copy to DrEzaby • • . Mesial surface B. Is when continuous (orces are applied to the tooth B. Converging occlusally C. 'A' and 'C' are true 311. Redprocal arm D. Crown ledge is: A. Is when an orthodontic forces is applied to the tooth C. Slightly diverging occlusally 314. Embrasure hook 313. Both ' A' and 'B' D. Distal surface C. Lingual surface 312. Best to mill internal rcst seats or lingual groovt'$ and ledges on crowns is: A. Crown ledge is: A.Removable Partial Denture Pro. 171 r ~ 310. A. Crown ledge is usually prepared on the: A. Curved according to gingival tissues C. 'A' and 'C' are true 375. Continuous with prOllimal gUiding plane D. Buccal surfact' D.

A dynamic registration of occlusion helps developing hannony with following structures: A. Mutual protection D . Using impression paste C. Muscles C. Canine guidance pri or to occlusal rehabilitation C. Both 'A' and 'B' D. the diffeffnt schools of thought that exist aff: A. Advantages of ca nine guidance for mandibular move"ments is following. In ntablishing occlusion for nalural dentition. Canine is a st rong tooth 404. Join ts D.ij 176 1 Measlor PGsin Prosthodontles 399. Jaw relation records may be: A. It has long roots D . Prt<:autions to be taken during making of intert>cdusal record aR following. Incisal guidance prior to occlusal rehabilitation B. except: A. Functional B. Lined by hea t cure resin 401. Of all types 402. It should record the unde rcuts also on the tooth 400. except. It is the corner tooth in the arch C. Facial s kelet on B.: A. A. Of occlusal pathways D. Occlusion should be satisfactory B. Casts are accurate C. Transmission o f proprioception B. Static C. All of the above in Printable Copy to DrEzaby . By burnishing tin foil onto lubricated casts B. Shellac bues ca n be s tab ilized by following me thod. All of the above 403. Records should be trimmed D.

D. The mold shoul d be b roken away from the cast C. <: 45 minutes A. Breaking the mold 425. Prevents marring of cast during handling C. Mold should be preserved to pour second time 428. except: . Flexing the mold B. It should be retrieved from mold carefuUy B. Adnntages o f sprayin s cut are following. Applying a rubber suction tip C. 'A' and 'C' are correct In 426. " 60 minutes 427. Both 'A' or ' B' D. During duplication. > '" 30 minutes C. Ca re should be taken not to abrade the mold D . inves tment cast: Should be trimmed on a model trimmer Should be washed under running tap water Should be washed In slurry wa ter Should be trimmed with a sharp knife and residue blown off 429. Pa rtially C. While separating fres hl y duplicated cut: A. To supply needed water of crys tallization D. Gives a slimy.ting. 424. A. Immers ion of filled mold of a duplicating material s ho uld b e done for: 8. th~ filled mold i.ij 180 1 for PGsin Prosthodontics Mea. remonl of the muter cut from the mold "'n be accompli. Fully B. Facilitates adherence of pattern on the cast Printable Copy to DrEzaby . An A. During duplin. hed by: A. C. immersed water: A. B. Provides dense sur face B. > 45 minutes D . shiny surface D.

5mm A. 6 ga uge wal< pattern B. Far-lingually C. D. 4mm 435. Should be st retched to alter its thickness D . B.Removebte Pertlal Denture Prosthodontles [ 181 ~ 430. Whitt fabri cating wrollght-win> clasp. C. 8 gauge half round patlem D . Lingual bar wax patttm: A. 'A' and 'B' are true 432. 24 gauge pattern 433. constructi on for mi. 24 gauge sheet wax c. 6 gauge half round wax pattern C. 3mm C. Ba r typt rtt/linu is fanned fro m _____ wa x: 8 gauge wax 10 gauge half round wax 12 gauge half round wax 20 gauge half round wax 430D 4310 432 C 433 C U4C USC Printable Copy to DrEzaby . Rungs of tht ladd tr-lik t connt(tor an> plactd A.. On the crest D. tht foot is plactd: A. Just lingual to crest 431. Use of 24 gaugt pink shetl wax on tht d entUn> but acta: A. later C.2mm O. Helps to alleviate SQre spots. Helps in nexibility of the denture base 434. 6 gauge half pear Wal< form B. Both 'A' and 'B' O. Buccally B. if any. Facilitates trimming it accurately to the design B.or ap/lrt: B. Guiding Plant art madt up of A.

Concave in all di rections C. Flat in all directions B. 'A ' and 'C' are true 472. Resin teeth should be reduced by 2 mOl B. Press-on method 473. Mechanical retention D. The gold ocelu"ls which are casl. Rules for formation of interdental papilla for artificia l dentition w ere advocated by: A . Sprinkling tooth shade acrylic B. Fish 476. Process of attaching auylic resin teeth dirtctly to rttentive elements on metal frame with matching resin is known as: A.~ 188 1 MCQI for PGlin Prolthodontlcs 471. Fischer 475. An undercu t should be prepared along central fossa of resin teeth D . Frush D. Abou t 3 mOl of rtsin are trimmed C. Lcon Williams C. Cementing using zinc phosphate C. None of the above are correct Printable Copy to DrEzaby . Tube tee th attachment 474. The rules for varying height of gingival tissue at ce rvical portion of artificial teeth are listed by: A. Convex in all directions D . Fisher D. Frush B. When gold ocelu"ls are used for artificial teeth in rtmovable partial d entllres: A. Cementation of teeth B. Tylman C. lire attached to the denlure by: A. Interdental papilla in dentures should be: A. Sprinkle-on method C. Pressed-on method D . Hip pocrates B.

They havl' to bl' prepared on when cingulum is prominent B. fo r linguallrdge Rest Seal!. it can bl' tl'nlIed: A . Incisal occlusal rest 550. Base of the seat is very na rrow D.(ficil'n t p rl'paration C.515 549. Mid-cervical rest C. Embrasure occlusal res t C. Proximal incisa l hook rest ". It ca n be preparl'd on tl'eth wi th ou t prominen t cingulum so C S4I B S(9 C 550 A Printable Copy to DrEzaby . When an occlusal res l approaches ocdunl s urfac.ll rest B. Proxima l Occlunl Res ts: ij A. Embrasure incisal rest D. Basic facial o r lingual occlusal rest D... txcept: A. from midlingual Or midbcial s uriacl'. Not a vl'ry (. Proximal OCCIUS. Are located on mesial or distal fossa adjacent to edentulous space D .. Are located on mesial fossa adjacent to edentulous space 548. The thai are localtd in a mesial or distal (OMa adjacenl to anothtr tooth is calltd as: A. Arl' located on mesial or d is tal fossa adjacent to anothe r tooth c.Removable PartlalOenture ProsthodonUes [ 201 541. Following are tru . Are locatl'd in a meSial fossa adjacent to another tooth B. Occlusal rest B.

When the abutment ta be surveyed is severely tilted 571.. lw . It transforms contact point to an area 568. D'Amico 569. Done to correc t minor displacement of tooth C.. Cross C.. ntur . Kelly D. Can be done betw~n all teeth D. Kratochvil B. Carbon Mark . McCollum B. When there are too many abutments to be surveyed C.. Should be done for patients below 30 years B. Printable Copy to DrEzaby .. Both 'A' and 'C' are true w. base for partial d . None of the above 572. Gysi D..eth are dassifi .. Small space between saddle and abutment D . en O(dusat surfae. and nalura] t... Has metal only combined with metal retentive arm D . Ha s metal casting over which acrylic reSin is attached B.. except: A.d by: A . bee n propM...: A. Th . r for Surv.. Is undesirabl . prematuN: contacts b. Krol C. Incisal edge pr ...d: A.. A right-angl . yor is us .sign of d .. Enlarged space between it and abutment B. ntur. When the teeth have large space between them B. Kennedy 570. d by: A. Without any space between it and abutment C. Following are true for Interstitial Grinding. parition for Rut Seats hav . Wh e n two teeth tha t have only · a small space between them have to be surveyed D .. Combination Onlay: A.. 5&$11 ~$C UOC U tC 512 . Following d .Removeble Pertlet DentUn! Prosthodontics [ 205 ~ 567. Has acrylic lhlse 0'11'/ which metal is bonded using Silane agent C...

Foll owing facto rs d e tu mine MAP: A. Should enga ge an unde rcut forward of the axis of rotation B. Should not (. Placement o f indirect retainer C. Position of the occlusal rest D. Guiding s urfaces of teeth and retentiv e areas B. Follow ing an tru e for Thielemann's Diagonal Law. Reduction of the elongated teeth/tooth is required D. Minimal interferenCE' with natural tooth C. Elonga tion of entire side of one arch C. Engages the tooth when load is applied. A 150~ A Printable Copy to DrEzaby . Place men t of major conne<:lor D . Cause is pos terior deflective contact 603. except: A. Better esthetics D . Position of the guiding plane 604. Maximum natural cleansing action 602. Fo llowing are true for Infrabulge Re ta in ~r. 1501 A 602 A IS03 II e. Moves upwards during function D. except: A. It refers to elongation of single tooth into opposing 'p<>re B. Both 'A' and '8' 605. It is the bes t position of the cast on the surveyor C. Most Ad vantageous PO$itio n (MAP) rtiers to: A.o.ngage an undercut forward of the axis o f rotation C.Removable Partial Denture Prosthodontics [ 211 ij 601. Maximum tooth contact B. Face bow transfe r B. In a distal n tension d entu re ban the re tentive portio n o f the r~ ta in er: A.

.1l tions of upright position of humans . Epithelium tha t lin~ oral ca vity is: A.:anifes t. In C'volution. Both 'A' and'S' are true for this D. 5pe<:ialized . Para-kera tinized D. Non-keratinized B. uc. Biped al pos ture of huma ns: A. Pa ra-keratinized • C. " Printable Copy to DrEzaby . Was s tudied by McNamara 2. Keratinized D . Was Studied by Bennett C.p l : A. . Mucosa o n hard pal ate> is: A. Feeding mechanism D . . Influence on skull C.Section Three Complete Denture Prosthodontics 1. Keratinized B. Stratified squamous type 4. Th e lIl.SJ-h B. Has eHed on feed ing me. Maximum opening of rt\iIndible is possible only w ith translation 3.ue followin g.:hanism B. Non-keratinized C.

due to following reasons: A. Cementum B. the occlusal load is absorbed by: A. maxilla becomes nllrow. .~ 214 JMeas 'or PGs In Prosthodontics 5.. D. Medial belly of med ial pterygo id . Arthroidal moveme nt in Temporomandibulll joint occurs between: A. Both 'N and 'B' D. Press ure from facial s urfaces 7. C. In natural teeth. Oblique placement of teeth in alveolar process and laterally inclined alveol ar process itself C. Condyle and lateral pterygoid muscle 8. Posterior slopt' of the articula r emi nence Pos terior wall of glenoid fossa Cen tral area 'A' and 'S' 9. By enamel C. Tympanic p<}rtion C.. 118 l ac Printable Copy to DrEzaby . Dentin D . lnf{>rior belly o f late ral pterygoid D. Post-glenoid tuberde 10. exCt pt: A. Periodontal ligament 6. Articular errunel'lCe B. Condyle and d isc B. Aftf'r resorption. The parts of glenoid fossa that participate9 in activity is: A. Both 'A' and ' B' D . Squamous portion of Temporal bone cons is ts of following. Supt'rior belly of medial pterygoid B. Mandibular fossa D . Disc and temporal bone C. B. Superior belly of late ral pterygoid C. Retrusion of Condyle is mainl y influenced by: A. Changes in incisive papilla B.

Peripheral part 19. nerve-free tissue D . Tensile (orces C. Join t remodeling 8. Compressive forces ·0 . Central part C. Anterior slope of ntirular eminence D . the Temporomandibulu joint bears predominantly: B. Pos t('rior pa rt D . Contain nerves 8. Compressive forces A. uupt : A. Shea r forces B. Appearance of cartibge cells D.sculu is: A . Crest of articular eminence B. The uticulu surfaces of Temporomand ibulu joint: A. Increased vascularity of art icular disc C. Both ' A' and ' 8' C. the temporomandi- bular joint takes up: A. Clycosaminoglycans 11 C " II " D 20 C 21 D Z2 II Printable Copy to DrEzaby . Both ' A ' and 'C' U . Hyaline cartilage C. 'A' and ' 8' 20. Hdp in drainage of blood easily 18. In natural dentition. In completely edentulous sta te. In Temporomandibular joint. Ant('rior part B.~ 215 ] MCQI for PGlin Proithodontici 17. Posterior slope of the articular eminence C. Shearing forces 21. ConLlin nonvascular. the fibrous con· nKtin tiu ue is thicbd at: A. In the Temporomandibulu joint. phys io logic adaptations to fun ctio n cons ists of followi ng. Tensile forces D . Portion o f articulu disc that is aYl.

Contain nerves 8. Posterior slope of the articular eminence C. Tensile forces D . Crest of articular eminence B. the fibrous con· nKtin tiu ue is thicbd at: A. Portion o f articulu disc that is aYl. Anterior slope of ntirular eminence D .~ 215 ] MCQI for PGlin Proithodontici 17. ConLlin nonvascular. Both ' A' and ' 8' C. Both ' A ' and 'C' U . Shea r forces B. the Temporomandibulu joint bears predominantly: B. Pos t('rior pa rt D . In natural dentition. In the Temporomandibulu joint. Peripheral part 19. Shearing forces 21. Appearance of cartibge cells D. Hdp in drainage of blood easily 18. In Temporomandibular joint. Compressive forces A. Clycosaminoglycans 11 C " II " D 20 C 21 D Z2 II Printable Copy to DrEzaby . uupt : A. Increased vascularity of art icular disc C. Tensile (orces C. Central part C. Hyaline cartilage C. Compressive forces ·0 .sculu is: A . the temporomandi- bular joint takes up: A. Ant('rior part B. phys io logic adaptations to fun ctio n cons ists of followi ng. 'A' and ' 8' 20. nerve-free tissue D . Join t remodeling 8. The uticulu surfaces of Temporomand ibulu joint: A. In completely edentulous sta te.

Anterior digastric 29. Circumoral C Elevator muscles D. Elev. Th e estim ated r. Hyoglossus A. Superior belly of lateral pterygoid and digastric C. exupt: B. Protrusion B.lnd ible is produced by: A.ltion o f m. t xupt: A. Posterior fibers of Temporalis help in: A. Palatoglossus C. Buccinator B. Styloglossus 2:3C 24 D %511 Z8 C 21 11 280 2IIA Printable Copy to DrEzaby . Sup(' rior belly of lateral pterygOid B. Silent period of th e muscl e: A.1 : 10. 1 : 3 B. Inferior belly of lateral p terygoid and digastric D . Prosthodontics 21 7 r ij 23. Centric occlusion D. 1 : 1000 Cl:700 0 . Genioglossus D. When the muscle is n ot contracting B. All of the above are true 28. Facial n erve supplies follo win g.Complete Dentur. Tongue muscle 27. In somatic awall ow. Lat('ral movement 26. follo wing muscles are active: A. Hypoglossal nerve suppl ies a ll extri nsic mu scles of tongu e. Can be elicited during contra ction of muscle C [s shortened in p ain dys functions D . RetfUsion C.l tory muscle fi bers is: A.000 24. Facial B. Non(' of the above 25. Sta pediUS C Stylohyoid D .ltio of ne uron to mu ti c.

They are abnormal oral structures 68. Thick layer of mucus C. Mastication C. S~h B. A. Present during development of maxilla itself 70. The minimum amount of vertical bone height requirf'd to conduct ves libuJopbsty is: A. except. Tori are: A . Following are techniques used for vestibulopluty. Usage o f hydroxyapatite C. I'XC~pt: A. Laminated cortical rone B. They are growing slowly B. They are not growing C. Posterior palatal seal in denture D .5 cm D .5 em 678 68A 69A 708 718 nc Printable Copy to DrEzaby . Following Uf' lruf' for Tori. Delayed overgrowths of the medial margins of horizontal processes of maxilla C. All of the above 69. re 71. Secondary epithelialization D. A Tori affects following. Thick layer of sub-mucus D . Stability of the dent·. Delayed over growth. of medial margins of palatine processes B. Usage o f epithe lial gufls 72. Mucosal advancement B.~ 224 1 Meas for PGsin Prosthodontics 67. They are benign D . Overgrowth from premaxilla D .S em B. except: A . 0. Tori consist of: A.2 cm C. 1.

More expensive mJterials 112 B 113 A 114 B 115 B 11& 8 117 8 Printable Copy to DrEzaby . Depends on careful . Dindvantage of placing postt'rior palatal seal in lrial bue are following. 3-3. Special tray 116. They arc not resilient B. Deepest portion of pos terior palatal seal area is scraped approximately: A. C. palient 10 the 114. Disadvantage of using elastic impN:ssion malerial for placing of poslerior palatal seat aN:a in Fluid Wax te chn iqu e is: A. Trial denture base will be too relen tive C. B. Both 'A' and 'B' D . B. Wax will not adhere to the material C. 2-2. except: A. In Fluid W. Preferred imprusion malnial for Fluid Wax technique placing posterior palatal seal area is: Elastic impression material Zinc oxide eugenol Eit her 'A' or 'B' Reversible hydrocolloid 117. Potential for ove r compression of tissues B... B.~ 232 1 Measlor PGsin Prosthodontics 112.5 nun D .. 1-1. D. Trial d e nture base C. following.5 mm 113. Final wash impression D . the posterior palatal 5eal . Adv. except: II is a ph ysiologic technique More accurate maxillo-ma nd ibula r record Early determina tion of re tention Indica tion of poslerior ext('llt of the d enture.5 mm B. D.craping of Ihe cast 11 5.ml/lge of placing posterior palatal seal in trial base are A.un is recordt'd in tht': A.4-4. Primary impression of A..5 mm C. It is nol J physiologic technique D . technique.. C.

CompleteOenture Prolthodontlel [ 239

ij

152. Fo llowing articulators will acce pt face bow Iransfer,
rxcept:

A. 8. C. D.

Grittman articuliltor Kinoscope articulator Stansberry articulator Teledyne articulator

153. In Gysi simple;{ articulator, the cond ylar path is fixed al a nd inci n l guidance is find at : A. 60 dcgrees and 30 dcgrccs 8. 30 degrces and 60 degrees C. 33 degrees and 45 degrecs D. 25 degrees and 60 degrees 154. In G rillman Arti culato r, the casts are mounted based on: A. Monson's C UTVC 8. 8onwill's trianglc C. Conical theory D. Curve of Spec 155. Articulator that in corporates a rotary guidance for milling-in purposes is: A. Gritlman 8 . House articulator C. Dentatus D. Denar

156. Hanau-Mate articulator: A. Has horizontal condylar guidance fixed at 25 degrees B. Bennett angle fixed at 20 degrees C. Will not accept pro trusiv c or lateral in terocdusal record s D . All of the above are true

152 A

153 B

154 B

155 11

156 C

Printable Copy to DrEzaby

~ 2441 Meas lor PGs In Prosthodontics
183. Following articulator i n class IV-S have cus tomizable Bennett gUide: A. Denar 4A S. Gna thoscope C. Simulator D. Denar 5A non-

1M. Pantographic tracings for condylar pathways are not

necessary for complete denture patient because: A. It is time consuming to make B. Resiliency of supporting tissue does not call for its accuracy C. Both' A' and '8' D. Teeth are not present to gUide the mandible 185. Anterior Reference Point helps in following, except: A. Face bow transfer S. Minor adjustment in vertical dimension C. Facilitate arrangemen t of anterior teeth D . Recording centr ic relation 186. Immed iate Side Shift influent": A. Inclination of grooves of posterior teeth S. Inclination of cusps o f posterior teeth C. Both 'A' and ' B' D. Width of the central groove of the posterior teeth 187. In comple te denture, an average intercondy lar distance of is sufficient: A. 94 mm B. 110 mm C. 124 mm D. 138 mm 188. Lack of Bennett adjus tmf'nt in complete df'nture is co nlpenuted by providing: A. Occlusal ad justment for freedom in protrusive B. Occlusal adjustment for frE'Cdom in right lateral C. Occlusal adjustment for freedom in left la teral D. Both 'B' and 'C'
113 C lU II 115 D lae D 1.1 II lSI D

Printable Copy to DrEzaby

CompletaDenture Prosthodontics 245

r

~

189. "anau "2 Non-Arcon a rticula tor can accr pt follo wing facr oows, exupt: A. Fada face bow 8 . Tw irl bow C. Kinematic face bow D. Quick-Mount face bow 190. Whrn usi ng Adju stabl e A"is face oow for "anau "2 articulator: A. The intercondylar distance must be modified using extendible condylar shaft B. The adjustable a" is race bow has to be e"tended to meet the requi rements C. A Hanau H2-X articulator should be used D. Both 'A' and 'C' are true 191. When UlIing a protrusivr rrcord to obtain latrra l condylar guid ancr, the error will be: A. Heavy ocdus.:ll contact on balancing side 8. Heavy occlusal cont~ct on working side C. Heavy ocdusal contact on balancing side and ligh t on working side D . Light occlusal contacl on ba lancing side and heavy on work ing side 192. La te ral condylu guidancr ob tainrd from protrusivr reco rds: A. Is same as prolrusiv<' B. Is s teeper than true lateral inclina tions C. Is less s t~p than true lateral inclinations D . Is better than true lateral measurements 193. Hanau H2 articula to r hiS: A. Adjustable, angled 'foot' incisal gUide pin B. Curved incisal gUide pin C. Straight incisal gUide pin D . Split incisal guide pin
I" D 100 0 111 1 0 lU C In A

Printable Copy to DrEzaby

Axis-orbital plane B. below thl! condylar planl!: 7 mm 47 mm 23 mm 34 mm 196. Has both' A' and ' 0' D . The available Incinl GuidI! Tables for Hanau Radial Shift Articulator arl! foJlowing. 2 mm radius 198. Mechan ical table D . Curved D.ij 2461Measlor PGs In Prosthodontics 194. Pantacrylic tab le ~xupt: 1M C 195 8 196 A li1 C 191 B le11 A Printable Copy to DrEzaby . D.25" B. In Hanau AKon H2. Thl! sUp1'rior wall curva ture in Hanau Radial Shift articulator has a radius of about: A.1" 199. A. Twirl-bow relates muilla to: A. 5 mm ra dius D. 6 mm radius C.tragus plane C. C. 3 mm radius D . 0. Adjusta ble intercondylar distance 197.the notch on in cinl guide is about A. 0. Has curved Immediate Side Shift D. Thl! curvature for Imml!diate Sidl! Shift in Hanau Radial Shift Articulator has about: A.75" C. Flat table C. Ala. Hanau radial shift: A. Has non-adjustable Progressive 1k>nnett Shift c. 0. D. Horizon tal occlusal plane 195. Frankfort Horizon tal Plane D.50" D.

Transfer fixture C. except: A. Omni articulator D. Quick-set recorder has to be added 210.of the above are true 207. Extendible pins D . Is used along with protrusive guides D. Protrusive interocdusal record B. Slidematic face bow C.~ 2481Meas for PGs in Prosthodontics 206. All . Denar Reference Plane Locator locates the: A. Omni C. Detent mechanism: A. Following adjustments in articulators has to be done to accept adjustable axis bce bow. Mark II articulators B. Immediate Side Shift can be set using: A. Quick·Mount face bow 206 B 207 C 201 0 209 0 210 0 des igned by Denar 211 0 Printable Copy to DrEzaby . A point 15 mm anterior to External Auditor Meatus C. Centric interocc!usal record C. For Whip Mho: articulator. Is used in Hanau radial shift articulator B. exctpt: A. A posterior reference point D. Following are ins trulllents Corporation. Both 'A' and 'C' 208. Mark II B. txupt: A. Panadent by Denu 209. Both ' A' and 'C' 211. Telescopic mounting studs B. D4A D. An terior reierence point B. Following are articulators designed Corporation. Helps return the upper member of articula to r to U'ntric position C. QUick set recorder D.

Cast support is not required ~1' " ~1' 8 uo 0 221 " 222 C 222" Printable Copy to DrEzaby • • . Multip le transfer jigs can be osed with face bow C. 43 mm above lower border of upper lip C. 26 mm above low er border of uppe r lip 222. Ad vantage o f Slid ematk face bow is: A.3. To locate the hinge axis B. 1/ 2 the inte rcondyla r distance D . 2 mm 221. 54 mm above lower borde r o f upper lip D .. o f th t' jaws! A. To standa rdize articula tor C. Incisa l table ca. It is kin('matic B. To deter mine Frankfort Ho rizontal Pla ne 220. 1 mrn C. 3/4th of intercondylar di$tance C. Antulor rdt'rence poii'll fo r SHdemitic face bow is: A.n be removed to attach face bow O .. The in tercond yla r d is tance B. 34 mm above inc isIve edge of right central incisor B. To str ibe an a rc 13 mm anterio r to E)(terna l Audilory Meatus C. Arbitrary axis for HaniLi face bow is within _ _ __ o f true ct'n le r of opt'nins axi. uupt : A. 10 mm B. The K ile on the s lid t'matlc face bow reprnenl8: A .~ 250 j Mcal 'or PGI ln PrOlthodontlcl 218. 8 mm 0. Dt'nar Mini Rt'Co rder un bt' un d fo r following. Immed ia te Side Sh ift 219. To determine Ax is-Orbi tal plane D . To stribe an a rc 10 mm a"terior to External Audi lo ry MNtus B. Ric hey condylar miuk. Protrusive horizon tal inclination D . is Lind: A . 1/ 4th o f intercond yla r dis tance • 22.

13 mm p<)S terior C. The audilory pins in Hmau ilrticulilo r a re ___ _ to the condylu center: A. 54 mm and 37 mm D . Condylar track 347 C 348 II 3. Arbitrary ve rticoll landmuks for folce bow trolnsftr in 01 Hanau articulator appNr& on the Inci sal pin. 43 mm and 54 mm 349. 37 mm and 54 mm C. O. -C-:. Cen tric SlOp B.76 mm C.. 3$2 II Printable Copy to DrEzaby . 1I8th tum of the Protrus ive-Retrusive screw equals _ _ _ _ movement of the co ndylu e lement: A. 70 d egrees C. 120 degrees 351. 45 degrees A. 1 mm B. 5 mm B. 5. 60 degrees 0. 13 mm anterior B. The width of the central guiding table of the Incisal Guide table in Holnau l rti culator is .56 mm 350. A. Condylar s haft C.'--_ and b elow tilt Frankfort Horizonul Plan e: A.08 inch C. 12 mm pos terior D . Aud itory p in D . In a Hanolu Protrus ive-Retrusive articulator.008 mm 348. 5. The lateral wings of Incisal Guid e tabl e III Hilnau articulator is adjus tibl e up to: B. 0. 54 mm and 47 mm B.Complete Denture Prosthodontics 273 r ~ 347.005 inch D . in balancing side. 0. In Hanau oIrticulators.20 mm D . 5. 16 mm poster ior 352. the condylar element will mike contact with: A.' 0 350 II 3$1 C .

Following is true for s u blingual flange aru . It cannot form a valve seal 353 A U. can aid in retention of lower denture B. true about linguliz. except: Helps in ~chieving good seal buccally Creates a space bet w een cheek and teeth and external surface of the denture Helps to accumulate food in the buccal a rea It preven ts bu~dnator from neu tralizing th. Alveolar process of maxilla C..lcture H. except: A. Pterygomandibular raphe B. Following in A.lnuf. Nickel C.ij 274 1 MeQslor PGsin Prosthodontics 353. Buccin.lt is used uti<:ublor is: A . Is just dis!~l to angle of the mouth C.ll th. D.ln. If used correctly. Is formed of 7 muscles D . Chromium D. Alveol~r process m~ndible D . 13teul forces from tongue . 0 355 A 358 B 357 A Printable Copy to DrEzaby .tor muscle uises from follo win g.. One of the follow ing is tru e for Modiolus: A. during co ns tru ction of compl ete denture: A. 355. Stainless-steel to m. B. Zygom~ o . It extends from canine to canine C.ltion of occlusion complete den tures.~ 356. Affects denture flange in maxiflary molar area 357. Alwninwn B. The met. C.I . It is at the angle of the mou th B.lu 354. Flange in this area should be ex tended vertically D .

' high if a short curing cycle is employed D . Retromolar pad contains following. Buccal s helf is a s tress bearing area b ecau se: A. Zygom<lticus muscle B. D. The position' of the mandible C. Postero-superior D . Buccinator fibl'-rs B.~ 286 PMea.. Glandular tissue 427. for PGs in Prosthodontics I 424. None of the above 425.. Is about 3% in correctly polymerizl'<l hea t cure d resin B.. The pterygomandibubr raphe • 424 0 425 C 4~ B 427 D 428 0 429 B Printable Copy to DrEzaby . Buccinator fibl'-rs are parallel 426. B. Mylohyoid fi bers C. C. Is about 30% in correctly polymerized heat cured reSIn C...-position: A. Mucosa is non~keratinized to the occlusal load D . Antero-inferior C. Determined by the orbicularis oris D . Th e res idual mo nome r level in denture bases: A. It has cortical bone C. Is usually associatc<i with a sore mouth Is usually associated wi th wearing denture at night Is more common in men than women Both A and B are correct 429. Both 'A' and 'C' are correc t 428. Both 'A' and 'B' ar~ corn.. Superior constrictor fibers D.. Is likely to bt. eXrl'pt: A. Thickness of bu ccal flange of a complete de nture is affected by: A. Ce ntric relati on is a . Denture s tomatitis: A.::t B. Antero'pos terior B.

Inc reased bul k in palate D . Esthetics is main tained C. Slightly concave bu t not under the lingual surfaces D . Balancing side con tact B. Heaving con tact on balancing side. 'he common cause for fraclure of teeth as well as the d . Convex in nature 10 keep the longue away 481. Size of the face B. Color of the eye D. Following at .. In a comple'. nlure is: A.~ 296 j Mea. for PG. Made concave H. Made concave under the lingual surfaces of the teeth C. 482. Can be relined later D . Change in occlusal relation C. The lingu .ln PrOithodontifa 478. Balandng side occlusal error includes: A. Form of the face C. No edentulous p~riod for the patient B. Thermal conduc tivity B.. exrept: A. Length of the upper lip 480. Ma)(i llar y cusps He distal to thei r in tercusping positions D. ad vantages of wearing an immediate denture . Decrease in tiSSUf to lerance 411 II 47i C 4IlI C 41 1 C 412 11 Printable Copy to DrEzaby . l flange of the mandibular denture should be: A... wor king teeth ou t o f contact C. The leas t needed information while selecting teeth for es thetics in compltle denture is: A. Maxillary cusps H e mesial to their intercusping positions 479. Prevents excess bleeding . dentu R.

Insis ts on a true hinge axis O . Palatogram C. Microcrystalline wa x O . Speaking wu consists mainly of: B. Lack of equaliza tion of pressure D . Distal cusp o f maxillary second molar to perpendic ul arly downwards to mandibular second molars D. Electromyogram D. except: A .1 consonants ue following. Distal cusp o f maxillary second molar to the posterior end of the denture B. [t is a split axis instrument B. not true for Transograph: A. Pan togra m B.~ 3041 MeQllor PGlln Proltl'lodonilci 524. palatolingu. 'L' 525. In speec h.ll cusp of mandibular molar C. Ins tab ili ty of trial bases B. Electrokinesiogram 527. is called: A. t""pt: A. Distal cusp o f maxil lary second molar to the dist. One of the following i. A record of (on tact made between tongue and th e hard palate during 'puc h. Interference between the bases at distal ends C. Beeswax A. Carding wax 528. Dot.'S not believe in a:'l imaginary line through which the two condyles mlate 526. a blunt apex may be the ruult of following. '5' C. Each condyle functions independe ntly C. During Gothic arch Ira(ing. Pa raffin wax C. 'N' O. Chris ten5en'5 Distance is menu red from: A. Limited range of movement of mandible 524('525(' 528B 527B 52'0 5~0 Printable Copy to DrEzaby . Oistobuccal cusp of b st mandibular molar to a point perpendicular to the maxillary occlusion ri m 529. 'P' B.

lctun's. rious stl'1. su perior D. i3 mm.. Permitting to have ver tical dimension under our control 8. Making the casts in the same dynamiC relati on to each other D . i3 mm. C. following mov~ mtnls (Kcur at th~ joint in its . Tracing its path for duplica tion C. 7. B. D. During a Iranslalory mov~m~nl of mandibl~. The complex slides as condyle rotates D .---cC "c::c:-. medial A. . 10-13 mm. Condyle rotates on underside of disc 5. D. Printable Copy to DrEzaby . 6. .. B. of Ih ~ foll owing is not cDlncl: Inferior su rface of disc is convex Superior su rface of di sc is concave-co nve x from before backward Superior surface is in contact with articular suriilce of temporal bone Infe rior s urfac e of the disc is conCilve and fits to condyle sln'ss bnring arn of disc is: Anterior part In con tact with ilrtleular eminence Inferior part in contact with ilrticular eminence Central part in contact with ilrticular eminence Supero-anteri or su rface of the disc of hing~ Th~ A. except: A. ted hing~ axis on the skin: B. lateral C.~ 318 1 Meas for PGs In Prosthodontics 4. Upper surface of disc contacts articular eminence C. D~t~ rmination axis h ~lp$ us in following. C. in fe rior •• .to th~ loc. Actu al loc.tio n of c~nter of robtion of condyles is -. Making the pa tien t use this location for function B. except: A.. Head of the condyle rotates on the superior surface of the meniscus B. 10-11 mm.. On~ A..

th e . Reference plales by . l(lOOOth of the Inch D. 1110th of the inch c. Either' A' and 'C' 11 . During recording hinge axis. Hinge axis B. if the patient has diffi cultyfpain in exuu ting molndible. Terminal hinge axis 10.9. Customized clutches·metal B. enlric rd oltio n . Lateroretrusion B. PI"s!ic custom made clutches D .000 of an inch 12. Th e writing apparatus () f the Hinge Axis Locollor can be atta ched to patient's jaws using one of the following. Maximum inlercusp~l position D . Cent ric occlusion C. Compound clutches 13. oincides with: A.' the mandible C. l/l00th of the inch B. Lalerodetrusion D . A n oulwnd and down ward Prog ru siv" Sid" Shift is otherwi se call ed u: A . Use bite plane for some days D . Lalerosurtrusion C. Lalcrotrusion • D 10 D 11 C 12 D 13 C Printable Copy to DrEzaby . except: A. In nonnal denlititon. following un be don e: A. Manually handl!. 1/ 10.Iuarl C. The Split-US! tec hnique of mountin g usts u n demons trate disc repancy of about: A. Use a jig to Irain the patienl B.

. Foliowing aN' attachm~nt tro~ for lingual bradng arm for an ~xt~nsion d ~ntur~ bas~. Lingual a rm provides re ten tion Lingual arm provides bracing The semiprecision rest provides bracing They c an be intracoronal Printable Copy to DrEzaby . Should occupy o nly the occlusal 1/3rd of lingual surface D . D. Have lesser frictiona l area o. B. A. In Se mi precision Attachm ents follo wing aN' e_Tcept. Should be carried around to opposi te proximal space C. Follo wing statements ue true for semiprecis ion re sts. Occlusal rests 26.cd in areas whe re vertical C." spa~e i~ lac king 27. Milling machine is not required ex cep t. They hav e parallel sides They have tapt'red sides Bracing action is less They may be carved in wax tru~. It should be in the same height as a ttachment B.. C. Ca n be u.~ 3221Meas for PGs in Prosthodontics 24. C. except: A. used in di stal except. A. 28. Retention grooves D . Fo llowing are true for Channel·Shoulder pin sys tem. except.. A. Gives firm bracing acti on D . It adds s tability to the prosthesis 25. 8.mented and a removable section B. D. Parallel·sided pi ns C. Chann~l Should~r Pin (CSP) s ys tem cons is ts of followin g. A «. A.

Retention through ~ minor conn~ tor engaging ~ dimple on lingual aspe<:t C. Processing changes that occur in acrylic will not affect location of attachment C. except: A. Retaining dimple is pl~ced in line with dowel 30. Thompson Dowel system consists of following. They must be aligned with edentulous ridge D. In a Dalbo system the verticill load Ciln be transferred through any of the following.General Topic. 323 r ~ 29. They provide resistance to ro tational and lateral displacing forces D. Accidental breakage of acrylic is unlikely 31. . When constnu::ling iI Unililteral removilble bridge using Precision Attachment. They must be aligned with sagittal pla ne C.xapt: A. Spring B. except: A.advant~ges are following. Solid spacer C. Will increase surface area for attachment of acrylic D. except: A. Following statements are wrong for alignment of hinge in a extracoronill iltlilchment.. They do not allow any play between male and female sections of the attachment B. the male attachment can be joined by il gold bar . They are available in two configurations C. except: A. Following are tme for Dalbo Allchment. They have to be aligned slightly tw isted lingually 32. No addi tional bulk 33. Attachments are better retentive in acrylic B. Intracoronal retainer B. Retention through a minor connector engaging buccal ~spect D. Reducing vertical space in female section D. Bracing arms HC JOC 310 32A 330 Printable Copy to DrEzaby . Hinges do not wear with time B.

400 grams 0 . Pain during percussion D . except: A. Has a lo ng cent ral screw C. Removable prosthesis completely supported by implants and / or teeth B. Printable Copy to DrEzaby . [t enables differentiation and quan ti fication of both hard and soft tissues C. Following a re signs and symptoms of failure of <In implanl. Removable prosthesis that restores anatomic crowns and portion of root of natural too th 60. Fixed/removabJe prosthesis that replaces natura l crowns and portion of soft tissues D. [t has . Severe radiO"-opacity around the implant B. Following statements ire true for direct transfer co ping. Rr-5 in implanto logy is a: A . lor PGsin Prosthodontics 56. Huril:unta l mobility .500 grams 58. tJecept: A .~ 328 JMea.> 0. The force applied to the implanllo check ils mobility is approximately: A. Bone loss around o mplant C. [t was invented bv House B. Removable prosthesis CQmbining implant and soft tissue support C. Following are true for Computed Tomogra phy.1 hollow transfer coping B. Does not require .ny invasive tl'Chnique SSD 57 D seA U8 so. It is a digital and ma thematical imaging tffhn iq ue D.5 mm 59. It rem~ins within imp ression till m~ster C~5t is poured D. 250 grams C. except: A. 1000 g r~ms B. [t requi res impression materials with elastic p rO"perties 57.

e bone 75. 331 r ~ 73. First molar B. Offers limited me<:hanical advantage D .General Topic. except: A.e torque on implants B. Greate r initial bone width C.. May not be aff('(. Most idul posterior tooth to re place with an implant is: A. Disa dvantage of D4 bone for implant placement are following. It is placed more pa latally to enha nce esthetics D . Difficult to ob tain ri ~id fixation 74. Canine may be angled d is tally and roots curved B.ted by bone density and implant design D . Following are troe whil e replacing maxillary first premolar with implants. Occlusal contact is (YVef centra l fossa 13/1. It is most beneficial in less dens. Thicker facial plate of bone D. Following are troe about Reverse Torque Testing. Advantages of posterior single tooth restora tion for Implants are following. Greater diameter hydroxyapa tite coated implants are needed C. Non--t:ritical esthetics 76. except: A. 5e<:ond premolar D. First p remolar C. Ha s high amount of tra becular bone B. excep t: A. 168 TIC Printable Copy to DrEzaby . Verticill height limitations should be conside red C. Involves verification for rigid fixation of implants C.. excep t: A. Involves placing revers. Variable bone quali ty B. Second molar 77. 1'C 15/1.

. Designed for screw-retainerl res torati ons ~rt' 93. Linkow D. Mi nimi«e clamping force B. except: A. Pure titanium B.~ 334 j Meas for PGsin Prosthodontics 91. Goldberg Printable Copy to DrEzaby . All o f the above are true 94. A type of Holl ow BlSkct implant C. Following tru e for Es thetiCone ~butme nt for impl~nb. First evide nce o f u se of implan b dates back to approximately: A. All of the abQvc 92..:m torque D. Ha ve hexagonal base C. Roberts and Roberts B. For multiple restora tions D . 600 AD D. Lee C. Ramus blade endosseous implant was developed by: A . Are tapered D . Maximize joint separating force C. All of the above are true 95. 100 AD B. 1000 AD c. Cera One abu tment: A. A surface adherent tita nium disc B. Implan t placed w ith 20-30 N. Following are factors to be considered fo r keepi ng the implant screws tight: A. Made of titanium alloy B. O nplanl is: A . Embedd ed into bone D. Screw-reta inerl C. 1500 AD 96.

Prevention of bruxism B. Mandibular incisors will not get entrapped behind maxillary incisors D. Prevention of temporomandibular dysfunction C. All of the above 158. Treatment of temporlmandibular joint dysfunction Diagnostic device To measure vertical dimension Aid for registering centric relat ion for restorative pu"""" 160. Patient has to disdude posterior teeth B. Centric relation achievement 151. B. Aggravated curve of spee B. Occlusal s plint ciln be used as one of the following tXCt pt. Both 'A' and '8' D . Increase in high overjet D . A. Cuspid-guid ed disclusion is iI requirement in splints for: A. Obtaining exact centric relation is not possible during function disturbances C. It is difficuJtto adjust once mandible is refXlSitioned after treatment C. Patients cannot masticate B. In cisal tab le i8 not used for splint beca use. Patient has to masticate w ith splint D. Presence of balancing interferences C. A. Presence of deep overbite 154i C 157 8 153 8 1St C 160 C Printable Copy to DrEzaby . C. A. Freedom in (entrk is usenliil l in splints beuuse.156. All of the above are true 159. O. In crease of vertical dimens ion during splint therapy depend s on following tXctp t: A.

Acceptable inter ocdusal distance B. Freedom of contact moveme nt 195 B Printable Copy to DrEzaby . Monoplane ocdusion C. A. Bryron's de trrm in an ts of a p hys io logical occlusion for implants indu d r s foll owing. Bilateral contads in retruded closure D . excep t.~ 352 JMeas for PGs in Prosthodontics 195.

EMCA House..JPB RI . T .oo JAYPE~:~. 2oo. 231238 Printable Copy to DrEzaby . O~H E RS MEDICAL E B R.

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful